+)

aS

Ses

Hy

ut re
eae

Ot We ALL
Nec
ay a hl

4:
ae eat ‘ i

ae

et
HAA 1

eae
oe
sas

ay
=
=

or 2
Ar,

Cal

eon me

er
oe eee

se
3
eXS*,
ease
<
¢ =
SE eee

. hive va
aD Vetta
HET
¢ “oe

=e

=

Saeco all
Tee

AN
Ay ath ;
q ny
abhi
ie
rit ve
tie
a
‘

oe

Ss
—-

Cae

Hh Wie rit i
Me uh at
nial CM he

=
Soe
Serres

= =

in eo
a

aS

4 sieht is
i 4 if

VAL yt i
if ina

<>
=

ad
i
yi

a

a>

ee aoe
kee
<7
ie =

Soereespoe
<7 3 Sixes
ess
See Mees
Lee E:
=<

x

SET ste e
—<— —
a tnee >s
RA
RSS Sects.
ol

4 ty t

DRA ca

Hands ae nid at
} Wists ‘io ‘3 ‘

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
University of Toronto

http://www.archive.org/details/report1886harv

Edy i : an i Aid y's
try A rp yh ‘ te a Bi we 7
AO laiens (oa ae,

i “ r
SSS
‘ pinay
a’ oo
i
}
=
SG

poyy

aa

ANNUAL REPORT

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,
TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

- AS86877. -
fe /9 fi

CAMBRIDGE:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1887.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. BOWDITCH.
OFFICERS.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .
HERMANN A. HAGEN .

NATHANIEL S. SHALER.

E. L. MARK

W. M. DAVIS

J. ELIOT WOLFF .
HOWARD AYERS
WALTER FAXON
D. D. SLADE
SAMUEL GARMAN .

J. WALTER FEWKES .

WILLIAM BREWSTER
ALPHEUS HYATT .
MISS F. M. SLACK

Curator.
Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Entomology.
Professor of Paleontology.
Hersey Professor of Anatomy.
Assistant Professor of Geography.
Instructor in Petrography.
Instructor in Zoblogy.
Assistant in Zoilogy.
Assistant in Osteology.

. Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in charge of Invertebrates, and of the

Newport Marine Laboratory.

Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
Assistant in Paleontology.

Librarian.

oe

4 ay

rado)a7- [2 92/9),
624743
6. oS

REPORT.

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE: —

DouRInG the past year the following courses of instruction have
been given at the Museum : —

A course in Biology, by Professor Farlow and Dr. Ayers.

A course in Zodlogy, by Dr. Ayers, who had charge of the
general Biological Laboratory assisted by Mr. G. H. Parker.

Two courses in Cryptogamic Botany, by Professor Farlow.

General Lectures on Zodlogy, by Professor Mark. <A course in
Microscopic Anatomy and a course of Embryology were also given
by Professor Mark. In the Laboratory work he was assisted by
Mr. G. H. Parker.

Professors J. D. Whitney, Shaler, and Davis gave the usual
courses in Geology, Paleontology, Physical Geography, and
Meteorology.

Since my last report a Petrographical Laboratory has been
fitted up at the Museum, together with a small room for the
necessary chemical work, and another in the basement of the
building for making rock sections. The Petrographical Depart-
ment has been placed in charge of Mr. J. E. Wolff, who has
given Lectures and supervised the Laboratory work.

For the details of the courses of instruction, I would refer
to the accompanying special Reports of the Professors and In-
structors.

In addition to the regular instruction of the University, I may
mention a course by Dr. Slade on Comparative Osteology.

The Assistants of the Museum, Professors Hagen and Faxon,
Dr. Slade, Mr. Garman, Mr. Brewster, Professor Hyatt, and

4

Dr. Fewkes, have all spent considerable time in supplying
material and information to special students in their various
departments. A number of students interested in Marine In-
vertebrates accompanied Dr. Fewkes on several dredging excur-
sions. The lectures he had been accustomed to give, however,
were not continued during the past year. It would be an ad-
vantage to the students of Natural History if the special and
exact knowledge of the Museum Assistants could be made
available in the way of lectures or informal instruction as a
part of their course of study.

In my last Report I called attention to the want of Laboratory
room in the Museum building, and to the great need of an ad-
ditional section of the building to meet the requirements of the
large classes in all departments of Natural History. The Geo-
logical and Palontological Laboratories ought to be supple-
mented by properly equipped rooms for Lithology and Geography,
as well as by small exhibition rooms devoted. to those subjects,
to form a part of the general exhibition scheme of the University
Museum. Another large Lecture-room is absolutely necessary,
and an additional section of the Museum building would merely
place the Geological and Geographical Departments on the same
footing as Zodlogy and Paleontology.

Thanks to the efforts of Professor Goodale, a sum sufficiently
large for the erection of a section of the University Museum has
been secured. It will be devoted to the Botanical Laboratories
and the Botanical Museum, which will be connected with the
other Exhibition Rooms of the University Museum and of the
Museum of Comparative Zodlogy. The Cryptogamic Labora-
tory, which has for some years been sheltered in the Zodlogical
Laboratory and work-rooms, would give us additional space in
that department. It is, however, very important that the sec-
tion needed for Geology and Geography should adjoin the pres-
ent University Laboratories, and that the Botanical Department
should follow next, in order to retain in the Exhibition Rooms
the sequence most natural for a public exhibit.

The new staircase erected to facilitate the access of the pub-
lic to the Exhibition Rooms has been completed, and serves the
purpose for which it was planned.

Important additions have been made in the equipment of all
our Laboratories, materially increasing their efficiency.

5

Dr. Fewkes has, as usual, taken charge of the Newport Marine
Laboratory. He has continued his work on the development of
Echinoderms. Four students passed a part of the summer at
Newport, collecting and preparing material for future work on
the Eyes of Lobsters and on Ascidians.

I may mention the following persons to whom material for
study has been sent: Mr. J. A. Allen, Professor Cope, Lieut.
Thomas Casey, Dr. Joubin, Professors Leidy, Lovén, Sollas, and
Wilder, and Mr. Robert Ridgway. A number of exchanges
have been made, which are mentioned in the special Reports
of the Museum Assistants.

A number of specialists have made use of our collections,
and carried on their work for a time in the Museum building.
The Fish, Reptile, Bird, Insect, Invertebrate, Osteological, and
Paleontological collections have all been freely examined and
consulted during the past year. I may specially mention the
study of our White River beds Vertebrate Collection by Pro-
fessors Scott and Osborne, of which a preliminary notice has
been published in the Museum Bulletin; and the systematic
study of a large part of our South American Fishes by President
Jordan, which will be incorporated in his final Report on the
Fishes of South America.

The principal accessions to our collections are the following: —

The specimens we continue to receive from Professor H. A.
Ward, to fill the gaps in the Birds and Mammals of our Exhibi-
tion Rooms; a series of types of Chinese Fishes and Reptiles
from the Lyons Museum, and purchases of West Indian and
African species, and a number of small collections of Insects.

A collection of Invertebrates made by the “ Albatross,” from
the U. 8. Fish Commission.

A collection of Fossils from the Secondary rocks of England,
selected for the Museum, through the courtesy of Dr. Woodward
of the British Museum, by Mr. Etheridge.

Several collections of Fossils from Professor Shaler, a valuable
collection of typical Fossils presented by James Hall from the
Board of Regents of the State University of New York, and a
small collection of Fossil Mammals from the Phosphorites of
Southern France.

A collection from the Middle Cambrian of the United States,
from Mr. C. D. Walcott of the Geological Survey.

.

6

The greater part of our collection of North American Spi-
ders, which had been sent to Count Keyserling for study, has
been returned. He has during the past ten years published
several papers largely based upon the material received from the
Museum.

Professor Lesquereux has returned the fossil plants sent him
to assist in the preparation of his Report on Cretaceous Plants
for the United States Geological Survey.

We have also received two additional invoices of wax models
from Drs, Ziegler and Weisker, for the use of the Instructors in
Zoblogy.

The Museum is again indebted to Messrs. Brewster, Cabot,
Lyman, and Slade, for their interest in behalf of their respective
departments. We also owe to Mr. Augustus Hemenway the
collections made by Dr. Fewkes while he accompanied him on
the Pacific coast.

As will be seen from the Reports of the Assistants, the condi-
tion of the collections continues excellent. In proportion as the
gaps in our Exhibition Rooms are filled, the care of the collec-
tions in the various departments becomes less and less a burden.
By carefully considering our purchases and ovher acquisitions, the
Assistants will, I hope, be able to devote more and more of their
time to original work.

A large amount of material ready for exhibition has been
placed in both the Atlantic and Pacific Rooms, and many gaps
have been filled in our other Exhibition Rooms.

For the Tertiary Exhibition Room a fine restoration of Di-
noceras has been purchased, through the kindness of Profes-
sor Marsh, and has been prepared and mounted by Mr. J. H.
Emerton.

Professor Hyatt has so far advanced with the preliminary
arrangement of our Invertebrate Fossils, that, for the first time in
the history of the Museum, it has become possible to form some
opinion of the value of our collection. The Museum is indebted
to Messrs. Jackson and Brooks for the assistance they have ren-
dered to Professor Hyatt while engaged in the Paleontological
collections. .

Professor Faxon has kindly continued in charge of our col-
lection of Crustacea, and he has spent considerable time on his
Revision of the Cray-Fishes.

7

A list of the Museum publications issued during the past Aca-
demic year is given in Appendix A of this Report. They con-
sist of five numbers of the Bulletin, and two numbers of the
Memoirs. This is rather a smaller amount of published matter
than usual; but several of the Bulletins have been delayed from
the difficulty of obtaining the necessary illustrations. Also one
volume of the Memoirs, to contain Ehlers’s Florida Annelids,
will be issued shortly as a whole, as well as the two volumes
of the Bulletin containing my General Report on the “ Blake ”
expeditions. An addition to the list shows the publications in
preparation, and with each special Report will be found a list
of the publications of the Assistants of the Museum, of the pub-
lications based upon the materials of the institution, or of in-
vestigations carried on by the Professors and students of the
University in our Laboratories.

Over 400 volumes, and more than 1,500 parts of volumes and
pamphlets, have been added to the Library during the past year.

The Museum has lost the services of Mr. Lyman, who has been
connected with it from the beginning, either as one of the origi-
nal Trustees, or as member of its Faculty, since the Museum
became a part of the University. During the whole of that time
Mr. Lyman has not only been engaged upon his investigations
of the Ophiurans, but has shown his deep interest in many ways
in the welfare of the Museum and in its progress. Unfortunately,
tke state of Mr. Lyman’s health became such that he felt com-
pelled to tender his resignation as member of the Faculty and as
Assistant in the Museum. The Faculty most reluctantly ac-
cepted his resignation, and nominated Professor H. P. Bowditch
to fill this vacancy, and this nomination has been confirmed by
the President and Fellows.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CAMBRIDGE, October 1, 1887.

REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Jostan D. Wurrney, Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.

In this department a course of Lectures (two a week, lasting
through the College year) was delivered to about a dozen mem-
bers of the Senior Class in College, and a few others, — graduates
and teachers, or Assistant Professors. The subject of this course
was the physical geography and geology, and the mineral and
agricultural resources of the United States, with especial refer-
ence to the possible and probable future development of these
resources. ‘This course was, to a considerable extent, a working
over, with the aid of extensive cartographic and photographic
illustrations, of material collected for the article ‘“‘ United States,”
to be published in the twenty-third volume of the Encyclopedia
Britannica, mention of which article was made in the last year’s
Report. This article, which, as written, would occupy the space
of an ordinary octavo volume of about 300 pages, has been
somewhat abbreviated and condensed by the editors of the En-
cyclopedia ; in view of this fact, and since it is believed that
this work will form a convenient text- or reference-book for
College and other students, it will probably soon be republished,
with considerable additions and emendations, in separate book
form.

The preparation of definitions of words in physical geography,
geology, lithology, mining, and metallurgy, for the Century Dic-
tionary, has absorbed much time during the past year. This work
has been done, partly because it seemed very desirable that
words in these branches of science should somewhere be correctly
and fully defined (which is something that has not yet been
accomplished), and also because it falls in, and is in harmony,
with a work long since contemplated, and now in actual prepa-
ration by the Sturgis-Hooper Professor; namely, a somewhat
elaborate and complete discussion of the nature and origin of
mineral deposits, for which work he has, for several years, been

9

collecting the materials. Incidentally arising out of this defini-
tion work, and closely connected with it, has been the preparation
of a small volume, now about half through the press, in which
are given the results of some investigations into the names of
the topographical features of this and other countries, with which
are interwoven various historical matters connected with geo-
graphical discovery, especially in the Northwestern United
States.

Field-work has also been carried on, to a limited extent, in
connection with this investigation of the surface deposits and
glacial phenomena of Northeastern North America, mention of
which investigations was made in the last Report. It is hoped
that a preliminary statement of progress made in this investiga-
tion may be got ready for publication in the coming spring, and
that it may form a part of the second volume of the Geological
Series of the Museum Bulletin.

Professor Wadsworth’s work on the lithological collections has
been continued during his vacations, and it was expected that
the second and concluding portion of his volume of ‘ Lithologi-
cal Studies ” would before this time have been ready for the
press. His recent appointment as Director of the Michigan Min-
ing School will render a further delay necessary. This delay is
much to be regretted, but it is one for which the Sturgis-Hooper
Professor is not responsible.

10

REPORT

ON THE INSTRUCTION IN GEOLOGY, PALZONTOLOGY,
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY, AND PETROGRAPHY.

By Proressors N. S. SHaLterR and W. M. Davis, anp Mr. J. E. Wo.rFr.

DurinG the Academic year 1886-87, the following courses of
instruction were given in the Geological and Paleontological
Laboratory, and in the field, by N. 8. Shaler and his Assistants.

1. N. H. 4. <A course in Elementary Geology, by N. S. Shaler;
two lectures a week with certain required reading, attended by one hun-
dred and sixty-two students.

2. Laboratory Course. A course of practical geological exercises
in laboratory and in the field, by Mr. Harris, designed especially for those
who intended, in subsequent years, to continue the study of Geology and
Paleontology ; attended by sixty-one students.

3. N. H. 8. <A course in Advanced Geology, by N. S. Shaler,
Wn. M. Davis, and J. E. Wolff; two lectures a week, together with the
assigned field-work, which was supervised by Prof. Davis and Mr. Wolff.
In the winter season the field-work was replaced by the study of models
and geological maps, and reports on different areas. Students in this
course were required to prepare each two theses on assigned subjects.
Only those who had previously passed a satisfactory examination in Ele-
mentary Geology were permitted to attend. Forty-six persons received
this instruction.

4, N. H.14. A course in Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler; two
lectures a week, together with laboratory work and assigned theses,
attended by twenty-eight students.

5. N. H. 16. A course in field-work, designed to afford special
training in the processes of geological surveying, by N.S. Shaler, Wm.
M. Davis, and John E. Wolff ; attended by ten students.

6. N.H.17. A course in Historic Geology, designed to train the
student in the determination of geological horizons. This course was
attended by two students.

During the winter season the students in the advanced classes
attended regular evening meetings, designed to serve the purpose
of the Seminaria of the German Universities.

11

During the summer of 1887, twenty-two students, eight of
whom had been previously trained in the classes of the Univer-
sity, received systematic training in field-work. Sixteen of these
persons were included in the Summer School of Geology, which
was taught in Cambridge, at two points in Southern Connecticut,
in the Catskills, and at North Adams, by the officers of this
department.

During the year the following papers oF a scientific nature
have been published by N.S. Shaler: —

1. The Fluviatile Swamps of New England. American Journal of
Science, March, 1887.

2. Preliminary Report on the Sea-coast Swamps of the Eastern United
States, in the Sixth Annual Report of the Director of the U. S. Geologi-
cal Survey.

3. Notes on Taxodium distichum, or Bald Cypress. Memoirs of the
Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVI., No. 1.

4. On the Original Connection of the Eastern and Western Coal Fields
of the Ohio Valley. Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy,
Vol. XVI., No. 2.

5. Four papers on the study of Field Geology, in the Boston Journal
of Science.

6. On the Stability of the Earth. Scribner’s Magazine, Vol. I., No. 3.

7. On the Forests of North America. Scribner’s Magazine, Vol. I.,
No. 5.

8. On the Instability of the Atmosphere. Scribner’s Magazine, Vol.
PENo. 2:

9. On the Origin and Nature of Rock Gas. The Forum, April, 1887.

During the past year, the in-door work of Professor W. M.
Davis.has been carried on in the Lawrence Scientific School
building, on account of lack of room in the Museum; but it is
hoped that this arrangement may be only temporary. His Ele-
mentary Course in Meteorology and Physical Geography (N. H.
1) was attended by twenty-eight students; the Advanced Course
(N. H. 20), by two students. It is proposed in the coming year
to give even more attention than heretofore, in the course in
Physical Geography (Physiography), to the description of the
form and development of geographic types, thus introducing into
geography the principle so successfully employed at present in
biological teaching.

The share of Mr. Davis in geological instruction has been

12

almost entirely in field-work. Besides this regular work in term
time, an excursion was made in the April recess, with a party of
eight students, to New Britain, Conn., where attention was given
to the structure of the Triassic monoclinal; and the Summer
School of Geology, while under Mr. Davis’s direction, spent ten
days at the same place in July, and then moved to Catskill,
N. Y., for a week in August. Both of these stations proved

to be excellently adapted to the needs of practical field in-
struction.

In December, 1886, Mr. Davis gave five lectures in Boston, on
‘Problems in Physical Geography,” in the Lowell Free Course
under the direction of the Boston Society of Natural History.

The following papers have been published by Mr. Davis: —

1. Relation of the Coal of Montana to the Older Rocks: a Report on
Field-work in 1883 for the Northern Transcontinental Survey, published
(1887) in Report of Census of 1880, Vol. XV. pp. 697-712.

2. The Mechanical Origin of the Triassic Monoclinal in the Connecti-
cut Valley. Abstract in Proceedings of the American Association, 1886.
In full in American Journal of Science, November, 1886.

3. Methods of Instruction in Geological Investigation: an Address
read in December, 1886, before the Association of American Naturalists.
Revised and published in American Naturalist, September, 1887.

4, Three brief articles on Cyclones, printed on the Pilot Charts of the
North Atlantic, issued by the U. S. Hydrographic Office for August,
September, and October, 1886.

5. Mountain Meteorology. Appalachia, 1886.

6. The Foehn in the Andes. American Meteorological Journal, May,
1887.

7. Monthly Bulletin of the New England Meteorological Society, from
October, 1886, to September, 1887. Edited with assistance of Sergt. O. N.
Oswell, Signal Corps U. S. Army.

Three rooms have been assigned to the Petrographical Labora-
tory, in charge of Mr. Wolff. A large room was used for the
lectures and microscopic work and collections, another room for
the chemical work, and a room in the basement for making thin
sections of rocks with a grinding machine. The laboratory
was provided with a large Nachet microscope and other smaller
microscopes, an electro-magnet, and other petrographical appa-
ratus. In addition to the other collections, the large Brooks
collection of American and foreign rocks was received for

13

study. There are at present about one thousand rock sections
with the collections.

The instruction of Mr. Wolff consisted of lectures twice a
week, and laboratory work. The course was attended by seven
students throughout the year, and to others instruction was
temporarily given.

Mr. Wolff’s own work has been a study of the altered sedi-
ments represented by the gneissic rocks of the Green Mountains,
in connection with three summers of field-work in that region.
The results are interesting in their bearing on metamorphism.

14

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN BIOLOGY.
By Proressors Farrow AND Mark, anp Dr. AYERS.

THE courses in Zodlogy in charge of Professor Mark during
the past academic year have remained substantially as during the
previous year, with the exception of Nat. Hist. 2, which, as a
part of a general plan to provide half-year elementary courses in
several branches of science, was reduced from a full course to
a half course. It was also thought desirable to introduce labo-
ratory exercises as a part of the work. It being obviously im-
practicable, as well as undesirable, to train a large number of
students, the most of whom never expect to pursue zodlogy fur-
ther, in the difficult labor of making dissections, the instructor
has been able to require in this course only the study of material
already prepared. ‘This, however, has proved to be a valuable
means of illustrating and enforcing the subjects treated of in the
lectures, and the result warrants a continuation of the plan. In
these laboratory demonstrations the instructor has had the effi-
cient aid of Mr. G. H. Parker as assistant. The course was
given during the first half of the year, and was completed by
seventy students, —one Graduate, eleven Seniors, nineteen
Juniors, twenty-one Sophomores, twelve Freshmen, five spe-
cial students, and one Scientitic School student. There were
two lectures a week. For the Laboratory demonstrations —
four hours a week — the class was divided into sections.

In N. H. 13 there were five students, — three Graduates, one
Junior, and one Scientific School student. The most attention
was given this year to Hydra, Star-fishes, and the Earth-worm.

Of the four persons who pursued embryological work (N. H.9),
one has produced a paper, which was completed in June, and will
soon appear in the Bulletin of the Museum: ‘The Eyes in Scor-
pions, by G. H. Parker.” The work of two others was inter-
rupted before the close of the year, but their papers will be

15

submitted in the course of the autumn. The investigations of
the fourth student will be continued during the coming year.

Since the last Report, Professor Mark has published a paper
on “Simple Eyes in Arthropods,” in the Museum Bulletin,
Vol. XIII., No. 3, February, 1887.

About the middle of the year several of the advanced students,
the Instructors in Zodlogy, and some of the Museum Assistants,
commenced a series of informal bi-weekly meetings for the dis-
cussion of zodlogical topics; these meetings were continued
till the close of the year, and proved to be interesting and
profitable.

During the college year 1886-87 instruction was given by
Dr. Ayers in two courses of Zodlogy to forty-four students.

A course in Vertebrate Anatomy was completed by thirteen
students ; one Graduate, eleven Seniors, and one special student.
The lectures and class exercises, fifty-four in number, were
devoted to purely anatomical topics, and were occasionally fol-
lowed by class demonstrations of the more important and acces-
sible objects. The Laboratory work embraced the study by
dissection of the following animals as types: the Lamprey, the
Skate, the Cod, the Pigeon, and the Cat. As text-books, the
class used W. N. Parker’s translation of Wiedersheim’s ‘ Com-
parative Anatomy of Vertebrates,” T. J. Parker's “ Zodtomy,”
and Mivart’s “The Cat.”

A half course in Zoology, forming the second half of the
course in Elementary Biology, was completed by thirty-one stu-
dents ; six Seniors, sixteen Juniors, five Sophomores, one Fresh-
man, two special students, and one Scientific student. The
work was begun in February, and included twenty-six lectures
and class exercises, with Laboratory work three days in the
week. The following animals were studied in the Laboratory :
Paramecium, Vorticella (or Stentor), prepared specimens of a
Campanularian Hydroid and its Medusa, Antedon, the Starfish,
the Sea-Urchin, a Holothurian, the Lobster, the Squid, and the
Frog.

The class in Biology (Nat. Hist. 5) has been conducted by
Professor Farlow on the same plan as in previous years, and the
number of students has been as large as the number of micro-
scopes at our disposal would allow. Owing to the unusually
large number of graduate students who occupied the room espe-

16

cially reserved for Cryptogamic Botany, the second course on
Cryptogams for undergraduates (Nat. Hist. 23), in charge of
Professor Farlow, was conducted in the room on the fifth floor,
belonging to the department of Herpetology. The course was
taken by eight students, not counting some who attended lec-
tures only, and the work consisted of a study of some of the
lower forms of plants, with special reference to the needs of those
intending to study medicine. The number of graduate students
at work on special erpytogamic topics was seven. A paper by
Mr. R. P. Bigelow, ‘On the Structure of the Frond in Cham-
pia parvula, Harv.,” is already in print in the Proceedings of the
American Academy. A paper by Mr. W. M. Woodworth on
the apical growth of Fucus, and one by Mr. B. L. Robinson on
some points in the structure and nomenclature of certain species
of Ascomyces, will soon appear in print. Three of the students
will remain at Cambridge another year, when it is expected that
the work on which they are now engaged will be completed.
Mr. J. E. Humphrey, who published last year a paper on Aga-
rum, and who contemplated publishing a second paper on the
development of some Algz, has accepted a position at the State
University of Indiana for the coming year.

17

REPORT ON OSTEOLOGY.
By Dr. D. D. Suave.

THE department of Osteology has received no additions since
the last Report, with the exception of the fossilized femur of a
huge undetermined Proboscidian, found beneath the alluvial
deposit in the bed of the Missouri River at Rulo, while sinking a
shaft, and forwarded to the Museum through the instrumentality
of Professor Shaler. Several mammals which have been pre-
served in alcohol have been sent to Professor Ward, to be
prepared as skeletons, but have not yet been returned.

The collection is in excellent condition, and has been much
visited, especially by those who wished to avail themselves of the
opportunities offered for study and comparison. Among these
may be mentioned Professor Thomas Dwight, who made careful
measurements of the scapule of various skeletons, especially of
the Anthropoid Apes, the results of his observations being pub-
lished in the American Naturalist, for July, 1887, in a paper en-
titled, ‘““ The Range of Variation of the Human Shoulder-blade.”
Portions of the disarticulated skeletons of Otaria jubata, Phoca
fetida, and P. grenlandica were loaned to him for the purpose of
making sections, which are skilfully phototyped in his valuable
essay, “The Significance of Bone Structure,’ published in the
Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History, Vol. IV.,
No. 1.

Portions of the disarticulated bones of Cystophora cristata
were also loaned to Mr. J. A. Allen, Curator in the National
Museum, Central Park, N. Y., for examination and comparison
in the preparation of his paper on the West Indian Seal, J/o-
nachus tropicalis, For similar purposes, a cast of Zeuglodon
hydrarchus, from the collection of the Fossil Vertebrates under
my charge, was sent to him, and the results published in an ar-
ticle entitled **Note on Squalodont Remains from Charleston,

S.C.” All of these loans have been returned in good condition.
3

18

Comparative Osteology has been recognized for the past two
years as a part of the regular course in the University. Instruc-
tion during the last academic year has been given by means of
lectures and laboratory work. In addition to the regular course,
a series of advanced lectures was given on the Anthropoid Apes,
and also on the Dentition of Vertebrates. These were attended
by four special students, who also did laboratory work. One of
them, Mr. W. F. Ganong, prepared a thesis for the degree of
A. M., the title of his subject being, “ On the Relation of the
Form of the Skull to the Habits of Life in the Orders of Mam-
malia.” Two papers upon certain peculiarities presented by the
metacarpals of Bison bonasus were published by me in Science,
Vol. IX., No. 211, and Vol. IX., No. 223.

A paper entitled “ Certain Vacuities or Deficiencies in the
Skulls of Mammals,” is in preparation for publication in the
Bulletin of the Museum.

The valuable collection of articulated and disarticulated skel-
etons of Mammalia in this department of the Museum presents
to scientists and students opportunities for observation and com-
parison that need only to be more widely known to be appre-
ciated, and I am confident that, in the near future, a still larger
number will avail themselves of that which is so liberally offered.

19

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.
By Witiiam Brewster.

DuRING the past year comparatively few additions have been
made to the mounted collections in this department. A fine
Sable Antelope (Mippotragus niger), from the Matabele country,
and a good adult of the rare West Indian Seal (Monachus
tropicalis), both furnished by Ward, are the only mammals of
especial interest. Of birds, the Museum has purchased a col-
lection of eighty-one specimens, representing seventy-nine species,
collected in Australia and New Guinea by the Messrs. Denton ;
some eighteen species of wading and swimming birds from the
North Pacific, six species peculiar to Guadalupe Island (off
Lower California); and a superb specimen of the Northern
Sea Eagle ( Thalassoaétus pelagicus), taken by Dr. Stejneger in
Kamtschatka.

Some further progress has been made towards filling the cases
in the Atlantic and Pacific Rooms, but pelagic birds and mam-
mals are difficult to obtain, and several years are likely to
pass before these collections can be brought to anything like
completeness.

Early in the year an examination was made of the alcoholic
collection of birds and mammals stored in the basement. Its
condition proved unsatisfactory in several respects. The speci-
mens, as a rule, were in a fair state of preservation, but many of
them were either unlabelled, or marked with numbers which
did not agree with the corresponding ones in any of the Museum
catalogues. Moreover, there were many more duplicates, espe-
cially of some of the commoner species, than the Museum is ever
likely to need. Much. of this worthless or superfluous material
was discarded, but very much more can be spared to advan-
tage. Unfortunately, this work will require more time than the
Assistant can hope to give to it in the near future.

20

The collection of skins of birds and mammals seems to be
now entirely free from insect pests, and, generally speaking, in
excellent condition. The tin cases in which it is stored were
found to be slightly injured by rust, but prompt measures have
been taken to guard against any further danger from this source,
by having them painted and japanned.

Since the publication of the last Report, the Assistant in this
department has published the following papers and notes in ‘ The
Auk” :—

“Occurrence of the Yellow-billed Tropic Bird in Florida.”

“ Breeding of the White-faced Glossy Ibis in Florida.”

“ A Red-headed Black Vulture.”

“Two additional Massachusetts Specimens of the Prothonotary War-
bler.”

“The Golden Eagle in Eastern Massachusetts.”

“The Black Gyrfalcon (Falco rusticolus obsoletus) in Eastern Maine.”

“ Threa New Forms of North American Birds.”

“The Common Murre (Uria troille) and the Razor-billed Auk (Alcea
torda) on the New England Coast.”

“ Further Notes on the Masked Bob-white (Colinus ridgwayt).”

“ Capture of a third Specimen of the Short-tailed Hawk (Buteo brachy-
wrus) in Florida.”

“A third New England specimen of Swainson's Hawk (Buteo swain-
sont).”

“Capture of a Fish Crow (Corvus ossifragus), at Wareham, Massa-
chusetts.”

“The Redpolls of Massachusetts.”

“ An overlooked Specimen of Bachman’s Warbler.”

“ Discovery of the Nest and Eggs of the Western Warbler (Dendroica
occidentalis) .”

“ Hummingbirds feeding their Young on Insects.”

“ Scarcity of Adult Birds in Autumn.”

21

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.

By Samue,t GARMAN.

The most important acquisitions in these departments were a
series of Chinese types, received in exchange from Dr. Lortet of
the Lyons Museum; a lot of African species, purchased from
Dr. Miiller; and a large number of West Indian specimens,
bought from Mr. W. B. Richardson. The list of donors in-
cludes the names of Dr. C. C. Abbott, Prof. J. A. Allen, Dr. H.
Ayers, Prof. S. F. Baird, Miss I. Batchelder, Henry Brooks, Esq.,
Mr. S. F. Denton, Prof. C. H. Eigenmann, Prof. H. Garman,
Mr. Alex. H. Higginson, Col. E. B. Hodge, L. C. Jones, Esq.,
Jas. E. Mills, Esq., Mr. Geo. B. Shattuck, Dr. R. W. Shufeldt,
Mr. T. E. Stone, and N. Vickary, Esq.

As exchanges, a large series was sent to Prof. S. E. Meek,
Eureka College, and smaller lots to Dr. H. Woodward, Prof. H.
Garman, and the Zodlogical Society of London. A considerable
number of Reptiles and Fishes were turned over to Professor
Mark and Dr. Ayers for students’ use.

The Pleuronectide, Scienide, and the Hemulons were made
subjects of special study by Prof. D. 8. Jordan.

In connection with overhauling, cataloguing, identification,
and preparation for exhibition or for storing, constant attention
has been paid to reduction of the bulk of the collections by the
withdrawal of useless duplicates. So many of these have been
thrown away that the amount of alcohol and glass set free has
been more than sufficient to replace what was used during the
year in all the departments of the Museum. The changes in
the Exhibition Rooms necessitated by discoloration were compara-
tively few ; the loss by evaporation, breakage, or from corrosion
of cans was small. Soaking the larger bones in solutions, and
use of the bisulphide in the cases, seems to have put an end to
the ravages of the insects in the Skeleton Room.

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Dr. H. A. Hacen.

THE insect boxes of the collection have suffered somewhat from
the introduction of steam. Many of the oldest have warped,
and it may be necessary to make the bottom of the boxes of
two or three thin sheets, as I had done some thirty years ago.
These drawbacks have been counterbalanced by a more fre-
quent and energetic supervision. Only few pests (Anthrenus
varius) have been observed.

The additions to the collection consist of a lot of mixed in-
sects collected by Mr. G. W. Pepper, near Taunton, Mass. ; some
collected by Mr. Fr. Blake of Weston, Mass., near Chicago ;
some very interesting biological specimens, mostly Neuroptera
from Florida, by Mr. H. G. Hubbard ; and other specimens from
Mr. G. Jack, of Montreal, Mr. T. Henshaw, of Boston, Mr.
Louis Cabot, of Peterborough, N. H., and Prof. W. J. Farlow.
Gaps in the Le Conte Collection were filled, as usual, by pres-
ents from Dr. G. H. Horn, of Philadelphia, Pa. <A lot of Scor-
pions prepared for anatomical use, from Arizona, was presented
by the Boston Herald. Dr. F. Thomas Ohrdruf, of Gotha,
Saxony, presented a very valuable lot of plants injured by mite-
galls, containing forty types of published species; Mr. B. P.
Mann, a lot of Neuroptera collected by him in Brazil; Mr. G.
Barnes, a lot of American Noctuide and other insects; and Mr.
Geo. F. Atkinson, of the University of North Carolina, insects
destroying tobacco, cigars, and cigarettes, in all stages.

The alcoholic collection has been carefully revised and brought
in order; the determined Myriapoda, Spiders, and Scorpions have
been labelled and arranged, and also the types of Chilopoda; the
types of the Scorpions, by Mr. E. Simon, Paris, comprising 91
species in 217 bottles; the types of American Spiders, by Count
Keyserling, 162 species in 311 bottles ; the types of Spiders from

23

the Peabody Academy, Salem, by Mr. E. Simon and others, 124
species in 129 bottles. All alcoholic insects received from the
Peabody Academy have been revised and arranged with the
general collection.

About ten years ago a large part of the American Arachnid
were sent to Count E. Keyserling, in Silesia, who had agreed to
study and to publish them. As the collection sent to him has
been returned, it may be in place to enumerate his publications.
From 1877 to 1887 he has issued seven papers, ‘“‘ Neue Spinnen
aus Amerika,” in Verhandlungen Wiener Zool. Bot. Gesellschaft,
containing 151 new species from North America. He has also
published a separate work in quarto, “Spinnen Amerikas”:
Vol. L., Laterigrade, 1880, contains 58, and Vol. II., two Parts,
Theridiide, 1884 and 1886, contains 189 North American species.
All these publications are accompanied by plates, many of them
colored. A large part of the new species from North America
were sent from the Museum, which now contains the types.

The large Monograph of Recent Ephemeride, by Rev. A. E.
Eaton, published in the Transactions of the Linnean Society,
London, (5 Parts,) is now finished, but the last Part has not yet
arrived here.

A few species of our collection have been used by Baron
von Osten-Sacken in his Monograph of the Diptera Centrali
Americana for Messrs. Godman and Salvin.

The Myriapoda Chilognatha belonging to the Museum, and
now in the way of publication, are the only part of the collection
not yet-returned from Europe.

Among other publications, the most prominent is the Synopsis
of the North American Syrphide, by Samuel W. Williston, M. D.,
in the Bulletin of the National Museum, No. 52, Washington,
pp. 335 and pl. 12. He has studied the typical collections of
the Museum.

Dr. G. H. Horn, Mr. F. Blanchard of Lowell, Mass., Prof. C.
H. Fernald of Amherst, Mass., Prof. Chas. V. Riley of Wash-
ington, and others, have made use of our collection for their
publications.

Mr. Louis Cabot has resumed his study of the early stages of
Odonata. A number of species belonging to the Cordulina,
Gomphina, and Myrmeleon have been figured by him.

Mr. F. Woodworth, studying for the Degree of Ph. D., has

24

worked during the whole term in the Entomological Department
on Diptera and Hemiptera, and Mr. G. Jack has continued his
biological studies for a part of the time.

The Assistant has rearranged the Lepidoptera of North Amer-
ica, and a part of the exotic Lepidoptera. He has completed
the exhibition boxes for the South American, and partly for the
Asiatic Fauna. Among the Neuroptera, the large family of
Myrmeleon was studied and described, especially the North
American species, which are ready for publication.

The beginning of a Monograph of Hemerobide, two papers,
is printed in the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural
History, and the Palpares and Acanthaclisis in the Canadian
Entomologist, four papers, with the title, “Stray Notes on Myr-
meleon.” Several papers are published in the Entomologica
Americana.

The Assistant visited Washington, Baltimore, Philadelphia,
and New York, to study the entomological collections of those
cities, and to obtain some material for a paper on Mr. T. Glover,
and his large but little known work, which he published in the
Stettiner Entomologische Zeitung.

ome! Te

—

25

REPORT ON THE INVERTEBRATES.
By J. Water FEWKEsS.

In the past year six months have been spent in Cambridge,
and the remainder at the sea-shore. A large part of my time in
Cambridge has been occupied in the care of the large and varied
collections of the Museum now under my charge.

A number of unidentified Corallines has been turned over to
Prof. Farlow, who has identified from them a small illustrative
collection.

Specimens of some of the types of deep-sea Sponges, identified
by Schmidt, have been sent to Dr. Sollas.

Fragments of types of the genus Stylaster collected by Pourta-
lés and A. Agassiz have been forwarded to the National Museum
at Washington. A large box containing an identified collection
of common Corals has been sent to the State Agricultural Col-
lege, to be used in teaching. Mr. Greene has received from our
collection a small box of rare deep-sea Corals.

We have received from the United States Fish Commission a
collection of identified Corals and Echinoderms collected by the
“ Albatross.” This collection contains new genera and species
described by Prof. A. E. Verrill, with many duplicates.

To Prof. Lovén have been sent specimens of the rare Hchi-
noids Celopleurus floridanus and Podocidaris sculpta for study.

A small collection of Echinoderms from the Gulf of California,
sent to me by Prof. F. W. Cragin of Topeka, Kansas, has been

‘identified and returned to him.

A specimen of Pentacrinus and one of Pheronema have been
sent to Dr. J. Leidy.

Mr. R. Rathbun of the National Museum has consulted our
collection of deep-sea Echinoid types in the preparation of his
report on the Echinoids collected by the ‘* Albatross.”

Specimens of Waldheimia have been presented to the Museum

by Prof. O. C. Marsh.
4

26

Specimens of Balanoglossus and Tornaria, collected at the
Newport Marine Laboratory at his request, have been sent to
Dr. J. W. Spengel.

The Bryozoa collected by A. Agassiz on the Blake Expedi-
tions, and those collected by Count Pourtalés, all of which
have been identified and described by Prof. Smitt, have been
consolidated.

Specimens of Fissurella have been given to Mr. Morrell. A
fine specimen of Voluta juniona has been sent to Prof. Dall for
comparison. The preparations of lingual ribbons of Mollusca
made by Mr. Binney have been sent to him for inspection. This
collection has been returned. The collection of Mollusca made
by the * Blake” in 1880 has been sent to Prof. Verrill for study.

Specimens of our common Squid and one or two duplicate
shells of Nautili have been sent to Messrs. Brooks and Jackson
for special study. Mr. Ritchie has used our collection of shells
for comparisons with those in his collection.

A series of wax models made by Weisker, illustrating the
development of certain Invertebrata and Vertebrata, have been
put on exhibition in the gallery of the Synoptic Room.

Some time has been spent in showing our Exhibition Rooms
to classes visiting the Museum.

The systematic collection of Sponges on exhibition has been
rearranged, and many new specimens have been added. The
collection of Radiates in the North American Faunal Room has
been revised, and mounted specimens of Sponges, Corals, and
Echinoderms have been added to those already on exhibition.
Representative genera of Holothurians, Ophiurans, and Mol-
lusca have been placed in the collections on exhibition in the
South American Room.

As in past years, some time has been taken up in the identifica-
tion of specimens brought to me for comparison with our types.
A part of my time has been spent in supervising Mr. Denton’s
drawings for Mr. Agassiz.

During February, March, and April I made an excursion to
the coast of California, to Santa Barbara, Monterey, and Santa
Cruz. My work there consisted of shallow-water dredging and
surface-collecting. I made collections and preparations, and paid
particular attention to groups of Invertebrata from our Pacific
coast, which have been little studied. By means of a small

27

schooner chartered for the purpose, a trip was made to the
island of Santa Cruz, which is rarely visited by naturalists. The
dredge and dip-net were profitably used in waters near the island.
My expenses on the trip to -California were liberally met by Mr.
A. Hemenway of Boston. A report on the work done in this
expedition is well under way for publication.

The Newport Marine Laboratory was open for work during
July, August, and September. Several students availed them-
selves of its advantages.

The Assistant in charge continued his studies of the develop-
ment of the Echinoderms.

The following papers have been published for me during the
past year : —

Report on the Medusz collected by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
Albatross in the Region of the Gulf Stream in 1883-84. Ann. Rep.
Com. Fish and Fisheries, 1884.

A new Rhizostomatous Medusa from New England. Am. Journ. Sci.,
Vol. XXXIII., February, 1887, Art. XIII.

On the Development of the Calcareous Plates of Amphiura. Studies
from the Newport Marine Laboratory, No. XVIII. Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool., Vol. XIII., No. 4.

28

REPORT ON PALZONTOLOGY.

By AtpHeus Hyart.

Tne result of the year’s work can be summarized as follows.
The older collections which needed revision and concentration,
and the collections still remaining in their original wrappers, were
sorted or distributed into zodlogical divisions. A general system
of classification of permanent and temporary labels was devised.
The permanent label designating the class or division, and a tem-
porary label, which could be snapped into place between the
heads of two upholsterer’s tacks, devised by Mr. Jackson was
adopted. Upon this was written or printed all necessary informa-
tion as to the contents of the tray, except the name of the class
or division, and formation. This label can be removed and re-
written as required, and in its final form gives the names of the
genera and species contained in each tray. In accordance with
this plan of work, the contents of every tray have been inspected,
and placed in sufficiently good condition to receive permanent
and provisional labels on the outside. The total number of trays
is 6,272.

A complete list of the trays and their contents has been made
by Mr. R. T. Jackson. The amount of space occupied by each
division, including duplicates, is as follows : —

Trays. TRAYS,
Horaminiterdge ese eee sere (kG Bryozoa .. .° .. < .: gece
Acalephsges ys. stare a eels. 9 Brachiopods: < \. -) o) seemeemeeiaes
Graptolites:. 96. eee on 09 Lamellibranchs . . .. . . 1082
SPONGES sks a ete OS Heteropods, Scaphopods, and
Coralsiato at eee, . 408 Pteropods* << < (ape
CLMOIGS ) eure ee es: LOR Gasteropods . .) 3) 3) ears
CyetoidSea me ee eee” ALT Cephalopods .. . . . . = 10em
Blastoidsp eke ee pe ae es LO Crustaceans... < ¥.)}: heen
fartishes eager aye ecNe iar > e 8 Trilobites: .. . .° =) Gee
Oplinrans: + e:.oe ume ecm. isd 1 Hurypterids;, <<... -« | eee
EChinodennsh sermon =. LTS Simuloids] 3) (accep eee 7

Wiorms? = ei6 se Seine eter) 3 Sy Insects”. <a 3. (Oe

29

The rapidity with which the work has been accomplished is
largely due to Mr. R. T. Jackson’s energy, and ability in the
handling of collections. Mr. Henry Brooks has also contributed
materially to the same end. Both of these gentlemen have re-
ceived the benefit of opportunities for study in collections and
instruction from the Assistant, which have technically repaid
them; but they have chosen to return their obligations with a
devotion to the interests of the Museum which merits the thanks
of the department.

The larger part of the Assistant’s time has been given to the
arrangement of the Trilobites and Cephalopods. The genera
and species of the former have been collated from all the older
collections and also from the Barrande and Walcott collections.
Mr. Jackson has done similar work upon the Jurassic Lamelli-
branchs. Mr. C.D. Walcott spent several days in March working
over his collection and naming the Brachiopods.

The condition of special collections may be reported as follows.

The Walcott collection has been finished by the Assistant and
Mr. Jackson, and received, as noted above, attention from Mr.
Walcott himself. It fills 317 trays and contains some large slabs.

The unpacking of the Schary collection has been finished, and
the preliminary distribution and labelling completed by Mr. Jack-
son. The collection fills 877 trays, representing all classes of
the fossil Invertebrates of the Bohemian Basin. Work upon
the classification of the Trilobites has been begun by the
Assistant.

A collection from the Prague Museum has been unpacked and
distributed. It fills 15 trays.

A collection from Ireland, presented by the Director in 1875,
has been unpacked and distributed. It fills 6 trays.

The Barrande collection, received in 1875, has been un-
packed and distributed. There were 26 trays of Trilobites and
9 trays of Brachiopods; all fine specimens, named by that emi-
nent paleontologist.

The Walcott collection of Paleozoic fossils from Nevada has
been unpacked, but not distributed. It fills 13 trays.

The extensive collection of Solenhofen and Kelheim fossils
purchased from Hiiberlein had been in part unpacked by Pro-
fessor Hamlin. This has been finished and distributed, It fills
152 trays and contains 5 slabs.

30

The Tracy collection of Greensand fossils, from Cambridge,
England, has been sorted and distributed, and also the Blake
collection from Nevada and the Redmond collection from Sonora,
the two last-named being small, but very valuable, collections
presented some years since by Professor Whitney.

The Sternberg collection, from Texas, has been sorted and dis-
tributed ; it fills 17 trays.

Work has been begun by Mr. Brooks upon the distribution of
the Gebhard collection of Devonian and Silurian fossils from
Schoharie, N. Y. This had been unpacked and partly worked
up by Professor Hamlin.

Almost all the work of sorting and distributing the collections
named above, except the Schary, was done by Mr. Brooks.

The Dyer collection has been finished, by the aid of Mr. Jack-
son, so far as the sorting and distribution of the specimens are
concerned, and the labelling of the trays. It fills 876 trays.

The Johnson collection of fossils of Wenlock Limestone has
been sorted, but not distributed. It fills 183 trays.

The Anticosti collection has been brought together by Mr.
Jackson, parts of it concentrated, and the trays labelled. It fills
212 trays.

The collection of fossil Insects from the Jura, containing the
types of Von Heyden and of Dr. Hagen, were cleaned and re-
labelled by Mr. Brooks with great care, and the references to
descriptions entered on the labels. The Tertiary fossil Insects
were also placed in good condition by Mr. Brooks, but re-
quire critical work by some specialist in order to deterniine the
types.

A considerable amount of material has been transferred to the
Students’ collection; to the rooms containing Vertebrate fossils,
etc. ; to the Geological Department ; and to the Peabody Museum.

One box of fossils was sent to Mr. C. D. Walcott for iden-
tification and study.

The following fossils have also been received : —

A collection presented by Prof. N.S. Shaler, contained in 118
trays, and including, among others, some choice Sponges, a valu-
able set of Corniferous Corals from New York State, some fine
Trilobites, two Eurypterids, Walcott’s types of Braintree fossils,
and a collection from Malvern and Woolhope, England.

The Keeping collection of choice fossils from England, pur-

51

chased by the Museum and by Professor Shaler, consisting of
27 trays.

A small lot of selected specimens purchased from Ward and
Howell.

A collection of authentic species from Professor James Hall
and the Board of Regents of New York State University, 224
specimens, representing forms described in the Palxontology of
New York, Vol. V. Part I.

The Alleghany collection, purchased by the Museum and by
Professor Shaler, 46 trays.

Professor Shaler has returned a collection of miscellaneous
fossils borrowed by him in former years, and also a number of
fossils from the Anticosti collection.

Mr. C. D. Walcott has returned a box of fossils sent him in
1884. Some of the species have been figured in the Bulletin of
the U.S. Geological Survey, No. 10.’

32

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.
By Miss F. M Strack.

DuRING the year ending September 1, 1887, the Library has been
increased by 433 volumes, 1,477 parts, and 69 pamphlets.

VOLUMES, PARTS, PAMPHLETS.
‘Chi ed sa cee See ee le ee i, Meee Bone 21 50 3
exchange: x, ata Me. ok ss Gn 129 613 381
Rurehase: : 6 46s ss we es Se 65 158 14
AGRA GESBIZ 38 oe Se) ee oc ee 70 756 21
Binding 'Parts <9 —2fhs is > 5 TE 148
433 1477 69

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of pam-
phlets and the Whitney Library) is 17,422. There are 10,375
pamphlets bound in 1,367 volumes, making the total number of
volumes 18,789.

il

33

[A]

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1886-87.

Of the Bulletin.
Vol. XIII., containing —

No.1. Reports on the Results of Dredging by the United States Coast Survey
Steamer “ Blake.” — XXX. Report on the Hotoruuriomea. By H.
THEEL. 22 pp. 1 Plate. October, 1886.

No. 2. A second Supplement to the Fifth Volume of the Terrestrran Arr-
BreatHinc Moxuusca of the United States and adjacent Territories.
By W.G. Binney. 26 pp. 3 Plates. December, 1886.

No. 8. Simple Eyes in Arrurovops. By E. L. Marx. 58 pp. 5 Plates.
February, 1887.

No. 4. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory.— XVIII. On the De-
velopment of the Calcareous Plates of AmpHtura. By J. W. Fewxes.
41 pp. 3 Plates. May, 1887.

No. 5. Preliminary Account of the Fosstr Mammats from the White River
Formation contained in the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy. By W. B.
Scorr and H. F. Osporn. 22 pp. 2 Plates. September, 1887.

In preparation : —

The Lateral System of Sevacutans. By Samurn Garman.

On Certain Vacuities or Deficiencies in the Cranta or Mammats. By D. D.
SLADE.

On Certain Mepus# from New England. By J. Wartter Fewxes.

On the Development of the Calcareous Plates of AsteracantHion. By J.
Watrer Fewkes.

On New Marine Invertesrara from California. By J. Warter Fewxes.

On the Eyes or.Scorrions. By G. H. Parker.

Vols. XIV. and XV.

Three Cruises of the “Blake.” (1877-1880.) A contribution to American
Thalassography. By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

Of the Memoirs.
Vol. XVI., containing

No. 1. Notes on the Taxoprum pisticuium, or Bap Cypress. By N. S,
SHaLer. 16 pp. June, 1887.
5

34

No. 2. On the Original Connection of the Eastern and Western Coat FIeLps
OF THE OnIO VatitEy. By N. S. SHarer. 12 pp. June, 1887. For
Nos. 1 and 2, apply to Prof. N. S. Shaler.

In preparation : —
Vol. XIV.

No. 2. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory.— XVI. Development
of Ossecus Fisues. Part Il. By Atexanprer Agassiz and C. O.
Wuirman. With 20 Plates.

Vol. XV.

No. 1. Reports on the Results of Dredging by the United States Coast Survey
Steamer “ Blake.’— XXXI. Report on the AnnELIDs. By Ernst
Enters. With 60 Plates.

Vol. XVI.
No. 3. The Genesis of the AnrETIDZ. By AtpHEeus Hyatt.

Also preparing : —

Illustrations of North American Marine Invertebrates, from Drawings by Burk-
hardt, Sonrel, and A. Agassiz, prepared under the direction of L. Agassiz.
Selections from Embryological Monographs, compiled by A. Agassiz,
W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark (discontinued for the present). Papers by
E. L. Mark, on the Development of Lepidosteus and of Arachnactis ; by
A. Hyatt, on Cephalopods; by M. E. Wadsworth ; and on Fossil Mam-
mals, by Scott and Osborne.

Reports on the Dredging Operations for 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer “ Blake.” H. B.
Brady (Foraminifera), P. H. Carpenter (Comatule), W. H. Dall (Mollusks
of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea), G. B. Goode and T. H.
Bean (East Coast Fishes and Fishes of the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea), A. E. Verrill and W. H. Dall (East Coast Mollusks),
A. A. Hubrecht (Nemerteans), A. Milne-Edwards (Crustacea), and A. E.
Verrill (Alcyonaria).

35

[B.]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HarvarpD CoLuece, Sept. 1, 1887.

Spumeretiomper und so. 5s . a e n ol sw ws he « 100,000.00
(Gimegy LENG! , aheo, Seen (Ge Bete 006 0) ac Mn een 50,000.00
eneraNiemorial Hunde pet)... « SeweMMAMIs 08) 1 vse) 0 29,900.10
etcHersramoneupisihund 3 ss . 6 meee el oe fe 8 7,594.01
Eanmonnent: aC a ee 4 eS oc ence mcm rramerimerram wes Care: Co}9 be27f
Sememmnetinai ety see eee. . Bake Peo elk es 7,740.66

$580,757.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually ex-
amined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of
which is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in
an analysis of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is
applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries. :

The income of the Humboldt Fund can be applied for the benefit of one or more
students of Natural History.

AeA L Sen PORT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,
TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

S38 7-S3.

CAMBRIDGE:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON
1888.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. BOWDITCH.
OFFICERS.
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ .. . . Curator.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .. . . . Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
HERMANN A. HAGEN .. . . . Professor of Entomology.
NATHANIEL S. SHALER. . . . Professor of Paleontology.
E.L.MARK ...... . . . Hersey Professsor of Anatomy.
W.M.DAVIS. .... . .. . . Assistant Professor of Geography.
J. ELIOT WOLFF ... . . . . Instructor in Petrography.
THADDEUS W. HARRIS . . . . Instructor in Geology.
G. HOWARD PARKER .. . . . Instructor in Zoélogy. -
WALTER FAXON ..... . . Assistant in Zodlogy.
DD. SLADE. ... ... + . . . ARgipant an Oseslogy:
SAMUELGARMAN ... . . . Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
J. WALTER FEWKES .... . } Assistant in charge of Invertebrates, and of the
Newport Marine Laboratory.
WILLIAM BREWSTER. . . . . Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
ALPHEUS HYATT .. .. . . Assistant in Paleontology.

MISS F.M.SLACK.... . . Librarian.

REPORT.

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE :—

During the past year the following courses of instruction
have been given at the Museum: —

A course in Biology, by Professor Farlow and Dr. Ayers.

A course in Zodlogy, by Dr. Ayers, who had charge of the
general Biological Laboratory, assisted by Mr. G. H. Parker.

General Lectures on Zoology, by Professor Mark. A course
in Microscopic Anatomy and a course of Embryology were also
given by Professor Mark. In the Laboratory work he was
assisted by Mr. G. H. Parker.

Professors J. D. Whitney, Shaler, and Davis, and Mr. J. E.
Wolff, gave the usual courses in Geology, Paleontology, Physi-
cal Geography, and Petrography.

For the details of the courses of instruction, I would refer
to the accompanying special Reports of the Professors and In-
structors.

The Assistants of the Museum, Professors Hagen and Faxon,
Dr. Slade, Mr. Garman, Mr. Brewster, Professor Hyatt and
Dr. Fewkes, have all spent more or less time in supplying
material and information to special students in their various
departments. A number of students interested in Marine In-
vertebrates accompanied Dr. Fewkes on several dredging ex-
peditions.

A number of additions have been made to the equipment of
all our Laboratories.

Excellent progress has been made since the spring on the
extensive addition to the Museum Building, now well under

4

way. Adjoining the Natural History Laboratories, ample ac-
commodation will be provided for the necessary room required
thoroughly to fit up the Geological and Geographical Depart-
ments. The funds necessary for this section of the University
Museum have been advanced by the Corporation to the Mu-
seum. Both this section and the large addition to be devoted
to the Botanical Department will be under cover before the cold
weather.

Owing to the uncertainty of my movements during the past
summer, I was unable to invite to the Newport Laboratory the
class of students who usually avail themselves of its facilities.
Messrs. Field, Eigerman, Woodworth, and Parker were, how-
ever, able to avail themselves of the Museum Tables at the
United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl. Pro-
fessor Faxon occupied a Table at the Newport Laboratory for
a time, devoting himself mainly to the Embryology of the Ma-
crura; my own time was also given to the same subject, and to
the development of Pelagic Fishes. A considerable amount of
material for study was supplied to the Museum from Newport.

I may mention Dr. Baur, Dr. Boas, Dr. Joubin, Messrs. Ridg-
way and Scudder, and Professor Giard, among the persons to
whom material for study has been sent. A number of exchanges
have also been made, which are mentioned in the special Reports
of the Museum Assistants.

We have continued to send material from our American fossil
Vertebrates to Professors Scott and Osborne. A number of spe-
cialists have, as usual, made use of our collections, and carried on
their work for the time in the Museum building. I have been
obliged to refuse a number of applications for material to be sent
away from Cambridge. Applications specially in Entomology,
Paleontology, and Conchology have become so frequent, that, if
granted, the whole time of the Assistants in these Departments
would be given to selecting and replacing the material requested
for study, leaving them no time to carry on their regular work.
As our staff is not large enough to meet this demand, we shall
be obliged in the future to limit the export of our material to
single specimens, and the larger collections will have to be studied
at the Museum.

The principal accessions of the Museum have been exchanges
with the Stockholm Museum and the British Museum. From

5

the Smithsonian, we have received a fine skeleton of the Great
Auk, from Funk Islands, admirably mounted by Mr. Lucas, and a
number of monkeys from Dr. H. J. Bigelow. But by far the most
valuable accession is the first instalment of the Hume Collection
of Indian Birds, selected for the Museum, in accordance with
the request of Mr. Hume, by the officers of the British Museum.
Professor Flower kindly allowed Dr. Sharp to select from the
duplicates the set intended for us by Mr. Hume, and this first
instalment has reached us in excellent condition.

I should also mention a most excellently preserved collection
of Insects, mainly Lepidoptera, presented to us by the Messrs.
Treat of Lawrence, Mass.

From Professor Ward, we have continued such purchases as
were needed to fill gaps in our Exhibition Rooms.

Professors Osborne and Scott have returned to us a large part
of the fossils sent them for study. Dr. Dobson has returned the
Shrews sent him for examination; and the bulk of our collec-
tion of Annelids, a part of which had been sent to the late Pro-
fessor Kefertein, has been returned to us by Professor Ehlers,
carefully determined, and forms a most valuable addition to our
typical collections. The Annelids from the Pourtalés dredgings
off Florida have also been returned by Professor Ehlers, the
types of his great work on the “ Florida Annelids.”

As will be seen from the Reports of the Assistants, the condi-
tion of the collections continues to improve, and a number of gaps
in our Exhibition Rooms have also been filled.

I wish that I could also speak of some like progress in the
arrangement of the Paleontological Exhibition Rooms. ‘The sys-
tem proposed for the collections is unique, and the result, I have
no doubt, would be a most interesting addition to the rooms
open to the public. <A sum of at least fifteen thousand dollars
would be required to complete the arrangement of the four
rooms devoted to the Paleontological exhibit. At present the
public can form no estimate of the value of our fossil collections,
which are as yet barely accessible to the Assistant in charge.

The Museum is again indebted to Messrs. Brewster, Cabot,
and Slade, for their interest in their respective departments.
Messrs. Brooks and Jackson have also rendered valuable aid to
Professor Hyatt in the arrangement of the Paleontological Col-
lections. Professor Faxon has kindly continued in charge of our

6

collection of Crustacea, and has spent much time in the arrange-
ment of the Crustacea for the Atlantic Faunal Collection.

The number of volumes added to the Library during the
past year is somewhat larger than usual, being nearly 500 vol-
umes, besides 1,700 parts of volumes and pamphlets. The in-
crease is mainly due to a number of new exchanges, and to the
filling of gaps in the series from several of the past Museum
correspondents. Among the accessions to the Library, I may call
attention to the purchase of Glover’s original drawings, and to
unpublished plates of Caverly, presented by Professor Keener.
A number of institutions have received from us as complete sets
of our publications as it was possible to supply, and to various
Marine Zodélogical Laboratories full sets of our publications re-
lating mainly to Invertebrates and Fishes were sent.

As will be seen by Appendix A, the publications of the
Museum during the past academic year have been unusually
numerous. We have published seven numbers of the Bulletin,
and two volumes containing my General Report on the ‘* Cruises
of the Blake.” One volume of the Memoirs, containing the Re-
port of Professor Ernst Ehlers on the Deep-Sea Florida Anne-
lids, has also been issued during the past year. The Museum
is greatly indebted to Professor Ehlers for this exhaustive Mon-
ograph, based upon the collections of Pourtalés and of the
“ Blake.” No less than sixty plates accompany the Memoir,
and Professor Ehlers spared no pains in superintending their
execution. The text was printed in German, and is a most cred-
itable production, from the press of John Wilson and Son.

This volume of Professor Ehlers, and the two volumes of
“Cruises of the Blake,” had been in preparation a number of
years.

A list of the Bulletins and Memoirs now under way will be
found appended to the List of Publications. They include an
important memoir on the Genesis of the Arietide, by Professor
Hyatt; a paper on the Lateral Line of Selachians, by Mr. S.
Garman, based upon material left by the late Professor Agassiz ;
and the completion of the Report of Mr. Dall on the “ Blake”
Mollusks ; as well as other contributions to Zodlogy, which have
already been mentioned in former Reports.

To friends of the Harvard Annex we owe the plates which
accompany Miss Mayo’s Bulletin, and to Professor W. D. Alex-

T

ander I am indebted for copies of Maps relating to the reefs
of the Sandwich Islands.

‘With each special Report which follows will be found a list
of the publications of the Assistants of the Museum, of the
publications based upon the materials of the institution, or of
investigations carried on by the professors and students of the
University in our Laboratories.

I hoped during the-past winter to avail myself of the kind invi-
tation of Professor G. Brown Goode, Acting U.S. Fish Com-
missioner, to join the ** Albatross’ at Panama, and run a line of
dredgings and soundings from Panama to the Galapagos. Un-
fortunately, it was impossible for me to leave Cambridge, and in
spite of the courtesy of Colonel M. Macdonald, U. 8. Fish Com-
missioner, in delaying the ‘‘ Albatross” at Panama, in hope that
I might be able at the last moment to join her, I was obliged to
abandon all idea of making the expedition. This was to me, of
course, a great disappointment, as I had always hoped some time
to be able to carry out such a line of dredgings as that run by
the ** Albatross,” and to become as familiar with the deep sea
fauna on the western side of the Isthmus as I was already with
the eastern. Colonel Macdonald was, however, kind enough to
promise me the collection of those orders of Echinoderms made
by the “ Albatross,” to which I had paid most attention. And
while these collections will not have the personal interest
attached to those I made on the “ Blake,” I hope yet to be able
to carry out for some groups of deep-sea Echinoderms the in-
teresting comparisons which have been instituted on the riparian
fauna of the two sides of the Isthmus of Panama.

The Museum is also specially indebted to Colonel Macdonald
for the facilities enjoyed by students of the Museum at the Fish
Commission Station at Wood’s Holl. It is to be hoped that the
government will continue there its present liberal policy towards
all students of marine Zodlogy, and that the immense resources
for obtaining material may be utilized by the students and in-
vestigators attached to the Natural History Laboratories of the
country. A station of the greatest importance could thus read-
ily be organized, by concerted action on the part of the Colleges
of the country.

In the past fifteen years I have been in the habit of supplying
deficiencies for such expenditures as seemed to me essential for

8

the rapid development of the institution. But it has now be-
come evident that, while such a policy may have been useful in
the early stages of the Museum, it has of late been rather’a
detriment to it than otherwise, as it was fast coming to be re-
garded as my personal establishment. The demands upon my
time for the administration of its affairs have become so great,
that I must retire from active duty to devote myself to scientific
work which I have too long neglected for the sake of bringing
the Museum to the point it has reached. It is high time that
I should withdraw, and that a younger man, more in sympathy
with the prevailing tendency of science in this country, should
endeavor to develop the Museum by increasing the interest
of the friends of the University in its behalf. The original plans
have now been so far accomplished that there remain to com-
plete the Oxford Street facade only one section and a half,
and the southwest corner piece which is to meet the Peabody
Museum wing.

During the past year the expenses which I have been ac-
customed to meet on account of the Museum have been so far
reduced, that it will hereafter be possible for the Museum to
live within its income. This will become practicable as soon
as the indebtedness incurred for the Geological Laboratory and
its equipment is paid off. Of course this will cut off expenses
in many directions, — such as the purchase of collections, salaries
for additional assistants, etc.; but these reductions need not in-
terfere in the least with the efficiency of the Museum in the
maintenance of its Laboratories, the care of its collections, or the
liberal and regular amount of its publications. The Mineralogi-
cal Department and its collections would be admirably housed
in the remaining section, and the corner piece could be devoted
to such additional Laboratories and Lecture Rooms as come
within the scope of the Natural History Department.

The attention of the Visiting Committee of the Overseers
was called to the necessity of additional Laboratories for the Geo-
logical Department, in the hope that means might be raised to
erect and equip the section of the building joining the Zodlogical
and Paleontological Laboratories to the Botanical Laboratories.
To avoid delay, the Corporation has advanced to the Museum
the funds necessary for the erection of the shell of the con-
necting section. But a very considerable sum, not less than

9

thirty thousand dollars, will be needed to equip it, and make
the building ready for occupancy. : It will take a number of
years to repay this sum from the regular income of the Museum.
A further debt of fifteen thousand dollars has also been incurred
- to secure additional land for the Museum grounds.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CamBripGeE, October 1, 1888.

to

10

REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Jostau D. Wuityey, Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.

In this department a course of lectures (once a week, lasting
through the College year) was delivered to teachers and others,
the attendance averaging about twenty-five in number. The
subject of this course was ‘‘ Geographical Methods and Results,”
the history of American geographical discovery being made an
especially prominent feature.

The article ‘* United States,” written for the Encyclopedia
Britannica, has made its appearance in the twenty-third volume
of that work, and is now being reprinted, and will make a volume
of about 400 octavo pages. This article contains a very condensed
review of the physical geography and geology of the United
States, and also an historical and statistical réswmé of the develop-
ment of the mining interests of the country, which in the reprint
now in press will, so far as is possible, be brought down to the
end of the current year. This work is about half in type.

A volume of about 250 pages (16mo) has been published
during the year, entitled, ““ Names and Places, — Studies of Ge-
ographical and Topographical Nomenclature.” The principal
object of this volume is to explain the origin and meaning of
names given to prominent topographical and scenic features, and
especially to show how these words are used in this country, and
how our topographical nomenclature has been affected and en-
riched by the presence on our soil of various nationalities.

As in previous years, a considerable amount of time has been
given to the preparation of definitions of words in geography,
geology, lithology, mining, and metallurgy, for the Century Die-
tionary, these words having been defined in many cases with
almost encyclopedic fulness.

Some field-work has been done, chiefly in New England, in
continuation of the investigation of the surface geology and

ra

Hcl |

glacial deposits of Northeastern North America, mentioned in the
last Report. The north side of the Mont Blanc group has also
been visited, for the purpose of getting a clearer idea of the
present condition of the glaciers in that region, where the de-
crease in size of the masses of ice during the past forty years,
common to the whole mountain system of Central Europe from
the Pyrenees to the Caucasus, has excited great attention, not
only as a matter of scenic interest, but as bearing on glacial
theories in general. Some geological work was also done in
Southwestern England, and a few of the mines of Devonshire
were examined during a hasty trip through that interesting
region.

REPORT

ON THE INSTRUCTION IN GEOLOGY, PALZONTOLOGY,
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY, AND PETROGRAPHY.

By Proressors N. S. SHALER AND W. M. Davis, anp Mr. J. E. Wourr.

Durtne the Academic year 1887-88, the following courses
of instruction were given in the Geological and Paleontological
Laboratory, and in the field, by N. S. Shaler and his assistants.

1. N. H.4. A course in Elementary Geology, by N.S. Shaler. Two

lectures a week with certain required reading, attended by one hundred
and fifty-six students.

2. N. H.4 a. A course of Practical Geological Exercises in the
Laboratory and in the field, by Mr. T. W. Harris, designed especially
for those who intend in subsequent years to continue the study of
Geology and Paleontology; attended by fifty-five students.

3. N. H. 8. A course of Advanced Geology, by N. S. Shaler, W.
M. Davis, J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris; two lectures a week, together
with assigned field-work, which was supervised by Professor Davis and
Mr. Wolff. In the winter season the field-work was replaced by the study
of models and geological maps, and reports on selected geological areas
Students in this course are required to prepare each two theses on assigned
subjects. Only those who have previously passed a satisfactory examina-
tion in Elementary Geology are permitted to attend. ‘Thirty-five persons
received this instruction.

4. N. H. 14. A course on Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler ; two lectures
a week, together with laboratory work and assigned theses, attended
by twenty-eight students.

5. N. H.15. A course in Advanced Paleontology, consisting of
laboratory and thesis work upon the geological history of selected groups
of animals. Attended by four students.

6. N. H. 16. <A course in field-work, designed to afford special training
in the processes of geological surveying, by N. S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,
J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris. Attended by seventeen students.

7. N. H. 17. <A course in Historical Geology, designed to train
students in the détermination of geological horizons. Attended by five
students.

ewes So

|e OER ONS leer Fee pth Fs POR

13

During the winter season the students in advanced classes
attended regular evening meetings designed to serve the purpose
accomplished by the Seminaria of the German Universities.

During the summer of 1888, twenty-three students, twelve
of whom had been previously trained in the classes of the Uni-
versity, received systematic instruction in field-work. Fifteen
of these persons were included in the Summer School of Ele-
mentary Geology, which was taught in Cambridge, in Rhode
Island, Southern Connecticut, and the Catskills, by the officers
of the department. Eight of these students received instruc-
tion in an Advanced Summer School of Geology, under the
direction of N.S. Shaler.

The Summer School of Geology was in charge of Professor
Davis during its two weeks’ stay at Meriden, Conn., and

.Catskill, N. Y.

During the year, the following papers of a scientific nature
have been published by N. 8S. Shaler: —

1. Caverns and Cavern Life. Scribner’s Magazine, Vol. II., No. 5,
October, 1887, pp. 449-472.

2. Origin of the Divisions between the Layers of Stratified Rocks.
(Published by Permission of the Director of the United States Geological
Survey.) Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History, Decem-
ber 7, 1887, pp. 408-419.

3. Animal Agency in Soil Making. The Popular Science Monthly,
Vol. XXXII., No. 4, February, 1888, pp. 484-487.

4. On the Study of Nature. The Popular Science News and Boston
Journal of Chemistry, Vol. XXII., No. 8, March, 1888, p. 34, and No. 5,
April, 1888, pp. 49, 50.

5. The Law of Fashion. The Atlantic Monthly, Vol. LXI., No. 365,
March, 1888, pp. 386-398.

6. The Crenitic Hypothesis and Mountain Building. Science, Vol.
XI., No. 280, June 15, 1888, pp. 280, 281.

7. Rivers and Valleys. Scribner’s Magazine, Vol. IV., No. 2, August,
1888, pp. 151-155.

The course in Physical Geography and Meteorology (N. H. 1)
was given to fifty students. During the absence of Professor
Davis in the second term, the lectures were given by Mr. T. W.
Harris. Laboratory work, chiefly on weather charts and geo-
graphic models, together with frequent oral and written exer-
cises, occupied one of the three weekly appointments.

14

The advanced course in Physical Geography (N. H. 20) was
taken by one student, and remained in charge of Professor Davis
throughout the year. The work was chiefly an investigation
of the physical geography of New Jersey, as illustrated by the
colored maps of that State. A brief excursion was made in
Northern New Jersey in the spring.

During the winter, Professor Davis delivered ten lectures on
the Physical Geography of the United States before the Teach-
ers’ School of Science, in Boston; these were illustrated by a
series of thirty large models, or relief maps, designed to repre-
sent typical geographic forms, and prepared especially for use in
class teaching.

The course in Petrography has been pursued by eight regular
students throughout the year. Instruction and assistance was
occasionally given to others engaged in geological work. A
paper by Dr. Wm. H. Hobbs, “ On the Petrographical Character
of a Dike of Diabase in the Boston Basin,” was published during
the year in the Museum Bulletin.

The Laboratory equipment has been increased by a large
Fuess reflecting goniometer, three new microscopes, and minor
articles, as well as by the addition of new specimens and slides
to the rock collections.

The spare time of the instructor during the summer and
winter was taken up by the field and office work, in connection
with a final report on the Geology of Hoosac Mountain and
the adjoining region, which, it is hoped, will be ready for pub-
lication the coming winter. These investigations have also
been extended to other parts of the Green Mountains.

15

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN BIOLOGY.

By Prorrssors Farrow anp Mark, anp Dr. AYERS.

DuRrine the year 1887-88, Nat. Hist. 2 was taken by fifty-four
students: six Seniors, nine Juniors, sixteen Sophomores, thigteen
Freshmen, seven specials, one Divinity, and two Scientific stu-
dents. Of these six did not take the final examination. The
course was conducted as in the previous year, Mr. Parker assist-
ing in the laboratory work.

In Nat. Hist. 18, there were three students: two Graduates,
and one Senior. The work was of the same nature as in 1886-87.

There were six students in Nat. Hist. 9: four Graduates, and
two Seniors. One of the Graduates was compelled to give up
the course without completing his work. Of the others, one
has finished the work laid out, but will at present publish only a
preliminary account of his results, in order that he may incor-
porate in his final paper the results of more extended compari-
sons; a second finished his investigation, and his paper may
be expected during the coming winter. The three remaining
students propose to continue their investigations during the year
1888-89.

The material used in instruction has been rearranged, and
more conveniently labelled. All the paper diagrams not previ-
ously so mounted— some five hundred in number — have been
mounted on cloth for their better preservation.

The bi-weekly evening meetings begun in 1886-87, for the
discussion of zodlogical topics, were continued during the year.

The instruction in the zodlogical courses intrusted to Dr.
Ayers during the year 1887-88 was similar to that given the
preceding year. The objects of the two courses (Nat. Hist. 5,
and Nat. Hist. 6) being to lay the foundations, by actual dissec-
tion and thorough study of chosen types of annimals, for a broad
knowledge of the morphology of the animal kingdom.

16

The students in Nat. Hist. 6 spent the first half-year on types
from Cartilaginous and Bony Fishes and Birds. In the second
half-year, the Cat and Man, as representatives of the Mammalia,
occupied their attention. The lectures in this half. were con-
fined to the osteology and myology, and the more interesting and
important structural relations, of the group of Primates.

The plan of work followed in the zoédlogical half of the biologi-
cal course was essentially that of progressing from the simpler
to the more complex forms, instead of beginning with the verte-
brate, about which everybody knows something, and thence to
the unknown forms. Although the latter plan has been lately
revegted to by such eminent authority as Professor Huxley, and
that after a thorough trial of the former method, it was thought
advisable, considering the preparation of the class, to adhere to
the more difficult though more scientific method of work, and it
is believed that the results fully warrant this choice.

Twenty-seven students completed courses of Nat. Hist. 5 the
past year, six of them passing the examinations in Nat. Hist. 6.

As a result of studies, yet incomplete, of the vascular system
of the interesting Chlamydoselachus anguineus, Gar., a paper has
been prepared by Dr. Ayers for publication in the Bulletin, en-
titled “ On the Morphology of the Carotids.”’

The course in Nat. Hist. 5 was conducted by Dr. Ayers and
Dr. Farlow on the same plan as in previous years, and was at-
tended by twenty-seven students, not including a few who did
not do all the required work. By a special arrangement for the
year 1887-88, the second course in cryptogamic botany, Nat.
Hist. 23, was under the charge of Mr. Roland Thaxter, and was
attended by four students. The course for original investiga-
tion in cryptogamic botany, Nat. Hist. 12, was taken by four
Graduates, of whom two had been in attendance the previous
year. A paper by Mr. K. Miyabe, on the Development of Macro-
sporium parasiticum, is now in press, and will appear probably
in November. During the year the paper by Mr. Roland Thaxter
on the Entomophthoree of the United States, including work
done by him in Nat. Hist. 12, was published in the Memoirs of
the Boston Society of Natural History.

a
}
,

17

REPORT ON OSTEOLOGY.
By TD. D. Save.

THE several Mammals which had been preserved in alcohol,
and sent to Professor Ward to be prepared as skeletons, as stated
in my last Report, have been returned and distributed.

No other additions to the collection of articulated and disartic-
ulated skeletons have been made. It remains in excellent order,
and has been consulted as in former years by naturalists and
students.

Occasional specimens from neighboring and distant regions
have been sent for identification, and answers returned.

Instruction in this department has been given during the past
academic year by means of lectures and laboratory work. The
course has been attended by four undergraduates, those in for-
mer years having been special or advanced students. The at-
tendance upon lectures and the laboratory work has been very
satisfactory.

During the year, the following papers have been published by
the Assistant in this department.

On Certain Vacuities or Deficiencies in the Crania of Mammals. Bul-
letin of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XIII., No. 8, March
26, 1888.

Notes on the Boundaries of the Four Bones composing the Occipital
Segment of the Mammalian Cranium. Science, Vol. XI., No. 274, p.
218.

The Wild Turkey in Massachusetts. The Auk, Vol. V., No. 2.

18

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.
By Wi11L1AM BREWSTER.

THE collection of Mounted Mammals has been increased by
the following specimens, all supplied by Ward: —

Brachytarsomys albicauda, Madagascar,
Rhinolophus capensis, Cape Good Hope.
Mus dolichurus, ee -.
Artibeus perspicillatus, South America.
“ planirostris, Ke a
Sorex murinus, India.
Haplocerus montanus, Montana.
Oystophora cristata, Newfoundland.

We have also received thirteen monkeys, eleven of species not
as yet determined, the gift of Dr. H. J. Bigelow, of Boston; the
remaining two, belonging to the genus Chrysothrix, presented by
Captain Josiah W. Cook. These monkeys came alive, in fine
condition, and they should make particularly good specimens.
They are now in Ward’s hands for mounting.

In the last Report, I called attention to the unsatisfactory
state of the alcoholic collection of Mammals. Mr. Garman has
been since kind enough to superintend the rearrangement of
this collection. The work has been done most thoroughly, and
the collection is now in perfect order, so that any specimen
which it contains can be found and examined without loss of
time.

By far the most important addition to the Bird collection
during this year, or indeed for several years past, is that of about
six hundred and fifty skins of Indian birds, received during the
summer from the British Museum. These specimens are all from
the famous Hume Collection; they form only a first instalment
of the full set which will eventually come into our possession.

‘

i

Besides supplying many species not previously represented in

our Museum, they possess, for scientific use, an unusual value,
from the fact that they have been carefully worked over and
named by the highest authorities on Indian ornithology.

Of mounted birds, we have added during the year about
twenty-five specimens, representing seventeen species, eight of
which are forms peculiar to Lower California.

The Assistant has published the following papers and notes in
‘The Auk”: —

“ Descriptions of supposed New Birds from Lower California, Sonora
and Chihuahua, Mexico, and the Bahamas.”

“The Prairie Horned Lark ( Otocoris alpestris praticola) on the Coast
of Massachusetts.”

“On Three apparently new Sub-species of Mexican Birds.”

“Notes on the Birds of Fort Klamath, Oregon. By Dr. J. C. Merrill,
U.S. A. With Remarks on Certain Species, by William Brewster.”

“ Quiscalus quiscula agleus at Charleston, South Carolina.”

In ** The Ornithologist and Odlogist ” : —

“ An Unusual Nest of the Parula Warbler.”
“ Nest and Eggs of the Mountain Solitary Vireo.”

20

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.
By SAMUEL GARMAN.

So far as the routine work in these departments is concerned,
the story is much the same as in former years. The changes and
the renewals of alcohol have been continued. They have been
accompanied by withdrawal of useless material, by selection and
mounting of types for Exhibition Rooms soon to be opened, or to
replace inferior representatives already on the shelves in others,
by preparation for exchanges, and by identifications and arrange-
ment to facilitate examination and study. Not a little time has
been spent on the storage collections of other departments.
Among identifications, a large number of the South American
Siluride, of the American Gobiide, and of the West Indian
Reptiles and Batrachians, have been included. The Museum is
indebted to Messrs. F. S. Chaffee, John Gorell, F. T. Hubbard,
L. W. S. Kimball, A. P. Morse, James Reed, E. A. Samuels,
James Saunders, G. H. Whittier, W. W. Woodworth, and Miss
Ruth Hoppin, for invoices of specimens in this department.

The largest additions to the collections were secured by
exchange: a collection of Fishes from the Museum of Stock-
holm, through Dr. F. A. Smitt, and another from the British
Museum, through Dr. G. A. Boulenger, containing Old World
Batrachians and Reptiles and Deep-sea Fishes. Other additions
were received from Professors O. C. Marsh, C. J. Maynard, E. L.
Mark, and D. S. Jordan.

By purchase from Professor Maynard, the Museum obtained a
desirable lot of West Indian Reptiles and Batrachians. :

Series of Reptiles and Batrachians from the West Indies were
sent in exchange to the Museum of Stockholm and to the British
Museum. A smaller lot of Reptiles was forwarded to Professor
Marsh, and a collection of Fishes was sent Professor Maynard.

é
+
it

21

The publications based upon the collections of the Museum
were an article on the American species of Gobiid, and another
on the South American species of the Siluride, by Mr. and Mrs.
C. H. Eigenmann, in the Proceedings of the California Academy
of Science.

The following were published by the writer in the Museum
Bulletin : —

“The Rattle of the Rattlesnake.”

In the Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society : —

“The Reptiles and Batrachians of Grand Cayman.”
“ West Indian Reptiles in the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy.”

In the Proceedings of the Essex Institute : —

“On West Indian Teiidz in the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy.”
“ West Indian Batrachia in the Museum of Comparative Zodélogy.”
“On West Indian Geckonide and Anguide.”

“ Reptiles and Batrachians from Texas and Mexico.”

“On West Indian Iguanide.”

“On West Indian Scincide.”

“ Reptiles and Batrachians from the Caymans and the Bahamas.”

“ Rhinomurena quesita, an Kel from the Marshall Islands.”

In Vol. III. of the Standard Natural History : —

“ List of some of the Important Publications on the Tunicates.”

“ List of some of the Important Publications on the Fishes.”

“Tist of some of the Important Publications on the Reptiles and
Batrachians.”

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Dr. H. A. Hacen.

THE most important addition to the collection was the gener-
ous present of the collection of North American Insects brought
together by Mr. J. H. Treat and his brother, Mr. J. O. Treat, in
Lawrence, Mass. By far the largest part, the Lepidoptera, were
in beautiful condition, many of them raised, and contained a
number of types from Mr. Grote and Mr. Sanborn. Among the
species of the other orders some were very valuable: —a number
of Mexican Diptera by the Baron Osten-Sacken, named by him;
an Ascalaphus from Jamaica Plains, the first known to have been
found near Boston, by Mr. J. G. Jack; a large lot of Neuroptera
and Pseudoneuroptera, some Odonata nymphe skins of promi-
nent interest, by Mr. H. Edward, New York; some Odonata
from Florida, by Mr. Beutenmiiller, New York; a lot of Lepi-
doptera from Sikkim, India, by Mr. Elwes, London, Eng. ; a white
ants’ nest from Paramaribo, Surinam, by Mr. H. Sawyer, United
States Consul, through Mr. Babcok; Neuroptera collected in
New Hampshire, by Mr. L. Cabot; biological specimens and a
copy of the Standard Zodlogy, by Mr. S. Henshaw; biological
specimens of plants infested, by Mr. Seymour; additions to Le
Conte’s collection, by Dr. G. H. Horn; a splendid set of West
African Termitina, by Mr. V. Fric, Prag, Bohemia; from the
same were bought specimens of Glossina morsitans, the famous
Tsetset Fly, new to the Museum.

The Library has received a number of additions. A very
careful revision and new arrangement of the Library has just
been completed. Nine volumes of the original drawings by
T. Glover were bought.

Mr. F. Woodworth, a special student here, has arranged and
determined the Homoptera of the collection. A part of his
studies is published in ** Psyche.” Mr. J.G. Jack has continued

23

his biological studies. Dr. G. H. Horn has just published the
Termitophile Larva of Glyptus sculptilis, from the Museum col-
lection of Mr. F. Blanchard, Lowell, Mass.; Lieutenant Casey,
Newport, R. I., and $. Henshaw, have studied the Le Conte
collection; Mr. L. Cabot has finished his memoir on the early
stages of the Cordulina, and it is in the hands of the lithogra-
pher. The Assistant has arranged some parts of the collec-
tion, and incorporated some of the later additions. A number
of students have, as usual, studied the type collections in the
Museum.

The large monograph of the Ephemeride, by Rev. A. E.
Eaton, is finished, and fills the whole of the third volume of the
Transactions of the Linnzan Society, London, pp. 352, pl. 65.
There are not many pages where the Museum collection has not
given help, and many figures on the plates are made of material
communicated by the Museum. Dr. G. Czwalina has from
material from the Museum published in the Deutsche Entomol.
Zeitschr., 1888, Vol. XXXII. pp. 838-854, pl. 2, ‘* Die Forcipes
der Staphyliniden Gattung Lathrobium” (only just arrived).
Mr. Beutenmiiller has published in the Entomologica Americana,
1888, from Museum material, ‘*‘ New Species of North American
Tineide,” nearly a monograph of the genus Aorolophus.

In consequence of the large additions, some parts need an
entirely new arrangement ;— the North American Lepidoptera,
the Ephemeridz, the Termitide, and the early stages of the
Odonata.

The Assistant has published the following papers during the
past academic year : —

“ An unknown or forgotten Illustration of North American Sphingide.”
Entomologica Americana, Vol. III., 1887, pp. 1738-175.

“The Larva of Ptinus latro Fabr.” Ibid., p. 232.

“On the Genus Sympetrum Newm.” Ihbid., Vol. IV., 1888, pp. 81-34.

“The Coccoide in the Museum of Comparative Zoélogy.” Canadian
Entomologist, 1887, Vol. XIX. p. 60.

“ Stray Notes on Myrmeleonide. Part HI. Genus Macaranda.” Ibid.,
209-217.

“Stray Notes on Myrmeleonide. Part IV. Genus Brachynemurus
Hag.” Ibid., Vol. XX., 1888, pp. 34-38, 57-60, 72-74, 93-97.

“Stray Notes on Myrmeleonide. Part V. Genus Dendroleon and
Myrmecoleon.” Ibid.

24

“ New Hemerobide.” Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. X XIII., 1888.
“Unsere gegenwirtige Kenntnissder Ephemeren.” Stettiner Entomol.
Zeitung, 1888, Vol. XLIX. pp. 1-12.

The following three papers should have been given in my last
Report : —

“Ueber Neurobasis und Vestalis.” WVerhandl. K. K. Zool. Botan.
Gesell. Wien, 1887, pp. 647, 648. :

“Ueber Plethus cursitans Hag.” Ibid., pp. 643, 644; one plate. (A
new genus from Ceylon, the smallest Phryganid known.)

“T]lustrations of North American Entomology, by Townsend Glover.”
Stettiner Entomol. Zeitung, 1887, Vol. XLVIII. pp. 189-142.

ms!
~~

EOL ROE a

—*

ee SS. ree

25

REPORT ON THE INVERTEBRATA.

By J. WALTER FEWKES.

DuRInG the past year much time has been occupied in the
examination of the additional collections lately placed under my
charge. I have especially devoted myself to the Mollusca, and
have become more familiar with the material in the collection.

A new collection of wax models, illustrating the embryology
of common types, has been added to those already on exhibition
in the gallery of the Synoptic Room.

As in former years, the Crustacea have been in charge of
Dr. Faxon, who has put illustrative genera on exhibition in the
Atlantic and Europzo-Siberian rooms. He has also sent material
for special research to Prof. A. Giard and to Prof. J. E. V. Boas.

A series of Mollusks has been added to the Australian Room.

By far the larger part of my Museum work has been on the
Atlantic and Pacific Rooms, preparing a varied collection, illus-
trating these faune, and a good beginning has been made as far
as the Sponges, Medusz, Corals, Echinoderms, and WERT ES
are concerned.

We have received from Professor Ward, of Rochester, a few
Australian Bryozoa, and a beautiful new siliceous sponge of the
genus Rosella, taken in shallow water near Monterey, California,
has been added to our collections.

The types of the Invertebrata under my charge have been
used by several specialists; one or two special students of the
University have also consulted them. As in past years, some
time has been taken up in the identification of specimens brought
to me for that purpose.

One or two students have applied for instruction in the depart-
ment under my charge, and there were several applicants to
make up a dredging party on the coast of New England, as in
former years.

4

26

The Assistant, by the advice of the Curator, has undertaken
new duties as Secretary of the Boston Society of Natural History,
which renders it necessary for him to spend a portion of his time
in Boston.

The months of July, August, and September, through the gen-
erosity of Mr. A. Hemenway, were spent in Europe, studying
the arrangement and methods of research in Zodlogical Stations
and Museums abroad,

The Assistant has pushed forward a report on his observations
of the Invertebrata of California, collected during a trip to the
Pacific Coast. The plates for this report, including a colored
lithograph, are prepared for the printer, and the text is ready
for the press.

The following papers have been published during the past
year : —

1. On Certain Meduse from New England. Studies from the New-
port Marine Laboratory, No. XIX. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zoél., Vol. XIII.,
No. 6.

2. On the Development of the Calcareous Plates of Asterias. Studies
from the Newport Marine Laboratory, No. XX. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
Wot... No.9.

3. A New Mode of Life among Meduse. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.
Vol. XXIIL., pp. 389-395.

4, A Hydroid Parasitic on a Fish. Nature, Vol. XXXVI., No.
939.

5. Are there Deep-sea Meduse? Amer. Jour. Arts and Sci., Ser. 3,
Vol. XXXV., No. 206, pp. 166-179.

6. On a New Physophore, Pleophysa, and its Relationships to other
Siphonophores. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., May, 1888.

7. Seaside Study on the Coast of California. American Naturalist
February, 1888.

8. The Sucker on the Fin of Pterotrachea. Zoologischer Anzeiger,
Vol. XI., No. 271.

9. On the Origin of the Present Form of the Bermudas. Proc. Bost.
Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. XXIII.

10. Final Report on the Invertebrata of the Greely Expedition. Con-
tains Reports on Medusx, Echinodermata, Worms, and Mollusca.

11. Bibliography of Hydrozoa, Actinozoa, Goral Islands, and Echino-
dermata, for “The Standard Natural History.”

12. On a New Parasite of Amphiura. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,
Vol. XXIV. pp. 31-34.

PNR NIE bE eh moe 0S PA BEIT th el

i

pad

et Lal, EM

27

13. A Parasite troublesome to a Brittle-Star. Nature, Vol. XX XVIL.,
No. 941.

14. On Arctic Characters of the Surface Fauna of the Bay of Fundy,
and the Connection with a Theory of the Distribution of Floating Marine
Life. American Naturalist, July, 1888.

15. A New Marine Larva and its Affinities. Microscope, June, 1888.

16. The Assistant has also edited the last Part of Volume XXIII. of
the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History.

28

REPORT ON PALZONTOLOGY.

By Arpuevs Hyatt.

THE work this year has been mainly directed to the preliminary
labelling of the newer collections, and the arrangement, concen-
tration, and labelling of the older collections, with the view of
bringing together all the fossils of the same genera and species
within the same period. A large amount of material has been
handled and arranged. All the collections not thoroughly re-
viewed last year have been looked over, the labelling revised,
and the specimens distributed. The contents of ‘the trays, to the
number of twenty-five hundred, have been put in safe condition
for storage, and correctly labelled outside.

The department is indebted to Mr. R. T. Jackson for person-
ally attending to the details of the work of reviewing collections,
ete., and thus enabling the Assistant to expend his time upon the
final arrangement of/some collections which were in a sufficiently
advanced stage of preparation to make such work profitable. He
has also spent more or less time upon special work in connection
with his researches upon the Ostreade. The department has
also received considerable assistance from Mr. Henry Brooks,
and he has also been engaged in studying the intimate structure
of the siphuncle in the shells of Nautiloids.

The Assistant has finished the preliminary arrangement of the
Trilobites of the Schary collection. All the different collections
of Trilobites belonging to the Taconic faune have been brought
together, and incorporated into one collection. The species have
been identified throughout, with the exception of some from the
St. John’s group, and a few trays of miscellaneous rough material
from the same. This part of the collection needs, therefore, only
a small amount of work by a specialist, in order to be completely
finished with regard to the naming, and also the final work of
labelling each specimen, or tray.

29

He has also finished the Belemnoids and Sepioids in a similar
way, and these collections are practically completed. Specimens
have also been picked out for exhibition in the Systematic and
Geological collections, and the Belemnoids and Sepioids have
been mounted.

He has also done considerable work upon the Jurassic and
Cretaceous Ammonoids, and these are rapidly approaching
completion.

Mr. Jackson has brought together and arranged the Creta-
ceous and Tertiary Ostreadz, and incidentally done a large
amount of work of a preliminary kind upon the general collec-
tion of Lamellibranchs, especially upon the Jurassic forms. He
has also reviewed and placed in safe condition the specimens of
the Green collection, which consists of exceedingly delicate de-
calcified fossils that require very careful storage. The entire
collection of Tertiary Gasteropoda has been reviewed and con-
centrated, and the outside labels revised and corrected. He has
also reviewed the collection of Echinoderms, revising and cor-
recting the outside labels, and cleaning a part of the specimens.

Mr. Henry Brooks has arranged and concentrated a portion
of the Anticosti collection, by culling out the worthless material,
and has finished the arrangement of the Gebhard collection,
which was begun last year. He has also worked over and dis-
tributed the Keeping collection of Jurassic, Cretaceous, and
Tertiary fossils from England, the Tawney collection, consisting
of a few trays of Cretaceous fossils from England, and the col-
lection mentioned below as turned into the department by
Dr. Hagen.

Cigar boxes have been found very convenient for the storage
of certain kinds of fossils. A large number have been used in
place of paper trays wherever they are more convenient, as in
the storage of duplicates; and they will not only effect a saving
of expense, but will also save a large amount of room.

Dr. Hill of Princeton spent a few weeks at Cambridge in pre-
paring the bones of a fine skeleton of Mylodon for exhibition.

A small collection of fossil Insects, Myriapods, and some mis-
cellaneous specimens, have been received from Dr. Hagen. They
were mostly from Mazon Creek. A small collection of fossil
plants from the Coal Measures at Springhill, Nova Scotia, has
been presented by Mr. Henry Swift.

30

The following papers have been published by Messrs Hyatt,
Jackson, and Brooks : —

Values in Classification of the Stages of Growth and Decline, with
Propositions for a new Nomenclature. Science, Vol. XI., No. 260, and
Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. XXIII, 1888. By Alpheus Hyatt.

Evolution of Faunas in the Lower Lias. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,
Vol. XXIII, 1888. By Alpheus Hyatt.

Catching Fixed Forms of Animal Life on Transparent Media for Study.
Science, Vol. XI., No. 275, p. 230. By R. T. Jackson.

The Development of the Oyster, with Remarks on Allied Genera.
Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. XXIII., 1888, pp. 531-557, including
four plates. By R. T. Jackson.

Cultivation of Native Ferns. Garden and Forest, Vol. I., Nos. 27, 28,
29, 30. By R. T. Jackson.

Methods of Labelling Trees and Plants. Trans. Mass. Hort. Soc., 1888,
Part I. By R. T. Jackson.

Preliminary Remarks on the Structure of the Siphon and Funnel of
Nautilus Pompilius. By Henry Brooks. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,
Vol. XXIII, 1888, 2 plates.

31

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.
By Miss F. M. Strack.

Durine the year ending September 1, 1888, the Library
has been increased by 481 volumes, 1,607 parts, and 121 pam-

phlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS.
Ct eats cs kk Gf feo See 29 36 10
RS COMMMER Ni sj tes cl os 6) ss 8s at ee 141 613 91
LANGDISS 5 of SACU AS Se el oe 50 149 5
Jee AVEEEDIVA. 6 be -o, Stu aeee on CH 79 809 15
“ehoiiine THiChs -o fo) \Geket | aia a oy le 182
481 1607 121

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the Whitney Library) is 17,908. There are
11,564 pamphlets bound in 1,528 volumes, making the total
number of volumes 19,4381.

33

[A]

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1887-88.

Of the Bulletin.
Vol. XIII.

No. 6. The Eyes in Scorpions. By G. H. Parxer. pp. 36. 4 Plates. De-
cember, 1887. 75c.

No. 7. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory.— XIX. On certain
Mepus# from New England. By J. W. Fewxes. pp. 32. 6 Plates.
February, 1888. $1.00.

No. 8. Oncertain Vacuities or Deficiencies in the Cranra of Mammats. By
D. D. Stape. pp.6. 2 Plates. March, 1888. 25c.

No. 9. The Superior Incisors and Canine Trrtu of SHEEP. By FLORENCE
Mayo. pp. 12. 2 Plates. June, 1888. 25c.

No. 10. The Ratrre of the Rarrtesnake. By S. Garman. pp. 10. 2 Plates.

August, 1888. 18c. <

Vols. XIV., XV.

A Contribution to American THaLAssoGRAPHY. THREE Cruises of the United
States and Geodetic Survey Steamer “ Blake,” in the Gutr or Mexico, in
the CarrBBEAN Spa, and along the Artantic Coast of the Unirep Srarss,
from 1877 to 1880. By Atexanper Agassiz. 2 vols., pp. xxii, 314, and
(6), 220. Maps and Woodcuts. [April,] 1888. For sale by Houghton, Mif-
flin, & Co.

Vol. XVI. [Geological Series, Vol. II.].

No. 1. On the Petrographical Characters of a Dike of Dranase in the Boston
Basin. By W. H. Hopss. pp. 12. 1 Plate. March, 1888.

(Vol. XVI. to be continued.)

Vol. XVII.
No. 1. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory.--XX. On the Devel
opment of the Calcareous Plates of Asrerias. By J. W. Fewxss.
pp. 56. 5 Plates. July, 1888.

(Vol. XVII. to be continued.)
5

34

Of the Memoirs.
Vol. XV., containing,

Reports on the Results of Dreparne by the U. S. C. S. Steamer “ Blake.” —
XXXI. Report on the ANNELIDS. By Ernst En ers. pp. vi, 335. 60 Plates.
October, 1887.

In preparation : —
Vol. XIV.

No. 2. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. — XVI. Development
of Ossrous Fisues. Part Il. By Axtrxanper Acassiz and C. O.
Wuitman. With 20 Plates.

Vol. XVI.
No. 3. Vhe Genesis of the An1ETIDZ. By Atpneus Hyatt.

Also preparing : —

Illustrations of North American Marine Invertebrates, from Drawings by Burk-
hardt, Sonrel, and A. Agassiz, prepared under the direction of L. Agassiz.
Selections from Embryological Monographs, complied by A. Agassiz,
W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark (discontinued for the present). Papers by
E. L. Mark, on the Development of Lepidosteus and of Arachnactis; by
A. Hyatt, on Cephalopods; by M. E. Wadsworth; and on Fossil Mam-
mals, by Scott and Osborne.

Reports on the Dredging Operations for 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer “ Blake.” H. B.
Brady (Foraminifera), P. H. Carpenter (Comatule), W. H. Dall (Mollusks
of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea), G. B. Goode and T. H.
Bean (East Coast Fishes and Fishes of the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea), A. E. Verrill and W. H. Dall (East Coast Mollusks),
A. A. Hubrecht (Nemerteans), A. Milne-Edwards (Crustacea), and A. E.
Verrill (Alcyonaria).

[B.]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY.

ANNUAL REPORT of the Trustees, together with a Report of the Director for *1859, *1860,
*1861, 1862, 1863, 1864, 1865, *1866, 1867, 1868, *1869, 1870, 1871, 1872, 1878, 1874, 1875, 1876,
1877-78, 1878-79, 1879-80, 1880-81, 1881-82, *1882-83, 1883-84, 1884-85, 1885-86, 1886-87, 1887-88.

BULLETIN. Vol. I., April, 1863 — November, 1869, contains the following papers : —

No.1. List of the FISHES sent by the Museum to different Institutions, in exchange
for other Specimens, with Annotations. By F. W. Purnam. pp. 16. April,
1863. dc.

No. 2. List of the ECHINODERMS. By Atexanper AGassiz. pp. 12. August, 1863. 10c.

No.3. List of the POLYPS and CORALS. ByA.E. Verrm. pp. 32. January, 1864. 20c.

No. 4. List of BRACHIOPODS from the Island of Anticosti. By N.S. Suazer. pp. 10.
June, 1865. 10c.

No. 5. The FOSSIL CEPHALOPODS of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy. By
AtpHeus Hyatt. pp. 82. December, 1867. 20c.

No. 6. Contributions to the FAUNA of the Gulf Stream at Great Depths. By L. F.
DE Pourratks. pp.18. December, 1867. 10c.

No.7. Do. Second Series. pp. 22. December 10, 1868. 15c.

No. 8. Catalogue of the MAMMALS of Massachusetts. ByJ.A.AtteN. pp.110. October,
1869. 5c.

No. 9. Preliminary Report on the ECHINI and STARFISHES dredged in deep water
between Cuba and the Florida Reef, by L. F. de Pourtalés. Prepared by ALEx-
ANDER AGASsIz. pp. 56. October, 1869. 40c.

No. 10. Preliminary Report on the OPHIURIDH and ASTROPHYTID dredged by
L. F. de Pourtales. Prepared by Taropore Lyman. pp. 46. November, 1869. 35c.

No. 11. List of the CRINOIDS obtained on the Coasts of Florida and Cuba, in 1867,
1868, 1869. By L. F. pz PourtaLis. pp. 4. November, 1869.° 5c.

No. 12. List of HOLOTHURID dredged by L. F. pz Pourtatizs. pp. 8. November, 1869. 5c.

No. 13. Report upon the DEEP-SEA DREDGINGS during the Third Cruise of the
U. S. Coast Survey Steamer “ Bibb.” By Louis AGassiz. pp. 24. November 16,
1869. dc.

Vol. II., August, 1870 — April, 1871, contains : —
* No.1. On the EARED SEALS. By J. A. Atten. With an Account of the HABITS of
the NORTHERN FUR SEAL. By Cuartres Bryant. pp. 108. 6 Woodcuts and
8 Plates. August, 1870. $1.00. Plates destroyed by fire.
* No.2. Preliminary Report on the CRUSTACEA dredged by L. F. de Pourtalés. Pre-
pared by WILLIAM Strmpson. Part]. pp. 52. December, 1870. 50c.
* No.3. On the MAMMALS and WINTER BIRDS of East Florida. By J. A. ALLEN.
pp. 290. 5 Plates. April, 1871. $8.26. P
No. 4. Directions for DREDGING. Drawn up by L. F. pe Pourtarss. pp. 4. 5e.
No. 5. Appendix to Preliminary Report on ECHINI. By Atexanper Agassiz. pp. 8. April,
1871. be.
* Out of print.

36 PUBLICATIONS OF THE

Vol. IIL, May, 1871 — July, 1876, contains : —

* No.1. BRACHICPODS of the Straits of Florida. By W.H. Dat. pp. 45. 2 Plates. May,
1871. 85c.

* No.2. Application of PHOTOGRAPHY to Illustrations of Natural History. pp. 2.
2 Plates. November, 1871. 25c. Plates destroyed by fire.

No.3. A Letter concerning DEEP-SEA DREDGING addressed to Professor Peirce. By

Louis AGAssiz. pp.5. December, 1871. 5c.

* No.4. Preliminary Notice of a few Species of ECHINI. By Axexanper AGassiz. pp. 4.
January, 1872. 5c.

* No.5. FOSSIL CEPHALOPODS of the Museum. Embryology. By A. Hyarr. pp. 638.
4 Plates. June, 1872. $1.25.

No. 6. ORNITHOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE of Kansas, Colorado, Wyoming, and

Utah. By J. A. Auten. pp.71. July, 1872. 50c.

* No. 7. Interim Report on the HYDROIDS collected by L. F. de Pourtalés. By Grorce
J. ALLMAN. pp. 2. January, 1873. 5c.

* No.8. The ECHINI collected by the Hassler Expedition. By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ. pp. 4.
January, 1873. 5c.

No.9. Catalogue of the TERRESTRIAL AIR-BREATHING MOLLUSKS of N. Amer-

ica. By W. G. Brynery. pp. 30. 1 Plate. October, 1878. 50c.

No. 10. OPHIURID and ASTROPHYTIDA, Old and New. By TozeoporeE LyMaN. pp.

51. 7 Plates. February, 1874. $1.75.

+ No.11. Exploration of LAKE TITICACA, by Alexander Agassiz and S. W. Gar-
man. I. FISHES and REPTILES. By S. W. Garman. pp.6. 1 Plate. No-
vember, 1875. 20c.

+ No. 12. Exploration of LAKE TITICACA. II. Notice of the PALZOZOIC FOSSILS.
By Orvirte A. Dersy, M.S. With Notes by ALEXANDER AGassiz. pp.8. March,
1876. 10c.

+ No.13. Recent CORALS from Tilibiche, Peru. By ALEXANDER AGassiz and L. F. pE Pour-
TALES. pp.4. 1 Plate. March, 1876. 1léc.

+ No. 14. The Development of SALPA. By Wm. K. Brooks. pp. 58. 34 cuts. March, 1876. 75c.

+ No. 15. Exploration of LAKE TITICACA. IIL List of MAMMALS and BIRDS. By J.
A. ALLEN. With Field Notes by S. W. Garman. pp. 11. July, 1876. 10c.

+ No. 16. Exploration of LAKE TITICACA. IV. CRUSTACEA. By Watrer Faxon. With
87 cuts. pp. 15. July, 1876. 5c.

Vol. IV., July, 1878, contains :—

The TERRESTRIAL AIR-BREATHING MOLLUSCA of the United States and Adjacent
Territories of North America. By W. G. Bryyey. Vol. V. pp. 449. 104 Plates, 312
Cuts, July, 1878. $7.50.

Volume V., April, 1878 — December, 1879, contains : —
No.1. Letter No.1 to C. P. Patterson, Supt. U. S. Coast Survey, on the DREDGING
OPERATIONS of the U.S.C. S. Str. “Blake.” By A. Acassiz. pp.9. April,
1878. 10c.

* No. 2. On the Presence of DEMODEX FOLLICULORUM in the Skin of the Ox. By W.
Faxon. pp.7. 1 Plate. May,1878. l5c.

* No.3. The RICHMOND BOULDER TRAINS. By E.R. Benton. pp. 26. 2 Maps. May,

1878. 45c.
* No. 4. Description of a New Species of CORBICULA, with Notes on other Species of the
Corbiculade Family. By Tempie Prose. pp.4. 1 Plate. July, 1878. 12c.
* No.5. Notes on the Anatomy of CORBICULAD< (Mollusca) and a Translation from the
Danish of an Article on the Anatomy of Cyclas by Jacobsen. By TEMPLE Prime.
pp. 8. 1 Plate. July, 1878. 20c.
No.6. Letter No. 2 to C. P. Patterson, Supt. U. S. Coast Survey, on the DREDGING
OPERATIONS of the U.S. C.S. Str. “Blake.” By A. Acassiz. With Prelim-
inary Report on the Mollusca of the Expedition. By W. H. Dat. pp. 10.
2 Plates. July, 1878. 20c.

No.7. OPHIURID and ASTROPHYTID of the ‘‘Challenger” Expedition. By T.
Lyman. Part I. pp. 104. 10 Plates. July, 1878. $1.50.

* Out of print. + Nos. 11-14, also 15-16, are not sold separately.

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOGLOGY. 37

No. 8. Reports on the DREDGING OPERATIONS of the U. 8. C.S.Str. “Blake.” IL
Description of SOUNDING MACHINE, Water-Bottle, and Detacher. By
Lieut.-Commander C. D. Sicspez, U.S.N. pp- 11. 5 Plates. December, 1878. 60c.

No. 9. Reports on the DREDGING OPERATIONS of the U.S. C. 5. Str. “Blake.” II.
ECHINI, by A. Aaissiz CORALS and CRINOIDS, by L. F. pe Pourratés.
OPHIURANS, by T. Lyman. pp. 58. 10 Plates. December, 1878. $1.50.

No.10. Reports on the DREDGING OPERATIONS of the U.S. C.S. Str. “Blake.” III.
Report on HYDROIDA. ByS. F. Crarke. pp. 14. 5 Plates. January,1879. 65c.

No.11. On some Young Stages in the Development of HIPPA, PORCELLANA, and
PINNIXA. By W. Faxon. pp. 16. 5 Plates. April, 1879. 66c.

No. 12. Reports on the DREDGING OPERATIONS of the U.5.C. 58. Str. “‘ Blake.” IV.
Preliminary Report on the WORMS. By Prof. Ernst Eaters of Gottingen. pp. 6.
June, 1879. 5c.

No. 13. On the Classification of ROCKS. By M. E. Wapsworts. pp. 13. June, 1879. lic.

No. 14. Letter No.3 to C. P. Patterson, Supt. U. 8. Coast Survey, on the DREDGING
OPERATIONS of the U.S. C. S. Str. ‘‘ Blake.” By A. Acassiz. pp. 14. 2 Maps.
June, 1879. 35c.

No. 15. On the Development of PALZAMONETES VULGARIS. By Watter Faxon. pp. 28.
4 Plates. September, 1879. 68c.

No. 16. On the Jaw and Lingual Dentition of certain TERRESTRIAL MOLLUSKS. By
W. G. Brynzy. pp. 38. 2 Plates. December, 1879. 5dc.

Vol. VL, Part I., September, 1879 — October, 1880, contains Nos. 1-11:—

* No.1, List of the DREDGING STATIONS occupied by the U.S. C. 8. Steamers ‘‘ Cor-
win,” “ Bibb,” ‘‘ Hassler,” and ‘‘ Blake,” from 1867-1879. By Brensamin PerRcE
and Carte P. Patterson, Superintendents of the U.S. Coast Survey. pp.16. Sep-
tember, 1879. 165c.

No. 2. OPHIURIDA and ASTROPHYTID of the “‘ Challenger” Expedition. By Txeo-
DORE Lyman. PartII. pp.67. 9 Plates. December, 1879. $1.50.

No. 3. Reports on the Results of DREDGING under the Supervision of ALEXANDER
AGassiz, in the Gutr ot Mexico, 1877-78, by the U. S. C. S. Str. “Blake.” Lieut.-
Commander C. D. Sicspez, U.S. N., commanding. V. General Conclusions from
a Preliminary Examination of the MOLLUSCA. By W. H. Daw. pp. 9.
February, 1880. 10c.

No. 4. Report on the Results of DREDGING, by the U. S.C. S. Str. ‘‘Blake.”» VI. Report
on the CORALS and ANTIPATHARIA. By L. F. pr Pourtatés. pp. 26.
8 Plates. February, 1880. 55c.

+ No. The Ethmoid Bone in the BATS. By Harrison ALLEN, M.D. pp.2. April, 1880. 5e.

t No. On Certain Species of CHELONIOID/®. By S. W. Garman. pp. 4. April, 1880. 5c.

+ No. 7. Contribution to a Knowledge of the Tubular JELLY FISHES. By J. Water
FEewkeEs. pp. 20. 3 Plates. April, 1880. 50c.

+ No. 8. Letter No. 4 to C. P. Patterson, Supt. U. S. Coast Survey, on the DREDGING
OPERATIONS of the U. S. C.S. Str. “‘ Blake,” Commander Bartlett, U. S. N.,
during the summer of 1880. By A. AGAssiz. pp.8. September, 1880. 10c.

t No. 9. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. 8S. C.S. Str. ‘‘ Blake’? VII.
Description of a GRAVITATING TRAP for obtaining Specimens of Ani-
mal Life from intermedial ocean Depths. By Lieut.-Commander C. D. SiesBee,
U.S.N. pp.4. 1Plate. September, 1880. 1é5c.

No. 10. On some Points in the Structure of the Embryonic ZOEA. By Watrer Faxon.
pp. 8. 2double Plates. October, 1880. 40c.

No.11. New Species of SELACHIANS in the Museum Collection. By 8. Garman. pp. 6.
October, 1880. 5c.

Vol. VI., Part II., October, 1881, completing the volume, contains : —

No. 12. Maturation, Fecundation, and Segmentation of LIMAX CAMPESTRIS Binney,
By E. L. Marg. pp. 45d. 5 Plates. October, 1851. $7.50.

* Out of print. + Nos. 5-7, also 8-9, are not sold separately.

88 PUBLICATONS OF THE

Vol. VII., July, 1880 — August, 1884, Geological Series, Vol. I., contains :—
No.1. Notes on the Geology of the IRON and COPPER Districts of LAKE SUPERIOR.
By M. E. Wapsworts. pp. 164. 6 Plates. July, 1880. $2.25.
No.2. The FELSITES and their Associated Rocks North of Boston. By J.S. Dinter.
pp. 16. May,1881. 5c.
+ No. 3. Onan Occurrence of GOLD in Maine. ByM.E.Wansworto. p.1. May, 1881. lc.
7 No. 4, A Microscopical Study of the IRON ORE or PERIDOTITE of Iron Mine Hill,
Cumberland, Rhode Island. By M. E. Wapsworts. pp.5. May, 1881. 5c.
No. 5. Observations upon the Physical GEOGRAPHY and GEOLOGY of Mount Ktaadn
and the adjacent District. By C. E. Hamu. pp. 35. 2 Plates. June, 1881. 55c.
No. 6. Report on the recent additions of FOSSIL PLANTS to the Museum Collections.
By L. Lesquereux. pp.6. October, 1881. 5c.
No.7. The great DIKE at HOUGH’S NECK, Quincy, Mass. By J. E. Wourr. pp. 12.
July, 1882. 10c.
No. 8. On some specimens of Permian FOSSIL PLANTS from Colorado. By Lzo0
LesqueREux. pp.4. October, 1882. 3c.
7 No.9. On the relations of the TRIASSIC TRAPS and SANDSTONES of the Eastern
United States. By Wmuam Morris Davis. 8 Plates. pp. 59. January, 1883. T5c.
¢ No. 10. The Folded Helderberg LIMESTONES east of the Catskills. By Wiu1am Morris
Davis. pp. 20. 2Plates. January, 1883. 25c.
No. 11. The AZOIC SYSTEM andits Subdivisions. By J. D. Warner and M. E. Wapsworta.
pp- xvi. and 335. August, 1884. $2.50.

Vol. VIII., December, 1880 — March, 1881, contains : —

No. 1. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Steamer ‘‘ Blake.” VII.
Etudes preliminaires sur les Crustaces. Par A. Mmne-Epwarps. Ie. Partie.
pp. 68. 2 Plates. December, 1880. 90c.

No. 2. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S C. S. Str. “Blake.” IX.
Preliminary Reports on the ECHINI. By A. Acassiz. pp.7. December, 1880. 5c.

No. 3. New and little known REPTILES and FISHES in the Museum Collections. By
S.GarMan. pp.1l. February, 1881. 10c.

No.4. List of DREDGING STATIONS occupied during the year 1880 by the U.S. C. 5S.
Str. “Blake.” pp.4. February, 1881. 5c.

No. 5. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C.S. Str. “Blake.” X. Re-
port on the CEPHALOPODS and on some additional Species dredged hy the
U. S. F. GC. Str. “‘ Fish-hawk,” during the Season of 1880. By A. E. VERRILL.
pp. 17. 8 Plates. March, 1881. $1.00.

No.6. The Stomach and Genital Organs of ASTROPHYTIDA. By T. Lyman. pp. 8.
2 Plates. February, 1881. 30c.

No. 7. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C.S. Str. “Blake.” XI Re-
port on the ACALEPH®. By J.W. Fewxes. pp.14. 4 Plates. March, 1881. 50c.

No. 8. Studies of the JELLY-FISHES of Narragansett Bay. By J. W. FewkeEs. pp. 42.
10 Plates. February, 1881. $1.50.

No. 9. List of MAMMALS collected by Dr. Edward Palmer in Northeastern Mexico,
with Field-Notes by the Collector. By J. A. ALLEN. pp. 7. 5c.

No. 10. The TRILOBITE: New and Old Evidence relating to its Organization. By C. D.
Watcorr. pp. 41. 6 Plates. March, 1881. $1.00. }

No. 11. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Str. “Blake.” XII Re-
port on the SELACHIANS. By S. Garman. pp. 8. March, 1881 5c.

No. 12. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. C. S. Str. “Blake.” XIII.
Report on the PYCNOGONIDA. ByE. B. Wimsoy. pp. 18. 5 Plates. March

1881. 65c.
No. 13. On ssme CRUSTACEAN DEFORMITIES. By W. Faxon. pp. 18. 2 Plates, March
1881. 40c. , 2
+ No. 14. The DEVONIAN INSECTS of New Brunswick. By H. A. Hacen. pp. 10. March,
1881. 10c.

+ Nos. 3-4, also 9-10, are not sold separately. } Not sold separately,

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. 39

Vol, IX,, June, 1881 — April, 1882, contains : —
¢ No.1. Reports on the Results of DREDGING, by the U.S. C. S. Steamer ‘‘Blake.” XIV,
Déscription sommaire des Espéces nouvelles d’ASTERIES. Par E. Perrier. pp. 3l.
June, 1881. 30c.

No. 2. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S.C. S. Str. “Blake.” XV.
Preliminary Report on the MOLLUSCA, By W.H. Datu. pp. 112. December,
1881. $1.00.

No. 3. Letter No. 5 to C. P. Patterson, Supt. U.S. Coast Survey, onthe EXPLORATIONS
in the vicinity of the Tortugas, during March and April, 1881. By A. Acassiz.
pp. 5. July, 1881. 5c.

No. 4. Report on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C.S. Steamer “Blake.” XVI.
Preliminary Report on the COMATULA. By P. H. Carpenter. pp. 20.
1 Plate. October, 1881. 20c.

No.5. Observations on the Species of the Genus PARTULA Fer.,with a Bibliographical
Catalogue of all the Species. By W. D. Harrman. pp. 26. 2 double Plates,
December, 1881. 50c.

No.6. BIBLIOGRAPHY to accompany “‘Selections from Embryological Monographs,”
compiled by A. AGassiz, W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark. I. CRUSTACEA. By W.
Faxon. pp. 54. March, 1882. 50c.

No.7. Explorations of the SURFACE FAUNA of the Gulf Stream under the Auspices

- of the U.S. Coast Survey. By A. Acassiz. I. Notes on ACALEPHS from the
Tortugas with a Description of New Genera and Species. By J. W. FEwKEs.
pp. 40. 7 Plates (3 double). April, 1882. $1.25.

No. 8. On the ACALEPH/ of the East Coast of New England. By J. W. Fewkes. pp. 20.
1 double Plate. April, 1882. 30c.

Vol. X., June, 1882 — May, 1883, contains : —

No.1. Reports on the Results of DREDGIN G by the U.S. C.S. Steamer “ Blake.’
XVII. Report on the CRUSTACEA. PartI. DECAPODA. By S. I. Smrra.
pp- 108. 16 Plates. June, 1882. $2.50.

No. 2. BIBLIOGRAPHY to accompany “Selections from Embryological Monographs,”
compiled by A. AGAssiz, W. Faxon, and E. L. Marg. Il. ECHINODERMATA.
By A. AGassiz. pp. 26. August, 1882. 25c.

No. 3. Ona Revision of the Ethmoid Bone in the MAMMALIA. By Harrison ALLEN.
pp. 27. 7 Plates. November, 1882. 5c.

No. 4. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Steamer “Blake.”
XVIII. The STALKED CRINOIDS of the Caribbean Sea. By P. I. CarPENTER-
pp- 16. December, 1882. 15c.

No. 5. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. 8. Steamer “Blake.” XIX.
Report on the FISHES. (East Coast of the U.S.] By G. Brown Goope and
TaRrLeTON H. Bean. pp. 387. April, 1883. 30c.

No. 6. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Steamer ‘‘ Blake.” XX.
Report on the OPHIUROIDEA. By Turopore Lyman. pp. 50. 8 Plates. May,
1883. $1.00.

Vol. XI., July, 1883 — July, 1885, contains : —

No.1. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S, ©. S. Steamer “Biake.” XXL
Report on the ANTHOZOA and on some Additional Species dredged by the
“ Blake ” in 1878-79, and by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ Fish Hawk”
in 1880-82. By A. E. Vern. pp. 72. 8 Plates. July, 1883. $1.25.

No. 2. Reports on the Results of DREDGING in the U. S. C. S. Steamer “ Blake.”
XXII. A Chapter in the History of the Gulf Stream. By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.
pp.5. May, 1883. 5c.

* No.3. Exploration of the SURFACE FAUNA of the Gulf Stream, under the Auspices
of the U.S. Coast Survey. By ALexanper Acassiz. IV. Ona few MEDUSA
from the Bermudas. By J. Wauter Fewkes. pp. 10. 1 folding Plate. August,
1883. 20c.

* Out of print. + Not sold separately.

40 PUBLICATIONS OF THE

No. 4. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. C. S. Steamer “Blake.”
XXIII. Report on the ISOPODA. By Oscan Hanger. pp. 13. 4 Plates.
September, 1883. 40c. ;

No. 5. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. C. S. Steamer “‘ Blake.”
XXV. Supplementary Report on the “Blake” CEPHALOPODS. By A. E,
VERRILL. pp.12. 3 Plates. October, 1883. 40c. :

No.6. Descriptions of Two Species of OCTOPUS, from California. pp. 8. 3 Plates.
October, 1883. 40c. :

No. 7. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. C. 8. Steamer “Blake.”
XXV1L Verzeichniss der von den United States Coast Survey Steamers
‘‘Hassler” and ‘‘ Blake,” von 1867 zu 1879, gesammelten MYZOSTOMIDEN.
Von Dr. L. vy. GRaFr. pp.9. November, 1883. 10c. @

No. 8. A Supplement to the Fifth Volume of the TERRESTRIAL AIR-BREATHING
MOLLUSKS of the United States and adjacent Territories. By W. G.
Bryney. pp. 22. 4 Plates. December, 1883. 60c. ,

No.9. Studies from the Newport Marine Zodlogical Laboratory. XIII. On the De-
velopment of certain WORM LARVA. By J. W. Fewxes. pp. 42. 8 Plates,
December, 1883. $1.25.

No. 10. BIBLIOGRAPHY to accompany “‘Selections from Embryological Monographs,
compiled by A. Acassiz, W. Faxon, and E. L. Marx.” III. ACALEPHS. By J.
W. Fewkes. pp. 30. July, 1884. 30c.

No. 11. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XV. On the Development of
AGALMA. By J. W. Fewkes. pp. 86. 4 Plates. July, 1885. Tic.

Vol. XII., July, 1835 — September, 1886, contains: —

No.1. CHLAMYDOSELACHUS ANGUINEUS Garm. A Living Species of Cladodont
Shark. By Samus, GarMAN. July, 1885. 85 pp. 20 Plates. T&c.

No. 2. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S.C. S. Steamer ‘‘ Blake.”
XXVII. Report on the Specimens of BOTTOM DEPOSITS. By Jonn Murray.
25 pp. October, 1885. 0c.

No. 3. Contributions from the Embryological Laboratory. VIII. Observations on the
Development of AGELENA NAVIA. By Wuuiam A. Locy. 41 pp. 12 Plates.
January, 1886. $1.50.

No. 4. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XVII. Preliminary Observations
on the Development of OPHIOPHOLIS and ECHINARACHNIUS, By J. W.
Fewkes. 48pp. 8 Plates. March, 1886. $1.50.

No. 5. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Steamer “Biake.”
XXVIII. Description of thirteen Species and two Genera of FISHES from
the ‘“‘Blake” Collection. By G. Browne GoopE and Tarteron H. Bean. 28 pp.
July, 1886. 50c.

No. 6. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U.S. C. S. Steamer ‘‘Blake.”
XXIX. Report on the MOLLUSCA. PartI. BRACHIOPODA and PELE-
CYPODA. By W.H. Datu. pp. 148. 9 Plates. September, 1886. $2.50.

Vol. XIII., October, 1886 — August, 1888, contains : —

No.1. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U S.C. S. Steamer “Blake.”
XXX. Report on the HOLOTHURIOIDEA. By H. Tuéet. pp. 22. 1 Plate.
October, 1886. 30c.

No. 2. A Second Supplement to the Fifth Volume of the TERRESTRIAL AIR-
BREATHING MOLLUSKS of the United States and adjacent Territories.
By W.G. Bryyey. pp. 26. 3 Plates. December, 1886. 30c.

No.3. Simple Eyes in ARTHROPODS. By E. L. Marg. pp. 58. 5 Plates. February,
1887. $1.00.

No. 4. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XVIII. On the Development of
the Calcareous Plates of AMPHIURA. By J. W. Fewxes. pp. 44. 8 Plates,
May, 1887. $1.00. -

No. 5. Preliminary Account of the FOSSIL MAMMALS from the White River Forma- §
tion contained in the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy. By W. B. Scorrand
H. F. Osporne. pp. 22, 2 Plates. September, 1887. 40c.

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. 41

No. 6. The EYES in SCORPIONS. ByG.H. Parker. pp.36. 4 Plates. December,1887. 75c.

No. 7. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XIX. On certain MEDUSA
from New England. By J. W. Fewkes. pp. 32. 6 Plates. February, 1888, $1.00.

No.8. Oncertain Vacuities or Deficiencies in the CRANIA of MAMMALS. By D. D.
SLADE. pp.6. 2 Plates. March, 1888. 25c.

No. 9. The Superior Incisors and Canine TEETH OF SHEEP. By Frorence Mayo.
pp. 12. 2 Plates. June, 1888. 25c.

No.10. The RATTLE of the RATTLESNAKE. ByS. Garman. pp. 10. 2 Plates, August,
1888. 18c.

Vols. XIV. -XV. [April] contain : —

A Contribution to American THALASSOGRAPHY. Three CRUISES of the United
States and Geodetic Survey Steamer “ Blake,” in the GULF OF MEXICO, in
the CARIBBEAN SEA, and along the ATLANTIC COAST of the UNITED
STATES, from 1877 to 1880. By ALExaNDER AGAssiz. 2 vols. pp. xxii, 314, and
(6), 220. Maps and Woodcuts. [April,]1888. For sale by Houghton, Mifflin, & Co,

Vol. XVI., Geological Series, Vol. II., contains : —
No.1. On the Petrographical Characters of a DIKE of DIABASE, in the BOSTON
BASIN. By W.H.Hosss. pp. 12. 1 Plate. March, 1888. 25c.
(Vol. XVI. to be continued.)

Vol. XVIL contains :—
No.1. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XX. On the Development of the
Calcareous Plates of ASTERIAS. By J. W. Fewkes. pp. 56. 5 Plates. July,
1888. $1.00.
(Vol. XVII. to be continued.)

In preparation : —

The Lateral System of SELACHIANS. By Samuet Garman. With 50 Plates.

On NEW INVERTEBRATES from the Coast of California. By J. WALTER FEWKEs. With
Plates.

42 PUBLICATIONS OF THE

The Quarto Publications will hereafter be issued as Memorrs. The Illustrated Cata-
logues thus far published have been collected into Vols. 1-1V. of the Memorgs.

MEMOIRS.

Vol. L, October, 1864 — February, 1865, contains Nos. 1, 2, Illustrated Catalogue.
No.1. OPHIURID4: and ASTROPHYTIDA. By ‘Tueopore Lyman. pp. 200. 19
Woodcuts and 2 Plates. October, 1864. $8.50
No.2. NORTH AMERICAN ACALEPHA, By ALexanpER AGassiz. pp. 234. 360
Woodcuts. February, 1865. $4.00.

Vol. I1., April, 1870 — May, 1876, contains Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, Illustrated Catalogue, and No. 9

of Memoirs.

No.3. Monograph of the NORTH AMERICAN ASTACIDA, By Dr. Hermann A.
Hagen. pp-1ll. 11 Plates. April, 1870. $4.00.

No.4. Deep-Sea CORALS. By L. F. pe Pourtates. pp. 93. 8 Plates. 1871. $3.00.

No. 5. Immature State of the ODONATA. PartI. Sub-family Gomphina. By Louis
Casor. pp.17. 38 Plates. July, 1871. $1.00.

No.6. Supplement to the OPHIURIDH and ASTROPHYTIDZ. By THEODORE
LymMAN. pp.17. 2 Plates. October, 1871. 7éc.

No. 9. On some INSECT DEFORMITIES. By Dr. H. A. Hacen. pp.22. 1 Plate.
May, 1876. Téc.

* Vol. III., 1872-74, contains No. 7 Illustrated Catalogue. 1 vol. Text; 1 vol. Plates. (Plates
partly destroyed by fire.)

No.7. Revision of the ECHINI. By ALexanpER AGassz. pp. 796. 69 Woodcuts. 94
Plates. 1872-74. 50.00.

Vol. IV., February, 1874, — May, 1876, contains No. 8 Illustrated Catalogue and No. 10 of
Memoirs.
No. 8. The Zodlogical Results of the Hassler Expedition :—
*I. ECHINI, CRINOIDS, and CORAZS. By Axnexanper AGassiz and L, F. DE
Pourtates. pp. 54. With 15 Cutsand 10 Plates. February, 1874. $3.00.
*II. OPHIURIDA and ASTROPHYTID4, including those dredged by the late
Dr. Stimpson. By Taropore Lyman, pp. 34. With 5 Plates and 4 Cuts. Feb-
ruary, 1875. $1.50.
No. 10. The American BISONS, Living and Extinct. By J. A. Auten. In connection
with the Geological Survey of Kentucky. pp. 246. With 12 Plates and Map.
May, 1876. $5.00.
For this number apply to Prof. N. 8. SHater, Cambridge, Mass.
Vol. V., April — November, 1877, contains :—
No.1. North American STARFISHES. By ALexanpER AGAssiz. pp. 137. With 20
Plates and 20 Cuts. April, 1877. $5.50.
No. 2. Report on the HYDROIDA collected during the Exploration of the Gulf
Stream by L. F. de Pourtalés, Assist. U. S. Coast Survey. By George J.
ALLMAN, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. pp. 66. With 34 Plates. November, 1877. $4.00.
Vol. VI., January, 1878 — October, 1880, contains : —
No.1. The AURIFEROUS GRAVELS of the Sierra Nevada of California. By
J. D. Wairney. pp. xviii. and 569. With 24 Plates and 2 folded Maps, one of
which is in 2 sheets. pp. 1-288, April, 1879; pp. 289-569, October, 1880.
No. 2. Report on the FOSSIL PLANTS of the Auriferous Gravel Deposits of the
Sierra Nevada. By Leo Lesquereux. pp. viii.and 62. With 10 Double Plates.
January, 1878.
Vol. VI. of the Memoirs is published in connection with Prof. J. D. Whitney, to whom
application must be made for copies by parties'not on the regular exchange list of the Museum.
Vol. VII., May, 1880 — October, 1882, contains : —
No. 1. Report on the FLORIDA REEFS. By Louis Acassiw. Accompanied by Tllus-
trations of FLORIDA CORALS, from drawings by Songer, Burgwarpt, A.

* Out of print.

~~» i

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY. 43

AGassiz, and Rorerrer. With an Explanation of the Plates, by L. F. pe Pour-
TALES. Published by permission of A. D. Bacne and Cartite P. Patterson, Super-
intendents of the U. S. Coast Survey. pp. 61. 238 Plates. May, 1880. $5.50.

No. 2. The CLIMATIC CHANGES of Later Geological Times. A Discussion based
on Observations made in the Cordilleras of North America. By J. D.
Warrney. Part I., containing pp. viii and 120, October, 1880. Part II., contain-
ing pp. 121-264. Part III. pp. 265-394. October, 1882.

For sale. Apply to Prof. J. D. WHITNEY.
Vol. VIII., August, 1881 — July, 1884, contains : — a
®No. 1. Immature State of the ODONATA. Part II. Subfamily ASCHNINA. By
; Louis CasoT. pp. 40. 5 Plates. August, 1881. $1.50.

No. 2. Exploration of the SURFACE FAUNA of the Gulf Stream under the Aus-
pices of the U.S. Coast Survey. By ALexanpEr AcaAssiz. III. Part I. The
PORPITIDA and VELELLIDA. By Auexanper AGAssiz. pp. 16. 12 Plates.
July, 1883. $1.50. ;

No. 3. North American REPTILES. By S. Garman, in connection with the Kentucky
Geological Survey, N. S. Swater, Director. pp. 200. 9 Plates. [Issued by the
Museum, July, 1884. ]

Apply to Prof. N. 8. SHALER.
Vol. IX., July, 1882 — September, 1884, contains : —

No.1. Selections from EMBRYOLOGICAL MONOGRAPHS, compiled by A. Acassiz,
W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark. I. CRUSTACEA. By W. Faxon. pp. 28. 14
Plates. July, 1882. $8.00.

No. 2. Selections from EMBRYOLOGICAL MONOGRAPHS, compiled by ALEXANDER
AGassiz, WALTER Faxon, and E. L. Marx. II. ECHINODERMATA. By
ALEXANDER AGAssiz. pp. 45. 15 Plates. July, 1883. $3.00.

No. 3. Selections from EMBRYOLOGICAL MONOGRAPHS, compiled by A. AGassiz,
W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark. III. ACALEPHS. By J. W. Fewkes. POLYPS.
By E.L. Marx. pp. 52. 18 Plates. September, 1884. $3.00.

(Vol. IX. to be continued.)
Vol. X., September, 1883 — September, 1885, contains ; —

No.1. Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. C.S. Steamer “ Blake.”
XXIV. Part I. Report on the ECHINI. By Atexanper AGassiz. pp. 126.
82 Plates. September, 1883. $7.00.

No.2. Onan Extinct Type of DOG from Ely Cave, Lee County, Virginia. By J. A.
Auten. 13 pp. 3 Plates. December, 1885, Apply to Prof. N. S. SHater.

No.3. Results of an Examination of SYRIAN MOLLUSCAN FOSSILS, chiefly
from the Range of Mount Lebanon. By C. E. Hamiry. pp. 68. 6 Plates.

' April, 1884. $2.50.

No. 4. A Revision of the ASTACIDAS. By Water Faxon. pp. vi, 186. 10 Plates.
September, 1885. $5.00.

Vol. XI. contains : —

No.1. LITHOLOGICAL STUDIES. A Description and Classification of the ROCKS
OF THE CORDILLERAS. By M. E. Wadsworth. pp. xvi, 208, and xxxii.
8 Plates. Cambridge, October, 1884.

Apply to Prof. J. D. Wuitnry.

(Vol. XI. to be continued.)

Vols. XII. and XIII., April — August, 1884, contain : —
The WATER BIRDS of North America. Vol. I., pp. xi and 537; Vol. IL, pp. 552.
With numerous Woodcuts in the Text. By S. F. Barrp, T. M. Brewer, and R. Rmeway.
Issued in Continuation of the Publications of the Geological Survey of California, J. D.

Wuarrney, State Geologist. April and August, 1884.

For sale by Little, Brown, & Co., Boston, Mass.
Vol. XIV. contains :—

No.1. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XVI. Development of OS-
SEOUS FISHES. I. Pelagic Stages of YOUNG FISHES. By ALexANDER
Aqassiz and C. 0. Wutrman. 56 pp. 19 Plates. September, 1885. $3.50.

44 PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL MUSEUM.

No. 2, Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. XVI. Development of OS-
SEOUS FISHES. IL. By AtexanpER AGassmz and C. 0. Warman. With 20
Plates. (Preparing.)
Vol. XV. contains : —
Reports on the Results of DREDGING by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer “Blake.”
XXXI. Report on the ANNELIDS. By Ernst Enters. pp. vi, 335. 60 Plates.
October, 1887. $12.50.

Vol. XVI. contains : —
No. 1. Notes on the TAXODIUM DISTICHIUM, or BALD CYPRESS. By N. 8.
SHater. pp.16. June, 1887.
No. 2. Onthe Original CONNECTION of the Eastern and Western COAL FIELDS
OF THE OHIO VALLEY. By N.S. Sater. pp. 12. June, 1887.
For Nos. 1 and 2, apply to Prof. N, 8S. Saater.
No.3. The Genesis of the ARIETIDA. By Atpueus Hyarr. (Preparing.)

(Vol. XVI. to be continued.)

In preparation : —

Illustrations of North American MARINE INVERTEBRATES, from drawings by
BURKHARDT, SONREL, and A. AGASsiz, prepared under the Direction of L, Acassm. Selec-
tions from EMBRYOLOGICAL MONOGRAPHS, compiled by A. Acassiz, W. Faxon,
and E. L. Mark (discontinued for the present). Papers, by E. L. Marg, on the Develop-
ment of LEPIDOSTEUS and of ARACHNACTIS ; by M. E. Wapsworts ; and by
Scorr and OsBoryez, on FOSSIL MAMMALS.

Reports on the DREDGING Operations for 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in Charge of
ALEXANDER AGassiz, by the U.S. C. S. Steamer ‘‘Blake.” H. B. Brapy (FORAMINIF-
ERA), P. H. Carpenter (COMATULA), W. H. Datt (MOLLUSKS of the Gulf of
Mexico and the Caribbean Sea), G. B. Goopr and T. H. Bean (East Coast FISHES, and
FISHES of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea), A. E. Verrmu and W. H.
Dati (East Coast MOLLUSKS), A. A. Husrecat (NEMERTEANS), A. Mitnz-EpWaArps
(CRUSTACEA), and A. €. Verrii (ALCYONARIA).

In the Preface to the Zoologischer Jahresbericht for 1886, the publications of the Museum of Com-
parative Zodlogy are mentioned as among the periodicals given to irregular ways. While it is true,
that, for the sake of keeping together the successive parts of an extended monograph, two or three vol-
umes of the Memoirs and of the Bulletins of the Museum are frequently in the course of publication,
yet care has always been taken to show on the title page of the completed volume the years which
it covers.

The Museum publications are not periodicals issued at fixed periods, — they must of necessity appear
at irregular intervals, — but each number of the Memoirs and of the Bulletins is issued with a separate
cover, showing the month of its publication and indicating plainly its relation to any volume of the
series. Each number is distributed as soon as it comes from the binder to the various scientific socie-
ties and specialists on the exchange list of the Museum. The author’s copies do not differ in any way
from those distributed by the Museum, and are sent out at the same time.

The practice of the Museum in regard to its publications does not differ from that of the most care-
fully edited scientific periodicals. In addition to the indications of dates of publication to be found on
the title pages of completed volumes, and on the covers of the separate numbers of the Memoirs and of
the Bulletins, the Museum has issued from time to time in its Annual Report a “ List of Publications,”
giving the date of publication of each number of the Memoirs and Bulletins.

It is hardly necessary to state that the Zodlogical Station at Naples, which edits the Zoologischer
Jahresbericht, has always received from the Museum the material necessary for the dates of publica-
tion of the Museum Memoirs and Bulletins. It may not be out of place to mention that the quarto
publications of the Zodlogical Station at Naples are issued and dated upon the same plan which
Dr. Mayer finds so undesirable in an American publication.

+3

45

[C.]

INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HaRVARD COLLEGE, Sept. 1. 1887.

Bemeenaper Hund skits! i. be Os eee sr is oe 98100,000.00
OSL FL oy, (ol ISG co ei, i oe ee ere 50,000.00
eee ontorial Hund °. . : . « - © + te ce Few sl 287,983.10
SResehersramdeeupiissMUNG: 2 's.9: 3) ce sep is) sy fe ee) 8) 7,594.01
POnetemEInG Memes) 1) os |.) cs, ch ASAE ys ce oie ae. Meat hl AGO BE
Shncealihs [iil 30 Se ped ee res ee ict arama omer 7,740.66

$580,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually ex-
amined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of
which is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in
an analysis of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is
applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund can be applied for the benefit of one or more
students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport Marine Laboratory,
or the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl.

Applications for the two Tables reserved for advanced students at the Newport
Marine Laboratory, and for the Table at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made
to the Curator of the Museum before the lst of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

RONEN AL REPORT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,
TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

1888-89.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1889.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. BOWDITCH.

OFFICERS.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .
HERMANN A. HAGEN.

NATHANIEL S. SHALER.

EK. L. MARK
W. M. DAVIS
J. ELIOT WOLFF .

THADDEUS W. HARRIS .

G. HOWARD PARKER.
WALTER FAXON.

D. D. SLADE.
SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER.
ALPHEUS HYATT
MISS F. M. SLACK .

Curator.

Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Entomology.

Professor of Palcontology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.
Assistant Professor of Geography.
Instructor in Petrography.

Instructor in Geology. ;
Instructor in Zodlogy.

Assistant in Zodlogy.

Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.

Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.

Assistant in Paleontology.

Librarian.

hE PO:

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE: —

DuriInG the past year the following courses of instruction have
been given at the Museum : —

A course in Biology, by Professor Farlow and Mr. G. H.
Parker, assisted by Mr. W. A. Setchell.

A course in Zodlogy, by Mr. G. H. Parker, who had charge
of the Biological Laboratory.

General Lectures in Zoélogy, by Professor Mark. A course
in Microscopic Anatomy and a course of Embryology were also
given by Professor Mark. In the Laboratory work he was as-
sisted by Mr. C. B. Davenport.

Professors J. D, Whitney, Shaler, Davis, and Mr. J. E. Wolff
gave the usual courses in Geology, Paleontology, Physical
Geography, and Petrography.

For the details of these courses of instruction I would refer
to the accompanying special Reports of the Professors and
Instructors.

The Assistants of the Museum, Professors Hagen and Faxon,
Dr. Slade, Mr. Garman, Mr. Brewster, Professor Hyatt, and Dr.
Fewkes, have devoted, as usual, a large share of their time in
supplying specialists with material and information in their
various departments.

The addition to the University Museum Building, containing
the accommodation needed for the Geological and Geographical
Departments, is now ready for its furniture, and I hope that by
the next Academic year it may be completed and occupied. In
order to make this possible, however, the Museum will have

4

to anticipate a part of its income for a number of years. The
Botanical Section is also ready for the furniture and heating
apparatus.

Beside these two sections, the last section of the Oxford Street
facade will also be completed by the time this Report is printed.
Professor J. P. Cooke has succeeded in obtaining from the friends
of the College a sum sufficient for the erection of another
section, which is to be devoted to the Mineralogical Depart-
ment. With the exception of the southwest corner piece, the
building will then be complete according to the scheme laid
out in 1859 for the accommodation of the Natural History
Departments. This should for some time to come give ample
room for the working of the Departments it is intended to
shelter, leaving for future exigencies the southwest corner piece,
which will eventually connect the University Museum with the
Peabody Museum.

I have annexed to my Report, —

1. An elevation of the University Museum as seen from Oxford
Street.

2. A view of the University Museum Building, exclusive of
the Mineralogical Section now erecting, as seen from the north-
west corner, on Oxford Street.

3. A view of the interior of the Natural History Quadrangle,
seen from the southeast side.

4. A ground plan of the Natural History Quadrangle, showing
the North Wing, or the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy; the
northwest corner piece, containing the Natural History Laborato-
ries; the Oxford Street facade of the University Museum, com-
prising the Botanical Department, the Mineralogical Department,
and the projected southwest corner of Laboratories and Lecture
Rooms which are to connect the University Museum with the
South Wing, or the Peabody Museum. The shaded parts indi-
cate the portions of the building already erected, or in process
of erection.

5. A plan of the BASEMENT, showing the storage and work
rooms of the Alcoholic Collections in the North Wing, the re-
ceiving-room, boiler-room, and Aquarium and Vivarium in the
northwest corner piece, and the engine-room, laboratories, work-
shops, and photographic rooms of the Geological and Lithological
Department.

i)

6. The Frrst Fioor plan. — The Paleontological Exhibition
Rooms and work-rooms of the North Wing and the Synoptic
Room; the Geological and Paleontological Laboratories of the
northwest corner piece, and the large Lecture Room of the
Geological Department.

7. The Second Foor plan, containing in the North Wing
the Entomological Department, the special collections, the room
for special students of the Geological and Paleontological De-
partment, and a part of the Library, which is continued in the
northwest corner piece, which also contains the Curator’s Room
and the Lithological Laboratories.

8. The plan of the THirrp Fioor, which shows the main
-Exbibition floor, containing in the North Wing the Systematic
and Faunal Collections; in the corner piece, the Atlantic and
Pacific Faunal, and the Geological and Geographical Exhibition
Rooms.

9. The plan of the GALLERY and Fourtrs FiLoor shows the
continuation of the Systematic and Faunal Collection in the
North Wing, the Zodlogical Laboratories in the northwest corner
piece, and the Geographical Laboratories.

10. The plan of the Firrra FLoor, showing in the North
Wing the storage and work rooms of Vertebrate Paleontology,
and of skeletons and skins of birds and mammals, while the
corner piece and the extension on Oxford Street contain the
storage and work rooms for fish and reptile skeletons, a large
Lecture Room, and the storage and work rooms of the other In-

vertebrates.

. The arrangement shown in these plans does not differ
materially from that published in the Twentieth Annual Report
(1884-85), with the exception that the Geological and Geo-
graphical Departments now occupy their final quarters, while
the collections of dry invertebrates have been moved to adjoin-
ing rooms, leaving the greater part of the fifth floor of the North
Wing for the development of the fossil vertebrate collection.

Professor E. B. Wilson, of Bryn Mawr, was the only investi-
gator at the Newport Marine Laboratory. He passed a short
time there this summer, and collected material for his work on
Polygordius. The Museum students and assistants, Messrs. EH.
R. Boyer, C. B. Davenport, and W. M. Woodworth, as well as
Dr. Mark, availed themselves of the facilities offered by the

6

Biological Laboratory and the Museum Tables at the United
States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl, for which the
Museum is specially indebted to Colonel Macdonald, U. 8. Fish
Commissioner.

The usual amount of material from our collections has been
sent for study to a number of specialists. The customary ex-
changes have been continued, and are mentioned in the special
Reports of the Assistants. Professors Scott and Osborne have
continued their work on our American Fossil Vertebrates, and
another part of their report is nearly ready for publication.

Among our principal accessions I may mention a skeleton of
a Right Whale, finely mounted by Ward, and now hung from
the ceiling of the large room devoted to the Systematic Collection
of Vertebrates. This skeleton was originally secured for the
Museum by the late Captain N. E. Atwood, of Provincetown,
where the whale had been thrown ashore. In the early days of
my Natural History career, I had the unpleasant task of assisting
in the preparation of the skeleton.

We have made interesting purchases of Alcoholic Reptiles
for the Exhibition Rooms.

Through Professor Ward we have secured a series of valu-
able skeletons of a few of the large fossil Mammals of the
Pampas in sufficiently good state of preservation to be mounted
and placed on exhibition in the Tertiary Room. A number of
mounted specimens have likewise been received from him to fill
gaps in our Exhibition Rooms, as well as a number of casts of
Pacific Islanders and other aborigines for the Faunal Rooms.

We have purchased also the continuation of the series of casts
of Stegocephali from Dr. Anton Fritsch, of Prague, and casts
of Phenacodus and Hyracotherium from Professor Cope.

From Lieutenant Moser, U.S. N., we have received an in-
teresting collection of corals, taken from a cable laid off Key
West in 1881, and taken up in 1888. I hope soon to publish
an account of these corals, illustrating as they do the rate of
growth of several species.

From Mr. Charles Wachsmuth was received a fine slab of Cri-
noids from the Kinderhook bed of Legrand, Marshall Co., lowa.

We have also received a model of the Pacific Coast of the
United States, prepared under the direction of Professor Davidson
of the U. S. Coast Survey.

T

A number of collections sent out for study have been returned,
and we have received from Mr. Godman a large suite of Amer-
ican Neuroptera, which will be worked up by Dr. Hagen for the
Biologia Centrali Americana.

From the British Museum we have received a collection of
five hundred Birds from Central America and New Guinea; and
from the American Museum of Natural History of New York,
an excellent plaster cast of the Chimpanzee known as “ Mr.
Crowley.”

The Museum is greatly indebted to Messrs. Brewster, Cabot,
and Slade for their interest in their respective Departments. Mr.
Jackson has also continued during the past year to render effi-
cient aid to Professor Hyatt in the work of his Department.
Mrs. Le Conte has presented to the Museum five hundred dollars,
to be expended for cabinets to include the collection of Coleoptera
which Dr. Le Conte left by his will to the Museum.

Professor Faxon has kindly continued in charge of the collec-
tion of Crustacea, and he and Dr. Fewkes have spent some time
in the arrangement of the Invertebrates of the Atlantic Faunal
Exhibition Room, which was opened to the public during the past
summer. It is still very imperfectly arranged, and there are many
annoying gaps to be filled; but the room as a whole is an inter-
esting one, and gives to the public an idea of a great marine
realm such as no other Museum has as yet attempted to repre-
sent. It is hoped that the Pacific Room may also soon be opened
to the public.

The Atlantic Room contains typical collections of Protozoa,
Sponges, Radiates, Mollusks, Annelids, Crustacea, and Fishes,
extending from the littoral to the abyssal fauna. There is also a
limited space devoted to the Reptiles and the Birds characteristic
of the sea-shores, and the Seals, Whales, and other marine Mam-
mals. A case is devoted to the apparatus used in dredging expe-
ditions. Samples of the deep-sea and littoral formations will also
find their place in this room, and the pelagic fauna is fairly rep-
resented by glass models of the principal Acalephs, Cepha-
lopods, and other groups not included among the alcoholic or
dried specimens.

With each of their special Reports will be found a list of the
publications of the Assistants of the Museum, and of the pub-
lications based upon the materials of the institution, as well as of

:8

the investigations carried on by the Professors and students of
the University in our Laboratories. It will be seen from these
reports that our collections continue in excellent condition. The
Museum has lost the services of Dr. Fewkes, who has had charge
of the Collection of Invertebrates for the last three years, and of
the Radiates since 1880. ;

Appendix A of this Report contains a list of the publications
of the Museum issued during the past Academic Year. We have
published eight numbers of the Bulletin, — four in the Geologi-
cal Series, and four in the Zodlogical, including a volume by Dr.
Dall containing the second part of the Report on the ‘* Blake”
Mollusea, illustrated by over thirty plates of excellent figures
drawn by Dr. McConnell. This final Report contains 492 pages,
and is a valuable contribution to our knowledge of the Mollusks’
of the East Coast of the United States, and of the Gulf of Mexico
and Caribbean Sea. It has been prepared by Dr. Dall with his
usual care and skill.

One number of the Memoirs has been issued, — the continu-
ation by Professor Whitman and myself of our Memoir on the
Development of Osseous Fishes.

Dr. P. H. Carpenter is making good progress in his final Re-
port of the “ Blake’? Comatule. The proofs of six plates of the
Memoir he is preparing have been received from him.

Among the monographs in preparation I may also mention a
paper on the Genesis of the Arietidze, by Professor Hyatt, now in
press. This will be published jointly by the Smithsonian Insti-
tution and the Museum. The Smithsonian Institution has also
published an Explanation of the Plates, by Mr. Fewkes, of a
Memoir on Astrangia, prepared for Professor Louis Agassiz, but
which he never completed. It was in the hands of Mr. Pourtalés
for completion at the time of his death.

Mr. Louis Cabot is also preparing the third part of his
Memoir on the early stages of the Odonata. The plates are
completed.

Mr. Garman has sent in for publication in the Bulletin an
interesting paper on the Cave Animals of Missouri.

I am myself preparing a Memoir on a new Stalked Crinoid ~
(Calamocrinus) dredged by the “ Albatross” off the Galapagos —
on her voyage from New York to San Francisco. This is one of
the most interesting Crinoids dredged by any of the deep-sea —

+)

expeditions. It is closely allied to Millericrinus and other Apio-
crionide, and forms a part of the collection of Echinoderms made
by the ‘* Albatross?’ and kindly sent me for study by Colonel
Macdonald, the U. S. Fish Commissioner.

The accessions to the Library are more numerous than in the
previous year, and it now numbers more than twenty thousand
volumes, exclusive of the Whitney Library. This growth is
principally due to the increase of our exchange list.

This is the first year in which the Museum has practically
lived within its income, while fully sustaining its usual work not
only in instruction, but also in the increase of its collections and
of its Library; its publications have equalled in importance those
of former years, and the investigations carried on within its walls
have not been in the least curtailed. Still, until the advances
made to the Museum by the Corporation for the Geological Sec-
tion and for the purchase of fossils have been repaid, we cannot
be expected to show as great activity as if our resources were
unencumbered. We need about thirty thousand dollars to place
the Museum on a completely independent footing again.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CaMBRIDGE, October 1, 1889.

10

REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Josian D. Wuitney, Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.

In this department two courses of lectures were given. The
first of these was on the Physical Geography and Geology of
North America, and the Past and probable Future Development
of its Material Resources. This course (twice a week, lasting
through the College year) was attended by about thirty-five
persons, mostly Seniors, with a few special students and candi-
dates for a higher degree. The second course (once a week,
through the year) was on Mineral Veins and Metalliferous De-
posits, their mode of occurrence, and theories of their origin.
This course was attended by about half a dozen persons, mostly
Seniors, with one or two officers of instruction in the College.
For the current year (1889-90) an arrangement has been made
with Mr. Wolff, Instructor in Petrography, by which his course,
of four lectures a week, with laboratory work, will occupy the
first half of the year, while during the second half the Sturgis-
Hooper Professor will take the subject of Economical Geology,
with a similar amount of lectures and library work. This is
done in order that there may be more concentration of the
student upon the subject selected, and also that those who
wish to take Economical Geology may have the opportunity to
become prepared for a course of this kind, in which a knowledge
of mineralogy and some acquaintance with rocks is extremely
desirable.

The volume entitled “* The United States, Facts and Figures
illustrating the Physical Geography of the Country and its Mate-
rial Resources,” mentioned in the last Report, has been published
during the year, and occupies 472 pages. In this volume the
statistics as prepared for the article in the Encyclopedia Britan-
nica, of which the volume in question is mainly a reprint, have,
as far as possible, been brought down to the year 1888. An

ati

Appendix was also added, in which the subject of the geo-
graphical discovery of the Cordillera Region was treated at some
length, and a sketch was given of the methods and results of
hypsometrical measurements in the United States, with special
reference to the probable accuracy of the results obtained. Fur-
thermore, the subject of the cartography of the country was
discussed in some detail.

The work done in preparing definitions of technical terms in
physical geography, geology, mining, and metallurgy for the
Century Dictionary has occupied a very considerable amount of
time, and as five parts of the encyclopedic work are now before
the public, bringing it down to D, those who are interested can
judge for themselves of the nature and value of the material
contributed in the branches of science specified.

Some field-work has also been done in continuation of the
investigation of the surface and glacial geology of North Amer-
ica, to which allusion has been made in preceding Reports.
The regions visited were the southern and eastern portions of
Long Island and the adjacent mainland, and the valley of the
St. Lawrence.

12

REPORT

ON THE INSTRUCTION IN GEOLOGY, PALZONTOLOGY,
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY, AND PETROGRAPHY.

By Proressors N. S. SHALER anp W. M. Davis, anp Mr. J. E. Wo.rr.

Durine the Academic year 1888-89, the following courses
of instruction were given in the Geological and Paleontological
Laboratory, and in the field, by N. S. Shaler and his assistants.

1. N. H. 4. A course in Elementary Geology, by N. S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with certain required reading ; attended by one hundred
and sixty students.

2. N.H.4a. A course of Practical Geological Exercises in the Labo-
ratory and in the field, by Mr. T. W. Harris, designed especially for those
who intend in subsequent years to continue the study of Geology and
Paleontology ; attended by fifty-five students.

3. N. H. 8. A course of Advanced Geology, by N. S. Shaler, W. M.
Davis, J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris; two lectures a week, together with
assigned field-work, which was conducted by Prof. W. M. Davis and Mr.
J. E. Wolff. In the winter season the field-work was replaced by the
study of models and geological maps, and of reports on selected geological
areas. Students in this course were required to prepare a thesis on an
assigned subject. Those only who have passed a satisfactory examination
in the elementary courses are permitted to attend. Forty-nine persons
received this instruction.

4. N. H. 14. A course on Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with laboratory work and theses.

5. N. H.15. <A course in Historical Geology, designed to train stu-
dents in the determination of geological horizons, attended by three
students.

6. N. H. 16. A course in field-work, designed to afford special training
in the processes of geological surveying, by N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,
J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris, attended by thirteen students.

During the winter season the students in advanced classes
attended regular evening meetings designed to serve the purpose
accomplished by the Seminaria of the German Universities.

13

During the summer of 1889, twenty-five students received
systematic instruction in field-work. This instruction was given
in two summer schools, that of Elementary Geology, which was
taught at Cambridge, and an advanced course, taught in the
States of New York, Connecticut, and Massachusetts. Instruc-
tion in these courses was given by N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,
and T. W. Harris, with the assistance of Prof. H. S. Williams
of Cornell University, who collaborated with the other instruc-
tors in the work done in the Genesee Valley.

During the year, the following papers of a scientific nature
have been published by N. S. Shaler: —

1. Report on the Geology of Martha’s Vineyard. Seventh Annual
Report of the Director of the United States Geological Survey, 1885—-
86. Washington, 1888, pp. 297-363. With Illustrations and Two
Maps.

2. On the Geology of the Cambrian District of Bristol County, Massa-
chusetts. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVI.
No. 2, pp. 13-41. With Map and Two Plates. Cambridge, October,
1888.

3. On the Occurrence of Fossils of the Cretaceous Age on the Island
of Martha’s Vineyard, Mass. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative
Zoélogy, Vol. XVI. No. 5, pp. 89-97. With Two Plates.

4. Chance or Design. The Andover Review, August, 1889, pp. 1-17,

5. Introduction to Bulletin No. 46, U. S. Geological Survey. On the
Nature and Origin of Deposits of Phosphate of Lime, by Dr. R. A. F.
Penrose, Jr. .

6. Administrative Report of the Atlantic Coast Division of the United
States Geological Survey. Annual Report of Director for 1885-86 (pub-
lished in 1888), pp. 61-65.

7. Effects of Permanent Moisture on certain Forest Trees. Science,
March, 1889, pp. 176, 177.

Owing to absence from Cambridge during the greater part of
the past year, it was impossible for Mr. Davis to carry on the
first course in Physical Geography (Natural History 1), and it
was therefore placed in the hands of Mr. T. W. Harris, Instructor
in Geology. Laboratory exercises and recitations were main-
tained once a week through the year, in addition to the regular
lectures, with an attendance of forty students.

The advanced course in Physical Geography (Natural History
20) was in charge of Mr. Davis, with an attendance of five

14

students, all from the Senior Class. Various special subjects of
study were followed ; theses on those taken by Mr. Ward, ‘* The
Sea-breeze,” and by Mr. Curry, ‘“* The Theory of Tornadoes,” will
be shortly published. The students from this class and two from
the advanced class in geological field-work accompanied the in-
structor in an excursion during the April recess across Northern
New Jersey and into Central Pennsylvania, with the object of
examining the traces of ancient base-levels in that region, and
thus learning something of the development of its river valleys.
The results of this study are now published in the National
Geographic Magazine.

Mr. Davis’s other work of instruction in the year was in
two geological courses, on which Professor Shaler has reported.
During the summer, two weeks were spent at Madison, Wis-
consin, taking part in the summer school for teachers opened
there by the State University ; fourteen lectures on Physical
Geography were here given to a class of about fifty members.
Later in the vacation, the Harvard Summer School of Geol-
ogy was in his charge at Catskill, New York, and at Meriden,
Connecticut.

The materials for use in the Geographical Laboratory have
been increased during the year by the purchase of a set of relief
maps, copies of those designed and in part made by Mr. Davis
two years ago for the Teachers’ School of Science of the Boston
Society of Natural History. These have been found of much
value in class instruction. There have also been purchased an
excellent terrestrial globe; a set of the monthly volumes of tri-
daily weather maps issued by the Signal Service, these being
particularly for the use of students in the elementary course ;
Haardt’s and other maps of the Alps; Kiepert’s physical maps
of the various countries of Europe; and several climatological
maps. The Laboratory has also received as a gift from the Penn-
sylvania Railroad Company a valuable set of large photographs
illustrating the scenery along its lines.

During the winter, Mr. C. L. Whittle, Assistant, United States
Geological Survey, carried on, under Mr. Davis’s direction, an
investigation of the characteristics of the intrusive and extrusive
trap sheets of the Connecticut Valley, the results of which are
now ready for publication in the Museum Bulletin. Mr. Davis’s
publications during the year were as follows: —

2 amp
7 bs |

a a. =
Za

ee

15

Physical Geography and Climate of New England. Two chapters in
Scudder’s Butterflies of New England. 1888.

The Structure of the Triassic Formation of the Connecticut Valley.
Seventh Annual Report, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1888, pp. 445-490.

The Faults in the Triassic Formation near Meriden, Connecticut. A
Week’s Work in the Harvard Summer School of Geology. Bulletin of the
Museum, Vol. XVI. (Geol. Series, Vol. II.), pp. 61-87. With Five Plates.

The Ash-Bed at Meriden and its Structural Relations. Proc. Meriden
(Conn.) Scientific Assoc., 1889.

Topographic Development of the Triassic Formation of the Connecticut
Valley. Amer. Journ. Science, Vol. XXXVII., 1889, pp. 423-434.

Geographic Methods in Geologic Investigation. Nat. Geogr. Mag.,
Vol. I., 1888, pp. 11-26.

The Rivers and Valleys of Pennsylvania. Nat. Geogr. Mag., Vol: I.,
1889.

Methods and Models in Geographic Teaching. Abstract of Lecture
delivered before the University Scientific Association of Johns Hopkins
University. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circular, No. 72, p. 62.

Synclinal Mountains and Anticlinal Valleys. Science, Vol. XII., 1888,
p- 320.

A River Pirate. Science, Vol. XIII., 1889, pp. 100-109.

Some American Contributions to Meteorology. A Lecture delivered
before the Franklin Institute of Philadelphia. Journ. Franklin Inst., Vol.
CXXVII., 1889.

Six students worked in Petrography during the year, and
occasional assistance was given to others. The equipment was
increased by the purchase of two new petrographical micro-
scopes, and of a lathe for sawing thin slices of rock by the
diamond saw.

Mr. Wolff completed and prepared for publication his Report
on the Geology of Hoosae Mountain and adjacent Territory,
dealing with the geology and petrography of a portion of the
Green Mountains. During the past summer, in connection with
the United States Geological Survey, he has spent two months in
an exploration of the Crazy Mountains, Montana, investigating
the field relations of the nepheline rocks discovered there by him
in 1883, to which, as types of a new family of rocks, Professor
Rosenbusch gave the name of Theralite. The results have been
very satisfactory, proving that these are true plutonic rocks,
occurring in large laccolites. This and other interesting petro-
graphical discoveries will be announced later in detail.

16

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN BIOLOGY.
By Proressors Farrow AnD Mark, anD Mr. G. H. PARKER.

THE instruction in Zoélogy during the Academic year 1888-89
covered substantially the same ground as in the preceding year.
The Nat. Hist. Courses 2, 18, and 9 were conducted by Dr.
Mark: Nat. Hist. 6, and the zodlogical half of Nat. Hist. 5, by
Mr. G. H. Parker.

In Nat. Hist. 2, there were fifty-eight students: one Graduate,
five Seniors, twelve Juniors, sixteen Sophomores, fifteen Fresh-
men, four Specials, and five Scientific Students. In the
laboratory work the instructor had the assistance of Mr. C. B.
Davenport.

Nat. Hist. 13 was elected by nine students: three Graduates
and six Undergraduates. The lectures were on methods of work
in microscopic anatomy and embryology, and on the anatomy and
histology of Hydra, Tzenia, and Lumbricus, — the animals studied
in the laboratory work of the course.

Nat. Hist. 9 was pursued by four Graduates and by Mr. Parker,
the Instructor in Zoélogy. Mr. Parker’s studies, which were con-
tinued from the preceding year, are completed, and his paper,
‘*The Histology and Development of the Eyes in the Lobster,”
is ready for publication. A paper by Mr. C. H. Eigenmann, “ On
the Egg Membranes and Micropyle of some Osseous Fishes,”
which was begun in the autumn of 1887, was completed early in
the year, and will soon be issued in the Museum Bulletin. One

‘of the students was interrupted in his studies by a serious sick-
ness of several months; the others will be able to present the
results of their work during the current year.

Dr. Mark has published in the Twentieth Annual Report of the
Massachusetts State Board of Health an article on * Trichine
in Swine,” and has finished the first part of his studies on the
Embryology of Lepidosteus, the plates accompanying which are

LT

nearly completed. The paper will be issued in the Museum
Bulletin.

The Zodlogical Club has continued to hold regular meetings
during the year, with profit to its members.

Natural History 6, a course on the Comparative Anatomy of
Vertebrates, by Mr. G. H. Parker, was taken by four Seniors,
four Juniors, and five Special Students.

The class in Elementary Biology, Nat. Hist. 5, was conducted
by Dr. Farlow and Mr. G. H. Parker, assisted by Mr. W. A.
Setchell, on the plan pursued in previous years. The course was
attended by thirty-two students. It was voted by the Faculty,
that, after the year 1889-90, all students intending to take
this course should be required to have studied previously Nat.

ELIst.-; 2.

The courses Nat. Hist. 23 and Nat. Hist. 12, awaiting the com-
pletion of the laboratories specially intended for their use, were
held in the room of the Cryptogamic Herbarium and one of the
Museum work-rooms. The former was attended by four stu-
dents, the latter by five students. Of the students in Nat. Hist.
12, Mr. Kingo Miyabe received the degree of Doctor of Science
in June, presenting as his graduating thesis a paper on the Flora
of the Kurile Islands, which will appear shortly in the Memoirs
of the Boston Natural History Society. He also published in the
Annals of Botany a paper on the “ Life History of Macrosporium
parasiticum,” embodying work done in Nat. Hist. 12. A paper
by Mr. H. M. Richards on “ The Uredo-stage of Gymnosporan-
gium” appeared in the Botanical Gazette of September. Two
algological papers were written by Mr. Richards and Mr. J. P.
Morgan, but have not yet gone to press. Other students in Nat.
Hist. 12 have been engaged in the continuance of work on their
graduating theses, which they intend to offer as candidates for
the degree of Doctor of Philosophy during the coming year.

18

REPORT ON THE OSTEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By D. D. Sane.

INSTRUCTION in Comparative Osteology, Natural History 21,
has been given during the past year by lectures, laboratory work,
and examinations. The course has been followed by three Ju-
niors and two Seniors. All the students were much interested in
their work, as was shown by their faithful attendance, and by
the final examination. Four of the above intend to pursue the
medical profession.

Since the last report, the collection has received from Profes-
sor Ward an articulated skeleton of Balena cisarctica, which
has been hung in the Central Exhibition Room, and also an ar-
ticulated skeleton, which has been cleaned, and also hung in the
same room, of Monodon monoceros. Several skeletons, mostly
of Cetacea, which have been suspended for many months in the
hall without labels, have been properly designated.

An alcoholic specimen of one of the Marmosets, to be prepared
as a skeleton, has been presented by one of the students who
attended the course. The entire collection is in excellent pres-
ervation. The opportunities so generously offered for study and
research in osteology are daily becoming better appreciated, as
evinced by the increased number of those who have applied for
the ensuing Academic year.

During the past year, the Assistant in this department has
published a paper in Science, Vol. XIII., No. 333, entitled
** Osteological Notes.”

19

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

By WILL1AM BREWSTER.

Tue only important addition to the collection of Mounted
Mammals is a Sea Elephant, Macrorhinus leoninus, —a remark-
ably large, fine male from the Cape of Good Hope.

Of birds the Museum has received the following. By gift
from the British Museum, four hundred and fifty-nine skins, of
which fifteen are from New Guinea, a few from India (from the
Hume Collection), the remainder from South America. By gift
from Allen Weeks a Paradise Trogon (Pharomacrus paradiseus).
By exchange from the American Museum of New York,
twenty-four skins of South American birds, including fourteen
species not hitherto represented in the Cambridge Museum’s
collection.

In addition to these, about forty mounted specimens of wading
or swimming birds have been bought for the collection in the
Atlantic Room, which has been lately opened to the public.
The cases in this room devoted to marine mammals are now
about filled, but there is space for further additions to the collec-
tion of shore and sea birds.

During the past year series of bird skins were sent for ex-
amination and study to Mr. Robert Ridgway, of the Smith-
sonian Institution, and to Mr. J. A. Allen, of the American
Museum of New York. All of these skins have been sately
returned.

In the last report mention was made of the satisfactory re-
arrangement of the Alcoholic Collection of Mammals at the
hands of Mr. Garman. There is pressing need of equally thor-
ough and systematic treatment of the Alcoholic Collection of
Birds, which, at present, is in some confusion.

The Assistant has published the following papers and notes in
*“ The Auk” :—

20

“ Breeding of the Golden-crested Kinglet (Regulus satrapa) in Worces-
ter County, Massachusetts, with a Description of its Nest and Eggs.”

“Notes on the Birds of Winchendon, Worcester County, Massa-
chusetts.”

“‘ Notes on the Birds of Fort Klamath, Oregon. By Dr. J. C. Merrill,
U. S. A. With Remarks on certain Species, by William Brewster.”

“ A Second Maine (and Fourth New England) Specimen of Swainson’s
Hawk (Buteo swainsont).”

“ Cistothorus palustris marianne on the Coast of Georgia.”

“The present Status of Forster’s Tern, as a Bird of New England.”

“Occurrence of the Western Sandpiper (Hreunetes occidentalis) in
Numbers on the Coast of Massachusetts.”

“ Krider’s Hawk (Buteo borealis kriderit) on the Coast of Georgia.”

“Second Occurrence of the Prairie Horned Lark in Eastern Massa-
chusetts.” ,

“Descriptions of supposed New Birds from Western North America
and, Mexico.”

“ Dendroica coronata feeding upon Oranges.”

In “ Forest and Stream ” : —

Two Letters without formal titles relating to habits of the American
Woodcock,

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.
By SamvueEL GARMAN.

As has been the case in previous years, some time and labor
has been given to the alcoholic collections in other departments.
The identifications and the changes of alcohol, specimens, and
labels have been continued, as also the process of disposing of
the duplicates. In the storage rooms the bulk of the material
has been further reduced by the withdrawal of some thirty large
sharks, skates, and reptiles. The largest series of duplicates
sent to correspondents were those sent to the Smithsonian Insti-
tution and to Professor Jordan; others were shipped to Professor
C. 8S. Dolley, of the University of Pennsylvania, and to the IIli-
nois State Laboratory of Natural History, and smaller lots were
furnished Doctors M. Guitel, E. L. Mark, George Baur, and
R. W. Shufeldt. For the students’ use, at various times speci-
mens were given out to Dr. Slade and Mr. Parker. Eleven
comprehensive lots, special selections, have been prepared and
are now ready to forward to their destinations. The space
allotted to the Fishes and Reptiles in the faunal exhibit of the
Atlantic has been filled.

By purchase an excellent lot of Reptiles and Batrachians,
mainly African and East Indian, was obtained from the Linnaea
Naturhistorisches Institut. :

A fine Series of Mediterranean Fishes was received from the
Milan Museum, and this was followed by another, made up of
Selachians, gathered by Professor Bellotti in answer to our re-
quest. Professor Dolley supplied a number of desiderata from the
Bahamas ; these, with a large number of fresh-water fishes from
the U. S. Commissioner of Fisheries, and a number of Reptiles
from Mr. N. L. Wilson, complete the list of exchanges.

We have received gifts of specimens from the following
persons: Mrs. C. N. Willard, Miss Ruth Hoppin, Miss Mary

22

Woodman, Professors Alex. Agassiz, C. J. Maynard, H. Gar-
man, W. M. Brackett, J. W. Fewkes, and F. W. Putnam, and
Messieurs L. C. Jones, Geo. B. Appleton, E. A. Samuels,
W. S. Wadsworth, W. W. Woodworth, N. Vickary, and P. R.
Waughop. We have been greatly favored by the kindness of
Hon. E. A. Brackett of the Massachusetts Fishery Commission.

The publications by the writer, directly based on the Museum
Collections, include the following :

In the Museum Bulletin : —

“On the Lateral Canal System of the Selachia and Holocephala.”

In the Bulletin of the Essex Institute : —

“The Batrachia of Kalm’s Hn Resa til Norra America.”

In the Proceedings of the Boston Natural History Society : —

“ A large Carp and its History.”
“On the Evolution of the Rattlesnake.”

And, besides the foregoing, in different publications, various
articles and reviews, unsigned, connected with the work of these
departments but indirectly.

=

23

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By Dr. H. A. Hacen.

Mr. HERBERT SMITH has sent his large collection of Centro-
Brazilian species of Pseudoneuroptera and Neuroptera to the
Museum for determination, with the privilege of retaining new
species for the Museum.

Mr. F. D. Godman, of London, has also sent in the Odonata
of Central America for description for his Biologia Centrali
Americana, and has most kindly given permission to retain for
the Museum a full set of the duplicates. This collection con-
tains 3,248 specimens. There is little doubt that the Museum
collection of American Odonata has from these gifts become the
largest in existence.

As usual, Dr. H. G. Horn, of Philadelphia, Mr. S. Henshaw,
of Cambridge, Mr. J. G. Jack, of the Arboretum, Mr. P. H.
Dudley, of New York, and Mr. C. Cabot, of Brookline, have
presented some new and very excellent species, chiefly for the
biological collection.

Dr. John L. Le Conte’s collection is in good order, ana
will be put in new cabinets, presented to the Museum by Mrs.
Le Conte.

The numerous additions to the Biological Collection have
already been distributed so far as space would allow in our pres-
ent cases. Several new cabinets will soon enable us to complete
this work. Some parts of this collection have been rearranged ;
others are entirely new, and usually not represented in Museums,
as the Pulicide, the Thysanura, the Ixodide, Acarina, Malla-
phoga, and the Phytoptus galls.

The collection of Cave animals is of very recent date: the
Blind Fish and the Blind Crawfish, and the Cave Grasshoppers
collected in 1859 by Professor A. Hyatt, are the only ones repre-
sented. On the Survey of Professor N. 8. Shaler, a number were

24

collected by Messrs. F. G. Sanborn, A. 8S. Packard, F. W. Put-
nam, and H. G. Hubbard. The Cave Beetles of Europe were
furnished by European friends. I have just finished a very de-
tailed catalogue of this collection, twenty-five pages in length.
In my opinion it is unrivalled here or abroad.

In the Memoirs of the Museum, the third part of Mr. Louis
Cabot’s description of the earlier stages of the Odonata is in
print, containing the Cordulina and the genera Pantala and
Tramea. A large number of drawings for the fourth part, the
Libellulina, are also finished.

The Assistant has published the following papers during the
past academic year: —

Myrmelonide (end). Canadian Entomologist, 1888, Vol. XX. pp.
185-191, pp. 205-211.

The Life of Dr. Christian Zimmermann. Canadian Entomologist, 1889,
Vol. XXI. pp. 53-57, pp. 71-73.

Die Spaltung einer Fliigels am das doppelte Adernetz zu zeigen.
Zoologischer Anzeiger, 1889, Vol. XII. pp. 377, 878. Mit einer photo-
graphischen Tafel.

The Female of Eutermes Rippertii. Anatomy. Psyche, 1889, Vol. X.
pp. 203-208.

Do Animals Count? Nature, Vol. XL. p. 319.

Ueber die friiheren Zustiinde der Libellen, nebst Andeutung iiber die
Bildung der Thorax. Stettiner Entomologische Zeitung, 1889, Vol. L.
pp. 1-4.

24

REPORT ON THE INVERTEBRATES.

By J. WALTER FEWKEsS.

My time in Cambridge last year was occupied in work on the
Atlantic Room, which, much to my regret, I was unable to finish.

A part of July and August was spent at Grand Menan, where
I was engaged in a study of the development of Pteraster and
certain other Echinoderms.

I wish to be permitted in this, my last Report, to express my
gratitude for the opportunities for research which have been
afforded me during the eight years in which I have been officially
connected with the Museum.

The following papers have been printed for me during the past
year : —

1. On the Serial Relationships of Ambulacral and Adambulacral Cal-
careous Plates of the Starfishes. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol. XXIV.
pp. 96-117.

2. On a Method of Defence among certain Meduse. Ibid., pp. 200-
208.

3. Natural History Illustrations. Prepared under the Direction of
Louis Agassiz, 1849. The Anatomy of Astrangia Dane. Six Litho-
graphs from Drawings by A. Sonrel. Explanation of the Plates. Smith-
sonian Institution.

4, A Preliminary Notice of a Stalked Bryozoén (Ascorhiza occidentalis).
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. III. No. 13, pp. 1-6.

5. On a New Athorybia. Ibid., Vol. III. No. 15, pp. 207-210.

_ 6. On Angelopsis and its Relationship to certain Siphonophora taken
by the “ Challenger.” Ibid., Vol. IV. pp. 146-155.

7. A Corner of Brittany. American Naturalist, Vol. XXIII. No. 226,
pp. 95-109.

8. Across the Santa Barbara Channel. Ibid., Nos. 268, 269.

9. Report on the Medusz collected by the United States Fish Com-
mission Steamer “ Albatross” in the Region of the Gulf Stream in 1885—
86. Ann. Report of Com. Fish and Fisheries for 1886, pp. 512-536.

I have also edited the first part of Vol. XXIV. of the Pro-
ceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History.

REPORT ON PALAONTOLOGY.
By AwpHevs Hyatt.

DuRING the early part of the present official year the work of
this department was mainly directed to the identification and
completion of the arrangement of the Trilobites, which was car-
ried far enough to include most of the larger Silurian genera.
During the latter part of the year the time was devoted to the
selection of specimens for exhibition in the Stratigraphical Col-
lection. This last undertaking has proved more difficult than
had been anticipated. All the material belonging to the Museum
has to be brought together in most groups, and considerable pre-
liminary work done in sorting out specimens and identifying the
species to which they belong, before the most suitable forms can
be made available. Then this material has to be studied more
or less in culling out the species characteristic or sufficiently
characteristic of the different faunas in the past history of the
globe to be used in a stratigraphical collection. Considerable
advances have, however, been made in this direction, so far as
the Mollusca and Trilobites are concerned. The work of clean-
ing and placing the specimens of the old collection of Echino-
derms in safe condition has been continued. Similar work has
been done for the fossils used by the Assistant in writing his

Genera of Fossil Cephalopods,” which had never been fully

labelled.

Work on the Gebhard Collection has been continued, and the
preliminary labelling of this valuable local collection has been
completed.

The department is indebted to Dr. Robert T. Jackson for
voluntary labor upon the Gebhard and Hall Collections. This
gentleman has also spent considerable time in the study and ar-
rangement of the Lamellibranchs of the Paleozoic and Mesozoic,

i
q
i
)
i
i
)

—EE—

Se

———EEs

na

27

and has picked out a series of the more remarkable forms of this
_ group for exhibition in the Stratigraphical Collection.
Some work has been done upon the Anticosti Collection in
picking over and culling out the loose material.
A small number of remarkable forms of Nautiloids and Am-
monoids have been prepared for mounting for exhibition in the
Systematic Collection.
The following papers have been published, or are ready for
publication : —

Genesis of the Arietide, by Alpheus Hyatt. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
and Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, No. 673, pp. 238, and
Fourteen Plates. (In press.)

Japanese Iris from Seed, by R. T. Jackson. Garden and Forest, Vol. I.
Hybridization of Gladioli, by R. T. Jackson. Garden and Forest,
Vol. I. No. 52, with Three Figures.

Phylogeny of the Pelecypoda, by R. T. Jackson. Now in press.

28

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY

By Miss F. M. Stack.

DourinG the year ending September 1, 1889, the Library has
received 516 volumes, 1,747 parts, and 111 pamphlets : —

VOLUMES PARTS. PAMPHLETS,
Gilt wick kes: 5 3 de. Fe OS 49 24
Hizcha@ngee cu oho ek. s,s) ad LD 741 62
IPurchasey ssn ler vcs. s \s) Se OO 250 7
AAC REBIZ a wii ve 6 Sos: , Ga CO) 707 18
Bindings Partaies so te. is. )<). +8 «| eee eC eo
516 1747 111

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the Whitney Library) is 18,419. There are
12,527 pamphlets bound in 1,749 volumes, making the total
number of yolumes 20,168.

29

[A.]

PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1888-89.

Of the Bulletin.
Vols. XVI. [Geological Series, Vol. II.].
No. 2. On the Geology of the Camprian District of Bristol County, Massa-
chusetts. By N.S. SHarer. pp. 30. Map and 2 Plates. October, 1888.
No. 3. Fossiz Puants collected at Golden, Colorado. By Leo LresQuEREux.
pp. 18. December, 1888.
No. 4. The Fauvtuts in the Triassic Formation near Meriden, Connecticut.
By W. M. Davis. pp. 28. 5 Plates. April, 1889.
No. 5. On the Occurrence of Fossits of the Creracrous AGEs on the Island of
Martha’s Vineyard, Mass. By N.S.Suarer. pp.10. 2 Plates. June, 1889.
(Vol. X VL. to be continued.)
Vol. XVII.
No. 2. On the Larerat Cana System of the Sevacnuta and HoLocrePHALa.
‘By S. Garman. pp. 64. 53 Plates. September, 1888. :
No. 8. The Corat Reers of the Hawaiian Islands. By A. AGassiz. pp. 50.
13 Plates. April, 1889.
No. 4. Studies on the Primitive Axial SrGmentation of the Cuick. By
Juuia B. Puarr. pp. 20. 2 Plates. July, 1889.
(Vol. XVII. to be continued.)
Vol. XVIII. ;
Reports on the Results of Dredging by the United States Coast Survey Steamer
“Blake.” —XXIX. Report on the Mottusca. Part II. Gasrropopa and
ScarpHoropa. By W.H. Datu. pp. (2), 492. 31 Plates. June, 1889.
Of the Memoirs.
Vol. XIV.

No.1. Part Il. 1.—Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. — XVI. The
Development of Ossrous Fisues. Part Il. The Pre-Empryonic STAGES
of Development. Part I. The History of the Eee from Fertilization
to Cleavage. By A. Acassiz and C. O. Wurirman. pp. 40. 12 Plates.
June, 1889.

(Vol. XIV. to be continued.)

30

In preparation : —
Illustrations of North American Marine Invertebrates, from Drawings by Burk-

Also, in

hardt, Sonrel, and A. Agassiz, prepared under the direction of L. Agassiz.
Selections from Embryological Monographs, compiled by A. Agassiz,
W. Faxon, and E. L. Mark (discontinued for the present). Papers, by
E. L. Mark, on the Development of Lepidosteus and of Arachnactis; by
M. E. Wadsworth; by Scott and Osborne, on Fossil Mammals; by C. H.
Eigenman, on the Egg Membranes of some Osseous Fishes; by Messrs.
Davis and Whittle, on the Triassic Traps of the Connecticut Valley ; by
S. Garman, on the Cave Fauna of Southwestern Missouri; by W. G.
Binney, on California Land Shells; by N.S. Shaler, on the Boulder Train
of Rhode Island; by H. Ayers, on Chlamydoselachus; and by G. H.
Parker, on the Eyes of the Lobster.

conjunction with the Smithsonian Institution, a Memoir on the Genesis
of the Arietide, by Alpheus Hyatt.

A Memoir on Calamocrinus, by Alexander Agassiz; a Memoir on the Early Stages

Reports

of the Odonata, by Louis Cabot; and the continuation of a Memoir on the
Development of Osseous Fishes, by Agassiz and Whitman.

on the Dredging Operations for 1877, 1878, 1879, and 1880, in charge of
Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Coast Survey Steamer “Blake.” H. B.
Brady (Foraminifera), P. H. Carpenter (Comatule), G. B. Goode and T.
H. Bean (East Coast Fishes, and Fishes of the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea), A. E. Verrill and W. H. Dall (East Coast Mollusks), A.
A. Hubrecht (Nemerteans), A. Milne-Edwards (Crustacea), A. E. Verrill
(Alcyonaria), and Dr. R. Bergh (Nudibranchs).

31

[B.]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HArRvarpD CoLLecs, Sept. 1, 1888.

CERMEEEEIRIECESENIN CR p a oy a) es a oa i Cae Teer ag oe) op 6 os SLOO,000:00
on Eid oe 2. ehh SUS RM ae Sa ea 50,000.00
Pease PemMOLaleHUNG mes) s - eeeme ye | 290,900.10
ewehersranareupius Hund i. <2 5 Mattie ee ees ae 7,594.01
PRET eer ere tas) a) ef ey aera ca ete) Ue: ee) SDT AGO:
elyresabrpy cpr TIC artes cy is) eG.) ey wy ee ee on et bie) a Ss 7,740.66

$580,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of
which is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in
an analysis of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is
applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund can be applied for the benefit of one or more
students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport Marine Laboratory,
the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl, or elsewhere.
Applications for the two Tables reserved for advanced students at the Newport
Marine Laboratory, and for the Table at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made
to the Curator of the Museum before the lst of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

“UUOD ‘UBARH Mah ‘YOR ¥ UOSIapUuN gd “~S-7 kq YH] O}OUd

“iW ALW1d

“UUOD ‘UBARH MAN “OS % UOSIaPU gS °q Aq -YzI7 “OPOUY
as LZ i ma

a

* 1

=== ae

W TN Tin Moa —
Ce hc a 4

WW 3LW1d

—o an
ER
‘ah

oe Tt SS
5
see"
i)

ey

|] Ss
|
n

Am

nie ied a

Se Se
iz

| | a

> ah
mela oe

=
|

—_

=
— os oe

|

z

rae i}

eee.

5

FN ee ee = ws i Vans = ow je
ay pe, “a Phen a ms ee i oe fe ee Zs

Ta os

Canes

PON SN CPA L, Sion O RT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,

TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

1889-90.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1890.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .
HERMANN A. HAGEN .

NATHANIEL S. SHALER .

E. L. MARK
W. M. DAVIS.
J. ELIOT WOLFF .

THADDEUS W. HARRIS .

G. HOWARD PARKER .
WALTER FAXON .

D. D. SLADE.
SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER .
ALPHEUS HYATT

W. M. WOODWORTH
W. E. RITTER

R. S. TARR

R. DeC. Ware .

MISS F. M. SLACK

GEORGE L. GOODALE.
HENRY P. BOWDITCH.

OFFICERS.

Curator.

Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Entomology.

Professor of Paleontology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.

Assistant Professor of Geography.
Instructor in Petrography.
Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Zoélogy.

Assistant in Zodlogy.

Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
Assistant in Paleontology.

Assistant in the Zodlogical Laboratory.
Assistant in the Zodlogical Laboratory.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratory.
Assistant in the Geographical Laboratory.
Librarian.

RE POE.

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE : —

DuRInG the past year the usual courses of instruction have
been given at the Museum in Zodlogy by Professor Mark and
Mr. Parker, assisted by Mr. C. B. Davenport in the Laboratory
work. Dr. Slade has given a course in Osteology.

Professor Farlow, assisted by Mr. W. A. Setchell, has given
the botanical part of the introductory course of Natural His-
tory. Professors Whitney, Shaler, and Davis, and Dr. J. E.
Wolff gave the usual courses in Geology, Paleontology, Physical
Geography, and Petrography. Messrs. Harris and Cobb were the
Assistants in the Undergraduate instruction of the Geological
Department.

For the details of these courses of instruction, as well as of the
summer courses in Geology, I would refer to the accompanying
special reports of the Professors and Instructors.

The Assistants of the Museum, Professors Hagen and Faxon,
Dr. Slade, Messrs. Garman and Brewster, and Professor Hyatt,
have devoted a good share of their time in supplying specialists
with material and information in their various departments.

The Geological Section of the Museum, containing the Exhi-
bition Rooms and additional Laboratories of that department, is
now ready for occupancy. On the first floor, it contains a large
lecture-room, with a seating capacity of 320 students. On the
second floor are placed the Petrographical Laboratories, — one
for general use, the other for advanced students. In the base-
ment are found a Chemical Laboratory, a room for grinding
rocks, and a photographic room. The fourth floor is occupied

4

by the two Laboratories of the Physical Geography Depart-
ment, with a room for modelling in the basement. On the third
floor, the two Exhibition Rooms assigned to the Geological and
Geographical Collections connect the Exhibition Rooms of the
Museum of Comparative Zodlogy with these of the Botanical
and Mineralogical Departments. These, in their turn, will
eventually open into the Exhibition Rooms of the southwest
corner piece adjoining those of the Peabody Museum.

I have annexed to this Report a view of the University
Museum, as seen facing the northwest corner, including the
newly erected Mineralogical Sections.

Messrs. W. M. Woodworth, W. Whitney, and G. H. Parker
availed themselves of the facilities offered by the United States
Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl, for which the Museum
is specially indebted to Colonel McDonald, U. 8. Fish Com-
missioner. These gentlemen, as well as Messrs. C. B. Daven-
port, W. E. Ritter, and Professor Mark, spent some time at
the Newport Marine Laboratory, either collecting material for
future investigation, or carrying on special work in the embry-
ology of Bryozoa, Annelids, Crustacea, Echinoderms, and Polyps.
Mr. Woodworth spent a few days at the opening of the season
in putting the Newport Laboratory in order for the reception
of students.

The Museum has been fortunate enough to secure a fine
skeleton of a Sperm Whale, about fifty feet in length. It was
obtained through the kindness of Consul Dabney of Fayal, and
is now in the hands of Professor Ward for mounting.

We have continued to make a few purchases, mainly to fill
gaps in our Exhibition Rooms. Skins of some of the larger
Selachians and Fishes have been mounted by Ward for the
Atlantie and Pacific Exhibition Rooms. A fine Sea Elephant
has been placed in the Atlantic Room. Otherwise, few changes
have taken place in the Exhibition Rooms. The collections |
open to the public remain in a satisfactory condition, in spite of
the constantly increasing number of visitors, and the crowded
condition of the rooms on holidays and Sundays. |

The Museum is again indebted to Messrs. Brewster and Cabot,
Professor Faxon, and Dr. Slade, for the interest they have taken
in their respective departments, and for the care they have given
to the collections in their charge.

5

Material has been sent for study to Dr. Paul Meyer of Naples,
to Professor Goette of Strasburg, to Baron Selys-Longchamps, and
to Dr. Richard Semon. The Marquis of Doria has kindly under-
taken a revision of our collection of Bats. Exchanges have been
made with the Museum of the Academy of Sciences of St. Pe-
tersburg, through Prof. A. Strauch; the Museo Civico of Milan,
through M. Belloti; the Jardin des Plantes, through Prof.
L. Vaillant; the K. K. Hofnaturalien Cabinet (Dr. F. Stein-
dachner) ; the British Museum (Dr. A. Giinther) ; the Univer-
sity Museum of Christiana (Professor Collet); the University
Museum of Berlin (Professor Mobius) ; Professor Ehlers of Got-
tingen; Professor Liitken of the University Museum of Copen-
hagen; Dr. E. Ramsay of the Australian Museum of New South
Wales at Sidney; C. W. De Vis of the Queensland Museum at
Brisbane ; and with the National Museum at Washington. A few
minor exchanges are also mentioned in the special reports of the
Museum Assistants.

Of the Blake Collections, those in the hands of Professor Ver-
rill have not yet been returned. Professor Perrier and Professor
Milne-Edwards have retained a part of the Blake Collections,
while working up the collections of the “ Talisman.” Dr. P. H.
Carpenter has continued his work on the Report of the ‘‘ Blake ”
Comatulez ; the proofs of several of the plates to accompany his
Report have been received.

Professor Huxley has returned the Spirula dredged by the
“Blake” off Grenada, which was sent him for comparison while
writing his Monograph on the species of Spirule collected by
the ‘“‘ Challenger.”

Messrs. Scott and Osborn have returned the larger part of
the second and third instalments of the Western Vertebrates,
sent them for study. This material has greatly increased in
value, not only from the work they have done upon it in the way
of cleaning and repairing the specimens, but also from the care-
ful study they have bestowed upon the part of the collections
of Western fossils which have been placed in their hands. They
have sent the manuscript and drawings for a second Bulletin
on the Fossil Mammals from the White River and Loup Fork
Formations, which is now in press.

A number of exceptionally fine or interesting Crinoids have
been sent to Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer for study, to assist

6

them in the preparation of their magnificent Monograph of the
Paleozoic Crinoids. The Curator of the Museum has always felt
special interest in this monograph ; it owes its origin to the work
of Mr. Wachsmuth, based upon his original collection now in
the Museum. On the death of Professor Agassiz, when Mr.
Wachsmuth left Cambridge, he started a new collection, and,
with the assistance of his devoted and indefatigable collaborator,
has brought together a second collection, unique in its way,
which has become well known to palzontologists from the *“ Re-
vision of the Paleocrinoids.” It is hoped that some arrangement
may be made by which the publication of this monograph, so
much of which is based upon the work of Mr. Wachsmuth on
the collection now in Cambridge, may eventually appear in the
Memoirs of the Museum.

It will be seen from the special Reports of the Assistants, that
the collections of the Museum continue in good condition, and
that the Assistants not only have been active in the increase and
care of the collections in their charge, but have been able to
devote considerable time to original work, as shown by the lists
of the publications of each Department accompanying the special
Reports.

Appendix A of this Report contains a list of the publications
of the Museum issued during the past academic year.

We have published twelve numbers of the Bulletin, four in
the Geological, and eight in the Zodlogical Series. One number
of the Memoirs, ‘‘ The Genesis of the Arietidz,’’ by Professor
Hyatt, has been published jointly with the Smithsonian Insti-
tution. This important memoir has been in preparation by
Professor Hyatt for a number of years, and is an important con-
tribution to the paleontological history of the Cephalopods.

A number of Bulletins are in preparation, representing the
work of the students of the Zodlogical Laboratory in charge of
Professor Mark.

Mr. Louis Cabot is preparing the final part of his Memoir on
the Immature State of the Odonata.

Mr. Garman is preparing for the press a monograph on the
Liparide, commenced several years ago by Professor Putnam.
He has also nearly completed an account of the North American
Reptiles. The second part of the Memoir on the Development
of Osseous Fishes, by Professor Whitman and myself, is nearly

i

completed, and I have made good progress in the preparation of
my Monograph on Calamocrinus, of which twenty plates have
been completed.

The accessions to the Library show a decided increase in num-
ber even over the past year, which had shown the greatest
accessions thus far received.

Special efforts having been made to interest the Visiting Com-
mittees of the Overseers in the affairs of the different depart-
ments of the University, I herewith add the Report which was
prepared for the Committee on the University Museum.

** When Professor Goodale succeeded in obtaining the neces-
sary funds for an extension of the University Museum in order
to accommodate the Botanical Department, it became necessary
that the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy should obtain means
for building a section to connect the Natural History Labora-
tories with the Botanical Section.

‘“* All attempts to obtain this from outside sources having failed,
the Curator applied to the Corporation to advance the funds
needed for the building and its equipment, so as to make it
available for the Petrographical, Geographical, and Geological
Departments. This the Corporation has done, and, as on former
occasions, these advances, amounting to about $25,000, will have
to be repaid from the income of the Museum. This will natu-
rally cripple our resources for six or seven years, unless the sum
ean be provided for the Museum by the friends of the Geological
Department. The Geological Section, now finished, completes
the plan of the Laboratories for the Zodlogical, Geological, and
Geographical Departments, and we are now well provided with
Laboratories, though their equipment still leaves a good deal to
be desired, as also in the way of models for the Geographical and
Geological Departments, and in the fitting up of the Vivarium
and Aquarium for the Zodlogical Department. For these objects
an additional $8,000 is required. Ample room is now provided
for the exhibition of everything that is likely to interest the
public, and this space need never be enlarged, while the efficiency
of the exhibit can always be improved by culling out poor speci-
mens and replacing them by better or more interesting types.
Of course the University may, in the course of time, outgrow the
Laboratories, but there is ample room for their expansion in the
corner piece which is eventually to connect the main building of

8

the University Museum with the Peabody Museum, forming the
South Wing of the structure.

“ There is, however, one point in the organization of the Museum
to which I should like to call attention. Nearly two thirds of
the North Wing, the part of our structure called the Museum of
Comparative Zodlogy, is devoted to the storage of our collec-
tions intended for study and not for exhibition. I can safely say
that there is no Museum in which the system of storage of both
dry and alcoholic specimens is so convenient for access as that
of the Museum collection. Special rooms are devoted to special
subjects, and they are so arranged that a number of specialists
could work at the same time on any part of the collections with-
out inconvenience. For the alcoholic collections two rooms,
30 by 40 feet, are reserved in the basement for such use. In the
rooms containing the dry collection (both recent and fossil) the
space adjoining the windows has been equipped with tables, so
that a large space is everywhere left, ample for the needs of
specialists interested in any part of our collection. This space
is an equivalent of 8 by 40 feet in each of the nineteen rooms in
which the collections are stored. It is this part of the Museum
which I should like to make more available to students and
specialists. But without a larger staff to oversee the rooms while
they may be occupied, it is impossible to grant the unrestricted
use of our collections to those who might avail themselves of the
facilities we are able to give for study.

“The practice of sending collections to specialists for study is
ruinous to the specimens; each invoice involves considerable
work on the part of the Assistants, and the danger of misplacing
labels during the packing and unpacking is very considerable.
So that in the future we shall be obliged, on the ground of safety
for our collections, to refuse to send specimens out of the build-
ing, and invite the specialists to avail themselves of our facilities
on the spot. The staff of the Museum is somewhat crippled at
present, there being no Assistant in charge of the Invertebrates.
As this collection can, however, be otherwise cared for, it has
been decided by the Museum Faculty not to fill this place until
the Museum is out of debt. I would also call attention to the
necessity of having a regular Assistant for the care of our Verte-
brate Fossil Collections. These are already quite extensive, and
the collections we are likely to receive in the future from the

sy)

West must of necessity be very large. But at present the Mu-
seum has no means to pay such an Assistant, nor have we the
means to spend from $5,000 to $6,000 annually for a number
of years in making explorations of Western territories in order
to fill our gaps, both in the fossils of the various well known
Western fossiliferous beds, and in the systematic series of fos-
sils which are found there. The Assistant in charge of the
collection of Skeletons of Mammals receives no remuneration
from the Museum.

“The Museum publications are strictly limited to the work
done in the Museum by the Professors and their Assistants, and
the students of the various Laboratories, or to the work of spe-
cialists based upon the Museum collections.

“The arrangement of our Paleontological Rooms progresses
very slowly, mainly for want of funds for the necessary cases.
It would require about $20,000 to place on exhibition a suitable
selection of our fossils.”

Provision has been made by borrowing the needed funds from
the Corporation for the greater part of the fossils for the Ter-
tiary Rooms, which promise to be our most valuable and in-
structive Exhibition Rooms. The acquisition of a fine series of
Pampas Mammals, obtained through the agency of Professor
Henry A. Ward, including mountable skeletons of Mylodon,
Glyptodon, Lestodon, Scelidotherium, and Toxodon, will neces-
sitate a redistribution of the space assigned to the Tertiary
Faune. In order to provide for the North American Tertiary
Mammals, two rooms at least will be required, which can be
advantageously filled with interesting and instructive specimens
for exhibition, and the Mesozoic and Paleozoic Faun will each
have to be limited to one room.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CAMBRIDGE, October 1, 1890.

10

REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By Jostsan D. Wuitney, Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.

DuRiInG the year a course of lectures on Economical Geology
was given. This course (twice a week, lasting through the Col-
lege year) was attended by about twenty students, mostly
Seniors and candidates for higher degrees.

The time of the Professor in this department, when not engaged
in lecturing or preparing for lectures, has been mostly given to the
continuation of the work on the Century Dictionary, which has now
reached the end of the letter R, and will be completed as originally
planned, and laid before the public, in about eight months.

The collections of rocks made by and under the direction of
the Sturgis-Hooper Professor in former years have been removed
to the new Paleontological Rooms and placed in charge of the
Professor of Petrography. These collections embrace a wide
field, principally representing the western side of North America,
Mexico, and parts of Central America. There is also a fine
representation of the rocks of San Domingo, the same being the
collection made by Mr. W. M. Gabb during his survey of that
region, There is also a large collection of rocks made by Mr.
Diller, while connected with the Assos expedition. All the speci-
mens are of good size and in perfect order. There are also about
three thousand slides belonging to these specimens, made in
former years at the expense of the Sturgis-Hooper Professor, A
portion of these slides are still in possession of Mr. Wadsworth,
formerly Instructor in Petrography in this institution. A report
on the rocks to which these slides belong is still expected from
Mr. Wadsworth, and he has recently promised to have the same
in readiness by the year 1892.

A small amount of field-work has been done by the Stuns
Hooper Professor in continuation of that carried on in previous
years with reference to the surface geology and glacial phenomena
of North America, and the general subject of climatic change.

if

REPORT

ON THE INSTRUCTION IN GEOLOGY, PALZONTOLOGY,
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY, AND PETROGRAPHY.

By Proressors N. §. SHater anp W. M. Davis, anp Dr. J. E. Wo.urr.

Durine the Academic year 1889-90, the following courses
of instruction were given in the Geological and Palzonto-
logical Laboratory, and in the field, by the instructors in the
department.

1. N. H. 4. A course in Elementary Geology, by N.S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with certain required reading; attended by one hundred
and sixty students.

2. N. H.4a. A course of Practical Geological Exercises in the Labo-
ratory and in the field, by Mr. T. W. Hartis, assisted by Mr. Collier
Cobb, designed especially for those who intend in subsequent years to
continue the study of Geology and Palzontology; attended by sixty-six
students.

3. N. H. 8. <A course of Advanced Geology, two lectures a week,
by N. S. Shaler, together with assigned field-work, conducted by W. M.
Davis and J. E. Wolff. Students in this course were required during the
winter to prepare a thesis on an assigned subject. Those only who have
passed a satisfactory examination in the elementary courses are permitted
to attend. Fifty persons received this instruction.

4. N. H. 14. A course on Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with laboratory work and theses. Twelve students took
this course.

5. N. H. 15. A course in Historical Geology, by N. S. Shaler, de-
signed to train students in the determination of geological horizons ;
attended by one student.

6. N. H. 16. A course in field-work, designed to afford special train-
ing in the processes of geological surveying, by N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,

_J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris; attended by seven students.

12

During the winter season the students in advanced classes
attended regular evening meetings designed to serve the purpose
accomplished by the Seminaria of the German Universities.

During the summer of 1890, forty-two students received in-
struction in the field. This instruction was given in three
eraded schools, one of which, the elementary school, was taught
in Cambridge, and the other two in New York, Connecticut,
Massachusetts, New Hampshire, and Maine. Instruction in
these courses was given by N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis, J. E.
Wolff, and T. W. Harris, with the assistance of Prof. H. S. Wil-
liams of Cornell University and Dr. W. B. Clarke of Johns
Hopkins, who collaborated with the other instructors in the
work done in New York and Massachusetts.

During the year, the following books and papers of a scientific
nature have been published by N. S. Shaler: —

1. Aspects of the Earth. The Popular Account of some Familiar Geo-
logical Phenomena. New York, Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1889, pp. xix.
and 344. Sixty-eight Illustrations.

2. The Geology of the Island of Mt. Desert, Me. Eighth Annual
Report of the Director of the United States Geological Survey, pp. 987—
1061. Thirty Illustrations and Two Maps. Washington, D. C., Gov-
ernment Printing Office, 1889.

3. Soils of Massachusetts. A Lecture delivered at the Annual Meeting
of the Massachusetts State Board of Agriculture, February 6, 1890.
Wright and Potter Printing Co., State Printers, Boston, 1890, pp. 16.

4. The Topography of Florida, with a Note by Alexander Agassiz.
Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVI., No. 7,
pp. 189-158. With One Map.

5. Tertiary and Cretaceous Deposits of Eastern Massachusetts. Bul-
letin of the Geological Society of America, Vol. I. pp. 448-452. With
One Plate.

The course in Elementary Physical Geography and Meteo-
rology (Natural History 1) was again in the hands of Professor
Davis. It was attended by seventy students. The increasing
development of laboratory methods in this course make the
employment of an Assistant desirable in the coming year. The
advanced course in the same subjects was attended by one
Graduate and one Senior.

The most important additions to the collections of the Labo-
ratory during the year was a set of colored plaster models,

15

designed by Professor Albert Heim, of Zurich. These represent
a glacier in a lofty Alpine region ; a torrent in a mountain region
of less altitude; a bold coast line, with bars and dunes; and a
volcanic island with a variety of cinder cones and lava flows.
King’s plaster models of Wisconsin have also been secured. A
number of valuable maps have also been purchased, among which
Haardt’s Map of the Alpine System may be mentioned as the
most successful representation of a great mountain range. A
considerable number of smaller maps from various sources have
been mounted on cardboard for use in the class-room.

During the period of the mid-year examinations, Professor
Davis visited Baltimore to deliver a short course of lectures on
Meteorology to the class in Physical Geography at Johns Hop-
kins University. In the April recess, he accompanied a party
of students to the valley of the Upper Passaic, in New Jersey,
to trace out the shore lines of a reputed glacial lake ; the evi-
dence discovered was incomplete, and somewhat contradictory.
An account of the excursion was read to the Harvard Natural
History Society by R. E. Dodge, of the Senior Class.

The following papers have been published during the year by
W. M. Davis : —

Structure and Origin of Glacial Sand Plains. Bull. Geol. Sci. Amer-
ica, Vol. I., 1890, pp. 192-202, Plate ITI.

The Geographic Development of Northern New Jersey, by W. M.
Davis and J. Walter Wood, Jr. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., Vol.
XXIV., 1889, pp. 865-423. ;

The Rivers of Northern New Jersey, with Notes on the Classification
of Rivers in General. Nat. Geogr. Mag., Vol. II., 1890, pp. 81-110.

The Intrusive and Extrusive Triassic Trap Sheets of the Connecticut
Valley, by W. M. Davis and Charles Livy Whittle. Bulletin of the
Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVI. (Geol. Series, Vol. IL),
1889, pp. 99-138. With Five Plates.

Ferrel’s Convectional Theory of Tornadoes, by W. M. Davis and
Charles Emerson Curry. Amer. Met. Journ., Vol. VI., 1889-90,
pp. 337-349, 418-431, 448-463.

Dr. Hann’s Studies on Cyclones and Anti-Cyclones. Science, May 30,
1890.

An Outline of Meteorology. Abstract of Six Lectures delivered to the
Classin Physical Geography at the Johns Hopkins University in January,
1890. Johns Hopkins University Circular, May, 1890.

Secular Changes in Climate. A Paper read at the Eighteenth Meeting

14

of the New England Meteorological Society at Providence, R. 1, April
15, 1890. Amer. Met. Journ., Vol. VII., 1890, pp. 67-78.

Types of New England Weather, in Investigations of the New England
Meteorological Society, reprinted from the Annals of the Astron. Obser-
vatory of Harvard College, Vol. X XI., Part IL., pp. 116-137.

An Investigation of the Sea-Breeze, by W. M. Davis, L. G. Schultz,
and R. DeC. Ward, Ibid., pp. 215-263. With Eight Plates.

Reviews of Ferrel’s Popular Treatise on the Winds. Nation; Science.
February 28, 1890,

Review of Blanford’s Climates and Weather of India. Nation; Science.

Review of Wright’s Ice Age in North America. Nation.

In Petrography instruction was given by Dr. Wolff during the
year to three advanced students engaged in special investiga-
tion. This comprised the ** Novaculite of Arkansas,” the “ Crys-
talline Rocks of the Narragansett Basin in Rhode Island,” and
the ‘‘Eruptive and Stratified Rocks of Essex County, Mas-
sachusetts.””

The following contributions from the Petrographical Laboratory
were published as Museum Bulletins : —

On Peratophyre from Marblehead Neck, Massachusetts, by John H.

Sears.
On some Occurrences of Ottrelite and Ilmenite Schist in New Eng-

land, by J. E. Wolff.

In the spring the rock collections and Laboratory equipment
and the Whitney collection of rocks were moved into the upper
rooms of the Petrographical Laboratory in the new Geological
Section of the Museum, and the Chemical Laboratory and rock
section machinery into the basement.

The Instructor continued during the year his study of the
Crystalline Schists of the Eastern United States.

15

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN BIOLOGY.*

By Proressors FarLow AnD Mark, Dr. D. D. Suave, anp Mr. G. H. Parker.

THE courses of instruction in Zodlogy for the Academic year
1889-90 were the same as in the preceding year, and were car-
ried on by the same instructors.

There were eighty students in Nat. Hist. 2: one Graduate, ten
Seniors, eleven Juniors, nineteen Sophomores, twenty-six Fresh-
men, seven Specials, and six Scientific Students. For laboratory
work the class was, as usual, divided into sections. The Assist-
ants were Mr. C. B. Davenport and Mr. N. B. Potter.

In Nat. Hist. 13 there were eight students. The lectures were
increased somewhat beyond those of the previous year, and with
the laboratory work embraced the anatomy and histology of
Hydra, Asteracanthion, Tenia, and Lumbricus. Mr. W. M.
Woodworth was assistant in the ccurse.

There were eight persons in Nat. Hist. 9, all but one of them
being Graduates. Early in the year Mr. Parker completed a
paper on “ The Eyes in Blind Cray-fishes,” and he has also made
considerable progress with his investigations on the comparative
histology and development of the compound eyes in Crustacea.
The plates illustrating an extended paper by Mr. C. B. Daven-
port on “ Cristatella, the Origin and Development of the Indi-
vidual in the Colony,” have already been completed by the
lithographer, and the text has been ready for the printer for
some time. Mr. W. E. Ritter has written a paper on “The
Parietal Eye in some Lizards from the Western United States,”
and Mr. W. M. Woodworth has completed the first of his studies
on an interesting fresh-water Planarian, the title of his paper
being, ‘‘ Contributions to the Morphology of Turbellaria. I. On
the Structure of Phagocata gracilis, Leidy.” The engraving of

* Professor Farlow’s Report will hereafter appear with the Report of the
Botanical Department.

16

the plates for Mr. E. R. Boyer’s article ‘‘On the Mesoderm in
Teleosts, especially the Source of the Mesodermic Elements
which form the Limb-Bud,” is in progress ; and papers by Mr.
W. Whitney, ‘‘ Notes on the Nervous System of Thyone bri-
areus, Lesueur,” and by Mr. H. P. Johnson, ‘* Studies on Direct
Nuclear Division,” are also finished.

These papers will all be published in the Museum Bulletin as
rapidly as the plates illustrating them can be engraved.

Since the last Annual Report Nos. XV., XVI., and XVII. of
the “ Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory ” have been
issued in the Museum Bulletin, viz.:— XV. Studies on Lepi-
dosteus, by E. L. Mark, (9 plates,) February, 1890.— XVI. On
the Egg Membranes and Micropyle of some Osseous Fishes,
by C. H. Eigenmann, (8 plates,) March, 1890.— XVII. The
Histology and Development of the Eye in the Lobster, by G. H.
Parker, (4 plates,) May, 1890.

The meetings of the Zodlogical Club have been continued with
regularity, and with the usual interest.

The instruction in Comparative Osteology, in charge of Dr. D.
D. Slade, Nat. Hist. 21, during the academic year 1889-90, has
been given by means of lectures, laboratory work, and frequent
examinations. The course has been followed by two Seniors,
two Graduates, and by three Special Students.

The course Nat. Hist. 5 was conducted in 1889-90 on the
same plan as in the previous year, by Mr. G. H. Parker and
Professor W. G. Farlow, assisted by Mr. W. A. Setchell. The
number of students taking the course was larger than in any
previous year, and inasmuch as the room was necessarily also
occupied during a part of the time by the members of another
course, whose students were more numerous than usual, it re-
quired careful arrangement to provide each student with the
amount of space necessary for good work. The completion of
the new Botanical Rooms, in which, in the future, the instruc-
tion of the botanical portion of Nat. Hist. 5 will be given, will
relieve the crowding unavoidable during the present year.

The number of students taking Nat. Hist. 23 was also larger
than usual, and, it being impossible to find places for them all in
the Reptile Room, where the course had been given for the past
few years, by the kindness of the Director of the Museum the
class was allowed to use temporarily one of the new Geological

iy)

Rooms, which was fitted up for the purpose. Hereafter this
course will be given in one of the new Botanical Laboratories,
much to the relief of the other Laboratories, in which we have
been for several years placed awaiting the completion of our
new rooms.

The course in research in Cryptogamic Botany, Nat. Hist. 12,
was taken by four students, two of whom received the degree of
Ph. D., and one the degree of 8. B., in June, 1890. Of the former,
Mr. W. A. Setchell presented as a doctor’s thesis a paper on the
“ Structure of some Laminariacez,” which is to be printed soon.
Mr. Setchell also published during the year a paper, ‘* Concern-
ing the Structure and Development of Tuomeya fluviatilis, Harv.”
Mr. W. C. Sturgis presented for his doctor’s thesis a paper on the
** Carpologic Structure and Development of the Collemacee and
allied Groups.” The two last named papers appeared in the
Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences.
The thesis presented by Mr. G. J. Pierce, on * Corticium Oakesii,
B. & C., and Michenera artocreus, B. & C.,” is soon to be pub-
lished. Mr. H. M. Richards also presented a paper entitled
“ Notes on Zonaria variegata, Lamx.,” which has already ap-
peared in the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts
and Sciences.

18

REPORT ON THE OSTEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By D. D. Suave.

THE collection has received no additions during the past year,
although such would be very desirable, especially in the orders
of the Insectivora and Cheiroptera. It has been consulted by
gentlemen connected with the other departments of the Univer-
sity for the purposes of special study and comparison. Occasional
specimens have been brought in by strangers for determination.

The entire collection is in good condition, and has received no
material damage by its use for illustration and study. No speci-
mens have been lost.

A paper in Science, July 25, 1890, on “ The Absence of the
Patella in Marsupials,”’ has been published; also nearly ready
for publication, “ The Significance of the Zugal Arcb in the
Mammalia.”

19

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

By Wixtiiam BREWSTER.

THE past year has been singularly uneventful as far as this
department is concerned. Only two specimens have been given
to the Museum; a star-nosed mole, by Miss Jennie White, and
a parrot, by Mr. F. W. Story. The latter is in Ward’s hands for
mounting. A dusky duck (Anas obscura), a cormorant (Phalu-
erocorax carbo), a gannet (Sula bassana), and a brant (Branta
bernicla), have been purchased by Mr. Agassiz for the mounted
collection in the Atlantic Room.

By an exchange with the American Museum of New York, the
Cambridge Museum has also received fourteen skins of ground
squirrels of the genus Tamias, representing about eight species
new to our collection.

The following material has been lent to specialists for study
and elaboration: to Mr. J. A. Allen the entire series of skins of
mice (Muride) and ground squirrels (Zamias) ; to Mr. D. J. Elliot
certain specimens of the woodhewers or tree-creepers (Dendro-
colaptide) ; to the Marquis Doria, of Genoa, all the bats and
some of the moles in the Alcoholic Collection.

Mr. Allen has returned the ground squirrels after carefully
identifying and labelling them in accordance with his late re-
arrangement * of this difficult group. He still retains the mice,
pending the completion of his study of that family.

Mr. Elliot’s investigations have resulted in a paper entitled
** A Study of the Genus Dendrornis and its Species.” +

Nothing has yet been done towards the rearrangement of the
Alcoholic Collection of Birds, which at present is not in condition

* See “A Review of the North American Ground Squirrels of the Genus
Tamias.” Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. III., No. 1, May, 1890, pp. 45-116.
+ The Auk, Vol. VII., No. 2, April, 1890, pp. 160-189.

ee

20

for convenient reference. The other collections in this depart-
ment are in excellent order, and wholly free from insect pests.

The Assistant has published the following notes and papers in
“The Auk” : —

“The Present Status of the Wild Pigeon (Xctopistes migratorius) as a
Bird of the United States, with some Notes on its Habits.”

“ Birds through an Opera Glass.” (Review of a book by Miss Florence
A. Merriam.)

“ Nesting Habits of the Parrakeet ( Conurus carolinensis) .”

“ Melanerpes carolinus eating Oranges.”

“The Little Brown Crane ( Grus canadensis) in Rhode Island.”

“Capture of a Canada Jay (Perisoreus canadensis) near Cambridge,
Massachusetts.”

“ Bullock’s Oriole in Maine.”

“ Recent Occurrence of the Turkey Vulture in Eastern Massachusetts.”

“Capture of a Third Specimen of the Barn Ow] in Massachusetts.”

“ Food of Young Humming-birds.”

‘‘The Purple Grackle at Charleston, South Carolina.”

“The Acadian Sharp-tailed Sparrow and Scott’s Seaside Sparrow on
the Coast of South Carolina.”

In “ Forest and Stream ” : —

Two notes without formal titles relating to the occurrence of the Even-
ing Grosbeak ( Coccothraustes vespertina) in New England.

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.

By Samuet Garman.

COMPREHENSIVE series of the Fishes have been sent as ex-
changes to the Australian Museum of Sydney, the British
Museum of London, the Imperial Academy of Sciences of St.
Petersburg, the K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften of Géttingen,
the K. K. Academie der Wissenschaften of Vienna, the Konig.
Zoologische Sammlung of Berlin, the Museo Civico of Milan, the
Museum d'Histoire Naturelle of Paris, the Queensland Museum
of Brisbane, the Smithsonian Institution of Washington, the
Universitetets Zoologiske Museum of Copenhagen, and the
Zoolog. Museum Universitetet of Christiania. To the shipment
for St. Petersburg there was added a series of the Reptiles and
Batrachians. Other Fishes and Reptiles were furnished Prof. A.
Goette, Dr. R. Semon, Prof. B. G. Wilder, and the instructors
and students of the University.

We are pleased to acknowledge the following receipts : — Yu-
catan Reptiles and Batrachians from the Hon. Edward Thompson ;
a large number of Missouri Cave Animals, both vertebrates and
invertebrates, from Miss Ruth Coffin; various lots of New Eng-
land species, from Miss Reed, Messrs. Frank Bolles, N. Vickary,
W. J. Wright, and Dr. L. C. Jones; Mississippi Valley species,
from Professors H. Garman and G. H. Parker; and California
Reptiles, from Mr. W. E. Ritter. An excellent collection of Rep-
tiles, Batrachians, Fishes, and Selachians was received from the
Australian Museum, and a valuable representation of Pacific Coast
Fishes from Prof. C. H. Eigenmann. Important additions of
Tropical Reptiles and Batrachians have been made by exchanges
with Mr. N. L. Wilson. A number of purchases of desiderata
from South America and the Old World have contributed mate-
rially to the completeness of the collections. With rare excep-
tions, all arrivals were good in kind and condition.

22

The mounted specimens of Sharks and Skates, returned by
Professor Ward, add greatly to the attractiveness of the Atlantic
Room.

As heretofore, in taking care of the material attention has not
been confined to the Reptiles and Fishes.

The publications concerning these departments include “ A
Revision of the Edentulous Genera of Curimatine,” by Carl H.
Eigenmann and Mrs. R. 8S. Eigenmann, in the Annals of the New
York Academy of Science, Vol. IV., and the following by the
present writer, besides unsigned reviews, notices, and articles less
directly connected with ichthyology and herpetology.

In the Bulletin of the Museum : —
“ Cave Animals from Southwestern Missouri.”

In the Bulletin of the Essex Institute :—

“On the Species of the Genus Chalcinus.”
“On Species of Gasteropelecus.”

“ On Species of Cynopotamus.”

“On the Species of Anostomus.”

23

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By Dr. H. A. Hacen.

THE collection is in very good condition. The vulcanized
stoppers of the small vials in the Biological Collection had to be
changed for pure rubber stoppers. (See Canad. Entom., 1886,
Experience with Rubber Stoppers in the Biological Collection.)
The larger vials were in good order; of the medium size, repre-
senting the largest number in the collection, very few needed a
change of the stoppers. The importance of the subject had in-
duced me to make observations through a number of years. A
test vial of the medium size, 70 mm. long, 16 mm. broad, was
filled, October, 1873. ‘The air bubble retained in the vial was
carefully measured, and was 14 mm. long; next summer it was
smaller, owing to the greater expansion of the alcohol, proving at
the same time the close fitting of the stopper. 14 November,
1880, the bubble was 20 mm. long; 12 November, 1888, it was
30 mm.; 10 August, 1899, it was 40 mm. long. So it can
probably stay many years longer without refilling.

The collection of Dr. John L. LeConte has been placed in the
new cabinets presented last year to the Museum by Mrs. Le-
Conte. They are the best ever provided for the Museum. Each
box is marked “ LeConte’s Collection,’ and all are numbered as
separate series. Each box contains two of the original boxes,
with the original covers. Sufficient space is left to arrange some
parts too much crowded in the old boxes. The whole collee-
tion is in excellent condition, and free of pests. It is impossible
to suggest a better and safer arrangement for such a valuable
treasure.

Six new cabinets have been received for the Museum Col-
lection.

Additions have been received from Mr. F. Blake, Weston,
Mass., Insects collected in Peoria, Illinois; Mr. P. H. Dudley,

24

NewYork, an interesting lot of White Ants from Panama; Mr.
F. W. Putnam, Cambridge, a Bombus nest with parasites from
Ohio; Mr. J. G. Jack of the Arboretum, additions to the Bio-
logical Collection; Mr. D. W. Coquillett, Los Angeles, Cal,
Neuroptera; Mr. Sam. Henshaw, Cambridge, additions to the
Biological Collection; and from Dr. Henry J. Bowditch, August
15, 1890, a living colony of Psocus venosus, Br., from Peter-
borough, N. H.

Changes and improvements have been made in the collection
of Lepidoptera and in the Biological Collection. The Odonata
are now ready, and alone fill a whole cabinet. The new speci-
mens of the other orders are now in the right place.

The following papers from this department have been pub-
lished during the last year :—

Louis Cabot. The Immature State of the Odonata. Part III. Sub-
family Cordulina. Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol.
XVII., No. 1, with Six Plates. Of the next part, four plates are ready
for next year, finishing the Libellulina. Only one part more, containing
all the Agrionina, is to follow, to finish the large and very important work
on the immature state of the Odonata contained in the collection of the
Museum.

H. A. Hagen. Unsere gegenwiirtige Kenntniss der Ephemerinen. Stet-
tiner Entomologische Zeitung, 1890, Vol. LI. pp. 11-13.

New Synopsis of the Odonata of North America : —

1. Calopterygina. Psyche, Vol. V., 1889, No. 164, December, pp.
241-250.

2. Anax. Ibid., No. 166, February, 1890, pp. 803-308.

3. Two Species of Anchora. Ibid., No. 170, June, pp. 353-350.

4. Cordulina. Ibid., No. 171, July, pp. 8367-373, with One Plate.

5. A Synopsis of the Odonat Genus Leucorhinia, Br. Trans. Amer.
Ent. Soc., Philadelphia, July, 1890, Vol. XVII. pp. 229-236, One Plate.

Baron Ed. de Selys-Longchamps, Comptes Rendus de la Société En-
tomologique de Belgique, Vol. II., No. 2, July 5, 1890, pp. Ixvi—Ixx., has
given a report on the publications of Dr. Hagen, Nos. 1 and 2, and on
some remarks by him on recent Odonata of America.

REPORT ON THE CRUSTACEA.

By WALTER Faxon.

DurtnG the year past the collection of Crustacea has been
thoroughly overhauled and put into perfect order. Material has
been brought together to illustrate the Pacific and Indo-Asiatic
Faune. Exchanges have been made with the United States
National Museum, the Massachusetts Fish Commission, Professor
F. W. Cragin, etc. Our collection of Caprellide has been re-
turned by Dr. P. Mayer. It has furnished valuable material to
Dr. Mayer in the preparation of his supplement to the Mono-
graph of the Caprellide (Fauna und Flora des Golfes von
Neapel), published at Berlin during the current year. I have
published a Supplement to my Revision of the Astacide, based
upon the material in our Museum and in the United States
National Museum, in the Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. XII.

REPORT ON THE PALZONTOLOGICAL COLLECTIONS.

By AtpHeus Hyarr.

THE work on the collection of Trilobites, which consists in get-
ting together all the species of each genus, and the selection of
appropriate specimens for exhibition in the Stratigraphical Collec-
tions, was continued during the first part of the year. This pro-
cess not only eliminates materials suitable for exhibition from the
mass of the collections, but also greatly improves the accessibility
and arrangement of the latter, and considerably diminishes the
space occupied by them in the rooms where they are stored. The
greater part of the Assistants’ time has, however, been given
to a revision of the magnificent collection of Fossil Cephalopods
for the express purpose of selecting representative forms of the
genera for exhibition in the Systematic Collection.

The Schary Collection furnished the larger number of the
Paleozoic types, and the whole of this has been roughly revised
and brought into one room together with all the other collec-
tions of Fossil Cephalopoda, and the specimens arranged in their
appropriate generic groups. Quite a number of genera were
more or less closely revised in order to bring them up to the lat-
est published investigations, and representatives of the new groups
into which they have been divided were picked out, but most of
this work was necessarily of a preliminary nature, not including
any close revision of species, and much still remains to be done
before this class of fossils can be reported as finished. The mag-
nitude of some parts of this collection is certainly astonishing,
the specimens of the Schary Collection representing the Ortho-
ceratide, although stored with strict attention to economy of
space, now occupy one hundred and ninety-four trays, and num-
ber about eleven thousand specimens, and approximately about
eighty species.

During the progress of the dusting of this and other collections,

& a

27

a very considerable number of specimens have been found which
would very soon have been destroyed by oxidation. Such a col-
lection should be looked over carefully every two or three years,
and the specimens fossilized in iron pyrite protected with several
thick coats of varnish. Miss Clark has also been occupied in
mounting specimens for exhibition, and in labelling.

This department is indebted to Dr. Robert T. Jackson for con-
siderable work in various directions. He has superintended the
moving of collections, has concentrated and in part culled the
Anticosti Collection, separating the useless from the valuable
materials. He has also arranged and concentrated the Creta-
ceous and Tertiary Pelecypoda which were widely scattered,
picking out species suitable for exhibition in the Stratigraphical
Collection, and has also done the same service for several small
collections, consisting for the most part of Mollusca and Gaste-
ropoda, but containing some species from all departments of the
animal kingdom. This work has put into available condition
for final arrangement or study a large amount of material that
before was widely scattered, and given considerable free space
in the cases. Dr. Jackson has also worked on the large and
valuable materials of the Dyer Collection, revising all the por-
tions not previously arranged, and roughly classifying them.
This is now ready for distribution into genera, and it should be
stated, for the benefit of future students, that the collection,
although it was carefully numbered by Mr. Dyer with printed
numbers, was probably never catalogued by him. No catalogue
was ever sent, so far as can be ascertained, with the collection,
and the Assistant, after inquiring of several geologists well ac-
quainted with Mr. Dyer, has come to the conclusion that the
numbers merely represent Mr. Dyer’s intentions. Fortunately, a
considerable number of the ordinary run of the specimens are
labelled, and all the types, so that no important losses of locali-
ties will be occasioned by the absence of a catalogue.

Mr. Frank Springer spent some time in studying the collection
of Crinoids, and borrowed material of this group for investiga-
tion by Mr. Wachsmuth and himself. Several slabs of Trilobite
tracks were received from the New York State Natural His-
tory Museum. ‘Three boxes of fossils were received from Mr.
Springer, containing a small but valuable collection of Cretaceous
Fossils, and the skull of a mammal from New Mexico.

28

During the past year the following papers have been published.
by the Assistants in the department : —

Genesis of the Arietide, by Alpheus Hyatt. pp. 258, with six Genealogi-
cal Tables, fourteen plates and twenty-nine figures in the text. Published
jointly by the Smithsonian Institute and the Museum in the “ Smithsonian
Contributions to Knowledge,” No. 675, Washington, 1889, and in the
Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XVI., No. 3.

Rot in Iris Germanica, by Robert T. Jackson. Garden and Forest,
Vol. II. p. 522, 1889.

Phylogeny of the Pelecypoda, Studies of the Aviculide and their Allies,
by Dr. Robert Tracy Jackson, Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural
History, Vol. 1V., No. 8, 1890, pp. 277-400, with fifty-two figures and
eight plates. Thesis offered for the Degree of Doctor of Science in Har-
vard University, May, 1889.

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.

By Miss F. M. Strack.

DuRiInG the year ending September 1, 1890, the Library has
received 683 volumes, 1,991 parts, and 75 pamphlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS.

nites oe. eee ce c- % -< AY Ml 46 9
IESG RPTTOVEREY acy! Ue SAI IS Soo A £43) 768 40
HeATCMASCMEE ote ches es we al re SDE 217
Lr S\ODSISE on ged ipl" Se be oe pt | 844 26
SIGE ATER ci se cy ee eee we OT
Wihtimeyelbibrary. 5.) 0. . -. - 7 «9 td 116

683 1991 75

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the greater part of the Whitney Library) is
19,102. There are 13,219 pamphlets bound in 2,158 volumes,
making the total number of volumes 21,260.

30

[A]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1889-90,

Of the Bulletin.
Vol. XVI. [Geological Series, Vol. II.]

No. 6. The Intrusive and Extrusive Trrasstc Trap SHEeEts of the Connecti-
cut Valley. By W. M. Davis and C. L. Wuitrie. pp. 40. 5 Plates.
December, 1889.

No. 7. The Torocraeny of Froripa. By N.S. SHater. With a Note by
A. Acassiz. pp. 10. Plate. March, 1890.

No. 8. On Some Occurrences of OTTRELITE aND ILMENITE Scuist in New
England. By J. E. Wolff. pp. 7. April, 1890.

No. 9. On KeratorHyre from Marblehead Neck, Massachusetts. By J. H.
Sears. pp. 6. July, 1890.

(Vol. XVI. to be continued.)

Vol. XVII.

No. 5. The Morruotocy or tHE Carorips, based on a Study of the Blood-
vessels of Chlamydoselachus anguineus, Garman. By H. Ayers. pp. 34.
Plate. October, 1889.

No. 6. Cave Animats from Southwestern Missouri. By S. Garman. pp. 16.
2 Plates. December, 1889.

Vol. XIX. [Complete.]

No. 1. Studies on Lepiposteus. Part I. By E. L. Mark. pp. 128. 9 Plates.
February, 1890.

No. 2. On the Eee Memepranes and Micropy te of some Osseous Fishes. By
C. H. E1GENMANN. pp. 26. 3 Plates. March, 1890.

No. 8. Report on the Results of Dredging by the United States Coast Sur-
vey Steamer “ Blake.” — XXXII. Report on the Nuprprancus. By KR.
Bereu. pp. 28. 38 Plates. March, 1890.

No. 4. A Third Supplement to the Fifth Volume of the TERRESTRIAL AIR-
BREATHING Motiusks of the United States and Adjacent Territories.
By W.G. Binney. pp. 44. 11 Plates. May, 1890.

31

Vol. XX.
No.1. The Histology and Development of the Eye in the Lopster. By G.
H. Parker. pp. 60. 4 Plates. May, 1890.
(Vol. XX. to be continued.)

Of the Memoirs.
Vol. XVI.

No. 3. GENESIS OF THE ARIETIDH. By A. Hyatt. pp. i.-xii., 238. 14 Plates
and 6 Tables. Published in Conjunction with the Smithsonian Institution.
December, 1889.

(Vol. XVI. is completed.)
Vol. XVII.

No. 1. The Immature State of the Oponata. Part III. Sub-family Corpu-

tina. By Louis Casor. pp. 52. 6 Plates. February, 1890.

[B]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE: MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HARVARD COLLEGE, SEPT. 1, 1889.

Sturgis-Hooper Fund = - - . = - (#0 S0\e js = 6) Se
Grayund!.) Mt cor) 6 ke Se ea gees ey ee 50,000.00
Agassiz Memorial Fund . .'. . - 2 . 5 s «2 =» + 5 = =) nes
Meschers;and Pupils Fund). . 3. co fee anne) er 7,594.01
Permanent Fund . Ee ee ene ae ane 117,469.34
Humboldt Fund? 2... 2s... 5 . © =) eeue Se G ose 7,740.66

$580,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of which
is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in an analysis
of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund can be applied for the benefit of one or more
students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport Marine Laboratory,
the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl, or elsewhere.

Applications for the Tables reserved for advanced students at the Newport Ma-
rine Laboratory, and for the Tables at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made to
the Curator of the Museum before the Ist of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

ANNUAL REPORT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,

TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

390-9:

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS; JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1891.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. WALCOTT.

OFFICERS.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY
HERMANN A. HAGEN .
NATHANIEL S. SHALER .
E. L. MARK. a te
WILLIAM MORRIS DAVIS
J. ELIOT WOLFF
THADDEUS W. HARRIS
W. M. WOODWORTH .

C. B. DAVENPORT .
WALTER FAXON .

Curator.

Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Entomology.
Professor of Geology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.
Professor of Physical Geography.
Instructor in Petrography.
Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Microscopic Anatomy.
Instructor in Zodlogy.

Assistant in Zodlogy.

D. D. SLADE

SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER .
ALPHEUS HYATT.

H. M. KELLY . ae
RICHARD ELWOOD DODGE
J. BACKUS WOODWORTH
HENRY BARNARD KUMMEL . Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
LOUIS GARDNER WESTGATE . Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
ROBERT DECOURCEY WARD
MISS F. M. SLACK . . Librarian.
MAGNUS WESTERGREN .. . Artist.

Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
Assistant in Paleontology.

Assistant in the Zotdlogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.

Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.

Assistant in the Geographical Laboratory.

REPORT.

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE: —

Durine the past year the usual courses of instruction have been
given at the Museum in Zodlogy by Professor Mark, Dr. Slade,
and Mr. Parker, assisted in the Laboratory work by Messrs.
W. M. Woodworth, Ritter, and Hubbard.

Professors Whitney, Shaler, and Davis, and Dr. J. E. Wolff,
gave courses of instruction in Geology, Paleontology, Physical
Geography, and Petrograpby. Messrs. Harris, J. B. Woodworth,
Cobb, and Tarr were the Assistants in the Undergraduate instruc-
tion of the Geological Department.

For the details of these courses of instruction, as well as of the
summer courses in Geology, I would refer to the accompanying
special reports of the Professors and Instructors.

Professor Farlow’s report upon the Botanical part of the intro-
ductory course of Natural History will appear in the report of the
Botanical Department.

The Geological Section of the Museum has been occupied Bis
the past year, and its Laboratories and Lecture Rooms have been
found well adapted to their purpose. No progress has as yet
been made in the equipment of the Geological and Geographical
Museum, but the rooms are used to establish a connection between
the Exhibition Rooms of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy
and the Botanical and Mineralogical Collections of the University
Museum.

An extensive addition has been made to the Newport Marine
Laboratory, so that there is now ample accommodation for eight
advanced students, beside the space occupied by myself and assist-
ant. Additional room is thus provided for the housing of books,
drawings, and other records in use at the Laboratory. Messrs.

4

Woodworth, Davenport, Smith, Ward, Nickerson, and Lucas spent
some time at the Newport Laboratory, either collecting material
for future investigation, or carrying on special work on the embry-
ology of Annelids, Bryozoa, and Acalephs. Mr. Woodworth also
passed a few days at Newport before the opening of the season in
putting the Laboratory in order for work.

We have to thank Colonel Marshall McDonald, United States
Fish Commissioner, for facilities granted our students in connec-
tion with their work, by the Fish Commission Station at Wood’s
Holl.

There have been no changes in the Exhibition Rooms beyond the
additions made to fill gaps existing in our series. The collections
open to the public remain in a satisfactory condition, and the in-
terest in the exhibit does not appear to diminish, judging from the
constantly increasing number of visitors.

The Pacific Room is little by little preparing for exhibition,
and I hope to open it to the public as soon as we can make a
reasonably interesting exhibit of the fauna of some of its groups
of islands. We have been for some time accumulating collec-
tions from the Sandwich Islands, the Galapagos, and the Feejee
Islands.

The most important addition to our Exhibition Rooms has been
the mounted skeleton of the fine Sperm Whale obtained through
Professor Ward, mentioned in my last Report. This skeleton has
been suspended from the roof of the large Exhibition Room de-
voted to the Systematic Collection of Vertebrates, and finds its
place naturally by the side of the two other large skeletons of
whales similarly placed.

The magnificent series of Pampas Fossils obtained by Professor
Ward have been mounted by him, and safely moved to Cambridge
from Rochester. They occupy a part of the central floor space of
the rooms devoted to the Tertiary Faune. A few other speci-
mens of extinct Vertebrates have been moved to the same rooms,
so that as soon as the specimens are labelled it will be possible to
open two of the Paleontological Exhibition Rooms to the public.
They will, however, contain at first only a small part of the collec-
tions they are intended to house. |

It will be seen from the special Reports of the Assistants,
that the collections of the Museum continue in good condition.
Owing to Dr. Hagen’s prolonged ill-health, he has been able to

5

give but little time to the Museum, and has been unable to make
his usual Report. The collections have been kept in excellent
condition, but of course, owing to his absence, they could not be
placed at the disposal of specialists, as has always been the case
heretofore.

Mr. J. A. Allen, of the Museum of Natural History of New
York, has returned the collection of Muridz which had been sent
to him for study. -

Professor Harrison Allen, of Philadelphia, has returned the col-
lection of Bats sent to aid him in the preparation of a monograph
on the family, for the Smithsonian Institution.

Messrs. Scott and Osborn have returned an additional invoice
of the collection of Western Fossils lent to them.

Professor S. I. Smith, of New Haven, has returned the part of
the “‘ Blake ” Crustacea remaining in his possession.

Professor Solas, of Dublin, has sent back a few of the types of
the *‘ Blake ” and other Sponges.

Messrs. Scudder and McMurrich have returned drawings of
Lepidoptera and of Actiniz, which had been lent to them for
examination.

We have received from Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer a num-
ber of Paleozoic Crinoids; from Mr. Charles Chilton, a collection
of New Zealand Crustacea ; from the Zodlogical Museum of the
University of Copenhagen, a collection of Fishes and Invertebrates
from the Kara Sea, made by the Expedition of the “ Dijmphna” ;
from the Paris Museum, a collection of Deep-sea Fishes, mainly
from the “ Travailleur” and “ Talisman” Expeditions; from Mr.
Arthur H. Gordon, an interesting collection of Lepidoptera from
Central China; and from Lieut. Commanding J. F. Moser, a
collection of Corals from the submarine cable between Key West
and Havana, illustrating the rate of growth of corals. (See the
Museum Bulletin, Vol. XX. No. 2.)

In addition to the specimens purchased from Professor Ward, we
have also filled a few gaps in our collection of Reptiles, mainly for
the Exhibition Rooms.

With the exception of an exhaustive Report on the Paguride of
the “ Blake” Expedition, for which the Museum is indebted to
Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards, the Blake publications and
collections remain in the same state as last year. The Report of
Professor Milne-Edwards is accompanied by twelve beautifully

6

executed plates. The Report will be published as soon as the '
plates can be reproduced. It will form an important contribution
to our knowledge of the Paguridz. Messrs. Goode and Bean hope
to finish their Memoir on the “ Blake” Fishes within a few weeks.
Fair progress has been made on the Memoirs and Bulletins men-
tioned in my last Report as preparing for the press, and the
greater part will undoubtedly be issued during the coming year.

Appendix A of this Report contains a list of the publications of
the Museum issued during the past academic year. We have pub-
lished twelve Bulletins in the Zodlogical Series, making nearly
two volumes of the Bulletin. With the exception of one num-
ber by Messrs. Scott and Osborne, and three short Bulletins by
myself, the publications represent work done in the Zodlogical
Laboratory in charge of Professor Mark. The activity in that
Laboratory shows the excellent use which can be made of our
publications in bringing out such original work as may be con-
sidered worthy of publication by the instructors in the various
departments connected with the Museum.

Among the publications based upon Museum materials, I may
mention a Review of the South American Nematognati, by C. H.
and Rosa 8. Eigenmann, published in occasional papers of the
California Academy, I., July, 1890. Nearly the whole of this sys-
tematic paper is based upon the collection of Catfishes made by
Professor Agassiz during the Thayer Expedition. The authors,
with the alacrity with which impracticable plans are so readily
laid out for others, needlessly go out of their way to criticise the
state of the collection as left by Dr. Steindachner, and give the
Museum excellent advice as to what ought to have been done
with this collection when it was first brought together.

Professor W. B. Scott has published in the American Journal of
Morphology an extensive paper on the Osteology of Poebrotherium,
based in part upon Museum material.

Professor Osborn has kindly made out for future use of the
Museum a list of our desiderata in Western Fossils, both generic
and stratigraphic.

I ought also to mention a short paper on Nettastoma by Dr.
Burger, published in a recent number of the Zoologische Jahr-
bucher, 1V., the material for which was obtained from the Newport
Laboratory.

The additions to our Library show a satisfactory increase in the

—

number of accessions, especially from the exchanges with other
institutions. Among the latter I must specify an important
addition to our Geographical Library, consisting of a number of
Government Surveys and Reports of Geographical Institutions,
with extensive series of their maps and publications. These have
been generously sent to us in exchange for our Geological publica-
tions, and with the full knowledge of how small a return we were
able to make for their magnificent publications.

Last fall I was invited by Colonel Marshall McDonald, the U.S.
Fish Commissioner, to take charge of a deep-sea dredging ex-
pedition off the coasts of Central America and of Mexico. With
the consent of the President of the United States, the * Albatross ”’
Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, Commanding, was ordered to
Panama, where I joined her in February. Our cruise extended
from Panama to Cocos Island, thence south toward Malpelo, and
back to Panama. Our second cruise ran from Panama to Galera
Point, thence to the Galapagos, and from there to Acapulco; and
in May I left the expedition at Guaymas, after a short exploration
of the Gulf of California. The letters written on the voyage to
Colonel McDonald give a preliminary account of this trip ; they have
been published in the Museum Bulletin (Vol. X XI. No. 4), and a
more extended account of the expedition is in preparation. The
collections made have arrived safely at Washington, and, with the
consent of Colonel McDonald, arrangements have been made for
the publication of the results in the Memoirs and Bulletins of the
Museum. The following gentlemen have kindly agreed to work up
the collections: Dr. P. H. Carpenter, the Comatule ; Professor
S. F. Clarke and Mr. Peabody, the Hydroids; Dr. W. H. Dall, the
Mollusks; Mr. C. B. Davenport, the Bryozoa; Professor Faxon,
the Crustacea; Professor W. E. Hoyle, the Cephalopods; Mr. 8.
Garman, the Fishes; Dr. Goes, the Foraminifera ; Dr. V. Lenden-
feld, the Phosphorescent Organs of Fishes; Professor Ludwig,
the Holothurians; Professor Litken, the Ophiurans; Dr. John
Murray, the specimens of the bottom; Professor Mark, the
Actinians ; Professor Studer, the Gorgonians; Dr. W. M. Wood-
worth, the Planarians; and Dr. H. V. Wilson, the Sponges. I
shall myself undertake the general account of the Pelagic Fauna,
the Acalephs, and the Sea Urchins. The groups forming the re-
mainder of the collection will probably be distributed during the
coming winter.

8

Twice before I had been on the point of making an exploration
of the deep waters of the Pacific off Panama. Once my plans were
disarranged by the breaking out of war between Chili and Peru,
and three years ago, when the “ Albatross’ was on her way from
New York to San Francisco, I was unable to meet her at Panama,
although she was detained there for a time by the Fish Commis-
sioner, in hopes I might be able to join the ship before she left for
the Galapagos. I find it difficult to express my obligations to Colo-
nel McDonald for having given me the opportunity of accompany-
ing the “ Albatross” on her second cruise, and of carrying on the
explorations of the past winter in so new and so interesting a field
on a vessel so admirably adapted and equipped for the purpose as
the ‘* Albatross,” and commanded by so experienced and enthu-
siastic deep-sea dredger as Lieut. Commander Tanner. To Mr.
Richard Rathbun, Assistant of the U. 8. Fish Commission, I must
express my thanks for the care, interest, and patience with which
he attended to the endless details connected with the fitting out of
the “ Albatross ” for her voyage.

We are unfortunately compelled for want of funds gradually to
restrict the work of the assistants of the Museum to the mere care
and maintenance of the collections, and to limit their use by spe-
cialists. Our inability to engage a sufficient number of assistants
compels us to refuse many of the constant demands made upon the
administration of the Museum for an opportunity of working up
or of examining parts of our collections, the value of which to
science is thus greatly diminished. It is true we have a number
of volunteer assistants, but we cannot expect these gentlemen, who
have kindly undertaken the general supervision of special depart-
ments, to spend their time in the drudgery necessary to meet the
legitimate demands which every fairly organized Museum ought
to be able to meet, and which are naturally made upon our collec-
tions and assistants. With the exception of Dr. Hagen and Mr.
Garman, there is no assistant upon whom I feel at liberty to call
for work of that kind. The annual expenditure of a comparatively
moderate sum would go far to remedy the unfortunate attitude we
are compelled to assume towards specialists. But I need not dwell
upon the unsatisfactory condition of the Museum finances. As I
have stated in former Reports, it is no longer practical for me,
in connection with other plans I have in view, to continue to give
to the Museum the support, or to devote to its interests the time

9

it has hitherto received from me. It is becoming self-evident
that an attempt to establish at Cambridge a Museum devoted to
original investigation, in addition to its other functions of pro-
viding a University Museum and Laboratories, is not destined to
be carried out. We cannot compete with the general government
or municipal institutions without an endowment or resources far
greater than any University can hope to obtain, and the sooner
the future plans of the Museum are modified to meet the existing
state of things, the less will be the waste, and the sooner shall
we adapt our organization to the comparatively limited field of
a University establishment.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CAMBRIDGE, October 1, 1891.

bho

10

REPORT OF THE STURGIS-HOOPER PROFESSOR OF
GEOLOGY.

By Jostan D. WuitTney.

DurinG the year a course of lectures was given on Mineral Veins
and Metalliferous Deposits, with special reference to the mode of
occurrence and utilization of the useful metals and their ores, the
course forming an introduction to the sciences of Mining and
Metallurgy. This course was attended by about twenty students,
mostly Seniors, with a few Graduates.

The slides belonging to the lithological collections, mentioned in
the last Report as having been transferred to the keeping of the
Instructor in Petrography in the College (Dr. Wolff), still remain
in the hands of Professor Wadsworth, Director of the Michigan
Mining School, and no recent information has been received from
him in regard to the preparation of the report intended as the
continuation of the ‘“ Lithological Studies,” of which the first part
was published in the Museum Memoirs several years ago. These
slides would be useful, as a necessary complement of the collection
to which they belong, for the Instructor in Petrography, and should
be returned unless Professor Wadsworth finds himself able within
a reasonable time to prepare a report on the same.

The beginning of cataloguing the library belonging to this de-
partment has been made by Miss Clark, and a portion of the
books temporarily arranged on the shelves. A considerable
number of volumes have been transferred to the Museum Library.
The shelf room, however, is quite inadequate for the proper
arrangement of the books, and it is necessary that more room be
provided, or that the Geological and Mining Library belonging to
this department be divided up in some such way as shall be found
to be best suited to meet the wants of those who desire to
use it.

Most of the time of the Sturgis-Hooper Professor has, during
the past year, been given to work on the Century Dictionary,

11

which work is now finished, the last part of the Dictionary being
all in type, and almost ready for publication.

The Sturgis-Hooper Professor proposes now to resume his
investigations into historic and prehistoric changes of climate, the
first part of which was published in the Museum Memoirs, un-
der the title of “‘ Climatic Changes of Later Geological Times,”
in 1882.

REPORT ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By Proressors J. D. Wuitney, N. S. SHALER, anp W. M. Davis,
AND Dr. J. E. Wourr.

Durinc the Academic year 1890-91, the following named
courses of instruction were given in the Geological, Geographical,
Petrographical, and Paleontological Laboratories, and in the field,
by the instructors in the department.

1. Geol. 4. A course in Elementary Geology, by N. S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with certain required reading; attended by two hundred
and fifty-eight students.

2. Geol. 4a. A course of practical Geological Exercises in the labo-
ratory and in the field, by T. W. Harris, assisted by R. S. Tarr and
J. B. Woodworth, designed especially for those who intend in subsequent
years to continue the study of Geology and Paleontology. Attended
by one hundred and four students.

3. Geol. 8. A course of Advanced Geology, two lectures a week,
by N. S. Shaler, together with assigned reading and field-work, conducted
by W. M. Davis and J. E. Wolff. Students in this course were required
during the winter to prepare theses on assigned subjects. Those only who
had passed a satisfactory examination in the elementary courses were
permitted to attend. Forty-three persons received this instruction.

4. Geol. 9. A course in Structural Geology, by T. W. Harris. Two
lectures a week with required reading and theses. Six students took
this course.

5. Geol. 14. A course in Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler. Two
lectures a week, with laboratory work and theses. The course was
attended by eleven students.

6. Geol. 205. <A course in field-work, designed to afford special train-
ing in the processes of geological surveying, by N. S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,
J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris. Attended by sixteen students.

7. Geol. 1. A course in Elementary Meteorology, by W. M. Davis.
First half-year. Two lectures a week, with recitations and laboratory
exercises; attended by ninety students.

18

8. Geol. 2. A course in Physical Geography, by W. M. Davis.
Second half-year. Two lectures a week, with recitations and laboratory
exercises; attended by one hundred and ten students.

9. Geol. 20a. A course in Advanced Meteorology and Physical
Geography, by W. M. Davis. Weekly conferences; attended by six
students.

10. Geol. 22. A course in Petrography, by J. E. Wolff. Two
lectures a week, with laboratory work and theses; attended by six
students.

11. Geol. 20d. A course in Petrographic Investigation, by J. E. Wolff.
Field and laboratory work ; one student.

12. Geol. 25. A course in Mineral Veins and Metalliferous Deposits,
by J. D. Whitney. First half-year. Two lectures a week; attended by
twenty students.

During the winter season the students in the advanced classes
attended regular evening meetings, which were designed to serve
the purpose accomplished by the Seminaria of the German uni-
versities.

During the summer of 1891, forty-one students received instruc-
tion in the field. This instruction was given in three graded
schools, one of which, the elementary school, was taught in
Cambridge, and the other two in New York, New Jersey, and the
New England States. Instruction in these courses was given
by N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis, J. E. Wolff, C. Cobb, and J. B.
Woodworth, with the assistance of Prof. H. S. Williams of
Cornell University, Prof. A. P. Brigham of Utica, N. Y., Prof.
R. D. Salisbury of the University of Wisconsin, and Mr. C. W.
Coman, Assistant, New Jersey Geological Survey, who collabo-
rated with the other instructors in the work done in New York
and New Jersey. .

During the year, the following papers of a scientific nature
have been published by N. 8. Shaler : —

General Account of the Fresh Water Morasses of the United States,
with a Description of the Dismal Swamp District of Virginia and North
Carolina. Tenth Annual Report of Director of United States Geological
Survey.

The Antiquity of the Last Glacial Period. Proceedings Boston Society
of Natural History, Vol. XXV.

Individualism in Education. Atlantic Monthly, Vol. LX VIL.

College Examinations. Atlantic Monthly, July, 1891.

14

Atlas of Massachusetts, fifty-five sheets quarto (with F. A. Walker and
H. L. Whiting). January, 1891.

Report of the Massachusetts Topographical Survey Commission. Jan-
uary, 1891.

The instruction during the past year in the elementary courses in
Physical Geography and Meteorology, by Professor W. M. Davis,
has been greatly benefited by the occupation of the new rooms
assigned to these subjects in the Geological Section of the Mu-
seum; and by the aid of Mr. R. DeC. Ward, of the class of 1889,
who has acted as assistant in the laboratory work. Under these
favorable conditions, it has been possible to introduce certain
practical methods of laboratory teaching that have been in mind
for several years past, but which have been unattainable heretofore
in smaller rooms and without assistance. Each of these elemen-
tary courses occupied half a year, the number of students in the
course on Meteorology being ninety, and in Physical Geography
one hundred and ten. In each course, two lectures a week were
given to the whole class in the large Lecture Room on the first
floor ; and an hour of laboratory work was arranged for each of
the five sections into which the class was divided for this purpose,
this work consisting of exercises on charts, maps, diagrams, models,
photographs, etc., and involving about two hours’ additional work
by each student for its proper completion. In order to test the
progress made by the class, it was divided into twelve sections,
each of which met the instructor or the assistant weekly for a half-
hour’s recitation, followed by half an hour for a written exercise.
Although the amount of time required for the work by the
instructor and the assistant was great, it is believed to have been
well expended, to the profit of the students: moreover, the marks
assigned on the frequent recitations and written exercises, when
combined at the end of the term, are found to be a valuable check
on the mark given upon the final written examination.

The second course in Physical Geography and Meteorology, for
students already acquainted with the rudiments of these subjects,
was attended by six students. The work in this course is done
individually by the students, and discussed in a weekly conference
of two hours. The subjects studied in the past year were the
Natural History of Rivers ; the Physical Geography of Wisconsin ;
Professor Russell’s Theory of Cold Waves ; the Chinook Wind of
the Rocky Mountains ; and Faye’s Theory of Cyclones. To this

We er e eae e

15

may be added a statement of the work in a similar course by three
students of the Society for the Collegiate Instruction of Women,
the subjects here studied being the Physical Geography of New
York, of New Jersey, and of Pennsylvania.

The collections of the Laboratory of Physical Geography have
been materially enlarged during the past year. A pair of projecting
lanterns, purchased for the general use of the Geological Depart-
ment, has greatly improved the means of illustration in the lectures ;
and a beginning has been made towards a series of geographical
lantern slides. Especial effort is given to securing views charac-
teristic of our own physical geography, at present very poorly
represented in the collections of dealers. The laboratory collection
has been added to by numerous gifts, of which the following may
be mentioned : -—

Photographs and slides of Rocky Mountain views, from F. H. Chapin,
Esq., of Hartford, Conn.

Photographs of Saxon Switzerland, from Mr. R. DeC. Ward, of Cam-
bridge.

Photographs of scenery on the Canadian Pacific Railway, from the
Canadian Pacific Railway Company.

Photographs of scenery of the New York Central and Hudson River
Railroad, from Hon. Chauncey M. Depew, President.

Photographs of Clouds, from Professor Riggenbach-Burckhardt, of
Basel, Switzerland.

Photographs of Clouds, from Captain D. Wilson-Barker, of London,
England.

Topographical Maps, from the United States Geological Survey.

The Laboratory collection will be soon extended by a number of
important maps, already ordered from samples seen in the
Geographical Exhibition of the Brooklyn Institute; and a con-
siderable number of geographical text-books by various authors
have already been secured in preparation for the proposed course
for teachers, during the coming year.

The materials here named, as well as those accumulated during
earlier years, are conveniently kept in the spacious Laboratory
storeroom, where cases and shelves have been prepared for them.
Among the most important of these materials is a complete set of
the weather maps of the United States Signal Service, from the
beginning of publication, for the most part in bound volumes, the
gift of the Chief Signal Officer several years ago. This set is

16

continued by the receipt of the current maps of the United States
Weather Bureau.

The records and collections of the New England Meteorological
Society are also kept in the Laboratory storeroom. Mr. J. Warren
Smith, lately of the United States Signal Service, and now of the
United States Weather Bureau, acting as assistant to the Society
in its capacity as a local weather service for New England, has
his office here.

During the winter, Mr. S. Ward Loper, of the United States
Geological Survey, classified the fossil fish collected under the
direction of Professor Davis from the Triassic formation of the
Connecticut valley, and now temporarily placed in the Laboratory
storeroom. An account of the results of this study has been
published, as stated below.

The publications of Professor Davis during the year are as
follows : —

Two Belts of Fossiliferous Black Shale in the Triassic Formation of
Connecticut. By W. M. Davis and §. W. Loper. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer-
ica, 1891, Vol. II. pp. 415-430.

Dr. Hann’s Studies on Cyclones and Anticyclones. Science, Jan. 2,
1891, Vol. XVII. pp. 4-5.

The Geographical Exhibition of the Brooklyn Institute. The Nation,
March 28, 1891, Vol. LII. p. 257.

Abstracts of Three Lectures delivered at Johns Hopkins University in
January, 1891: Tornadoes, a Story of a Long Inheritance; The Physical
Geography of Southern New England; The Triassic Sandstones of the
Connecticut Valley. Johns Hopkins University Circulars, April, 1891.

European Weather Predictions. Amer. Met. Journ., June, 1591, Vol.
VIIL., pp. 53-58.

The Story of a Long Inheritance. Atlantic Monthly, July, 1891, Vol.
LXVIII. pp. 68-78.

The Geological Dates of Origin of Certain Topographic Forms on the
Atlantic Slope of the United States. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, 1891,
Vol. II. pp. 541-886.

The instruction in Petrography was given by Dr. Wolff in the
new Petrographical Laboratory of the University Museum. During
the year the Lecture Room was fitted up for the microscopical pro-
jection of thin sections of rocks before the class. Six students
attended the course through the year, and one student spent the
year in original investigation.

17

The following papers were published during the year by Dr.
Wolff :—

On the Lower Cambrian Age of the Stockbridge Limestone at Rutland,
Vt. Bull. Geol. Soc. America.

On the Metamorphism of Clastic Feldspar in Conglomerate Schist.
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodlogy.

An investigation of some akmite trachytes from the Crazy
Mountains, Montana, was completed by Mr. R. S. Tarr and Dr.
Wolff (not yet published), and on other rocks of that range and
of New England. In the spring, the instructor began the field and
laboratory investigation of the Archean Highlands of New Jersey
and New York, in connection with the United States Geological
Survey.

18

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN ZOOLOGY.

By Proressor E. L. Marx.

Since the last report, courses of instruction in Zodlogy have
been somewhat rearranged. Corresponding to alterations in the
organization of the Faculty of Arts and Sciences, there has been
a change in the announcement of the courses, so that those previ-
ously designated as courses in Natural History are now named, from
their respective departments, Botany 1, 2, ete., and Zodlogy 1, 2,
etc. This has allowed a more natural sequence of the courses
announced in Zodlogy, which with their previous equivalents are
as follows :—

Zodlogy 1, formerly Nat. Hist. 2.

« 2. 6 . 5 (the Zoological half).
& 3, ‘“ “ 6.

“ 4, “ “ 13:

oe oO, a new course.

~ 10, formerly Nat. Hist. 21.

“ 20a, “ “ 9.

e 20 4, ik - 10.

With the exception of a new half-year course (Zodl. 5), the lec-
tures were substantially the same as those in 1889-90 and were
given by the same instructors.

Ninety-one students completed the course in Zodlogy 1. The As-
sistants were Mr. William E. Ritter, upon whom the most of the
laboratory work devolved, and Mr, J. C. Hubbard.

Zodlogy 2 was conducted as heretofore in the second half of
the year by Mr. G. H. Parker, and his Assistant in the labora-
tory work was again Dr. W. A. Setchell. There were thirty-four
students in this course.

i)

The course on the Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates (Zodl. 3)
was also given by Mr. Parker to twenty students.

There were nine students in Zodlogy 4, which covered about
the same ground as in the previous year. Mr. W. M. Woodworth
had charge of the laboratory work, and he also gratuitously assisted
the instructor in connection with the laboratory work of Zodlogy 5.
The latter course extended through the second half of the year,
and was taken by nine students. The lectures, on the Embryology
of Vertebrates, were accompanied by laboratory work on the de-
velopment of the Chick.

There were eight persons, all Graduates, engaged in special
researches (Zodl. 20a), as large a number as the Laboratory de-
signed for this purpose will accommodate. All the students in
this work made satisfactory progress with their investigations ; at
the last Commencement two of them received the degree of Ph. D.,
one the degree of S. D., and one the degree of A. M.

The following table shows the numbers and sources of the
students in Zodlogical courses : —

Class. Gr. Sen. | Jun. So. Fr. Sp. Sc. Total.
Zool. 1 3 12 9 21 21 18 7 91
2 1 9 4 12 3 1 4 34
oa 3 4 7 6 - 3 20
oe 4 5 ate 1 3 9
ae cA ToM bs tate ve 6 ac 1 2 9
OME voy eyo) se 3 1 oe 4
+ AV Gie 5 8 ; ore - 8

The removal of Professor Farlow’s Laboratory and the Cryp-
togamic Herbarium to the new Botanical section of the University
Museum has added a large room to the Zodlogical Laboratories.
By assigning this new room to the less advanced students in
microscopic work, it has been possible to relieve the over-
crowded condition of the room designed for students working
on advanced subjects.

The meetings of the Zodlogical Club have been well attended
during the year.

During the past year the following Contributions from the Zo6-
logical Laboratory, under Dr. Mark, have been published, all except
No. XXIII. in the Museum Bulletin : —

20

XIX. Cristatella: the Origin and Development of the Individual in the
Colony. By C. B. Davenport. 52 pp., 11 pls. November, 1890.

XX. The Eyes in Blind Crayfishes. By G. H. Parker. 10 pp., 1 pl.
November, 1890.

XXI. The Origin and Development of the Central Nervous System
of Limax maximus. By Annie P. Henchman. 40 pp., 10 pls. Decem-
ber, 1890.— This paper was the result of work done at the Museum
by Miss Henchman while a student in the “ Harvard Annex.”

XXII. The Parietal Eye in some Lizards from the Western United
States. By W. E. Ritter. 20 pp., 4 pls. January, 1891.

XXIII. Preliminary Notice on Budding in Bryozoa. By C. B. Daven-
port. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., Vol. XXV.[1890]. 5 pp. 1891.

XXIV. Contributions to the Morphology of Turbellaria.—I. On the
Structure of Phagocata gracilis, Leidy. By W.M. Woodworth. 44 pp.,
4 pls. April, 1891.— This paper was presented as a thesis for Ph. D.

XXYV. The Compound Eyes of Crustacea. By G.H. Parker. 98 pp.,
10 pls. May, 1891. — Presented as a thesis for S. D.

XXVI. On some Points in the Anatomy and Histology of Sipunculus
nudus, L. By Henry B. Ward. 42 pp., 3 pls. May, 1891.

XXVIII. The Development of the Pronephros and Segmental Duct in
Amphibia. By Herbert H. Field. 142 pp., 8 pls. June, 1891. — Pre-
sented as a thesis for Ph. D,

The plates are printed for papers by Mr. Davenport, “‘ Observa-
tions on Budding in Paludicella and some other Bryozoa,”’ — now
in press,—and by Mr. Frank Smith, ‘ Gastrulation of Aurelia
flavidula, Pér. & Les.” The papers by Mr. Smith and Mr. H. P.
Johnson are ready for the printer, and Mr. Boyer’s paper is to be
forwarded soon.

The greatest need of the Zodlogical Laboratories at present is
the equipment of the Aquarium and Vivarium, to which the Cura-
tor called attention in former Reports. It is to be regretted that
the department has been so long deprived of this essentiai acces-
sory to zodlogical work.

i = ee

REPORT ON THE OSTEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By D. D. Suave.

SEVERAL valuable additions have been made to the collection
since the last Report. Among the articulated skeletons, mention
should be made of the fine specimens of Baleena cisarctica, Phy-
seter macrocephalus, and Monodon monoceros, all of which have
been suspended in the main Exhibition Hall. The extreme rarity

of the Chlamydophoride among the Edentata renders the recent

possession of C. truncatus a most valuable acquisition. The dis-
articulated skeletons also comprise several of much interest to the
scientist and student. The entire collection is in good order and
preservation, and, while extremely valuable, is still sadly deficient
in many of the orders. Attempts have been made by the Assist-
ant, during the last few months, to induce some of the wealthy
friends of the University to contribute to a fund for the care and
increase of the collection, than which none can be more useful
and important in the pursuit of a scientific education. Although
not so successful as he could wish, perseverance may produce good
results in the near future.

Instruction has been given in Comparative Osteology during the
past year by means of lectures, laboratory work, and by frequent
examinations. The course has been attended by three Seniors and
by one Junior.

While this course, Zodlogy 10, is usually selected by those who
have the medical profession in view, it presents rare opportunities
for special study and research, both to the graduate and under-
graduate.

The following papers have been published during the year : —

The Significance of the Jugal Arch. Science, Vol. XVI. p. 582.

The Jugal Arch in the Primates. Science, Vol. XVII. p. 317, and Vol.
XVIII. p. 53.

On the Genus Chlamydophorus. American Naturalist, June, 1891,
p- 040.

to
lo

MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

Mr. Brewster has nothing of special interest to report in re-
gard to the Mammals and Birds during the past year. He has
been for some time in correspondence with collectors to bring
together birds from the islands of the Pacific for our Pacific
Faunal Room. He has published the following papers since the
appearance of the last Annual Report.

in *“ChesAnk- = =

“Summer Robin Roosts.”

“‘ A New Subspecies of the Solitary Sandpiper.”

“ Breeding of the Pileated Woodpecker in Worcester County, Massa-
chusetts.”

‘A Study of Florida Gallinules, with some Notes on a Nest found at
Cambridge, Massachusetts.”

“Notes on the Birds of the Lower Suwanee River.” (By William
Brewster and F. M. Chapman.)

“ Descriptions of Seven supposed new North American Birds.”

“ Notes on Bachman’s Warbler (/elminthophila Bachmant).”

“The Whistling Swan in Massachusetts.”

‘“* Megascops asio Macfarlanei, —a Correction.”

In “ Forest and Stream ’”’ : —

Two notes without formal titles, both relating to the whistling sounds
made by the American Woodcock while flying.

Ee

|

lo
(Sh)

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.

By SaMuEL GARMAN.

ContrisuTions to the collections in this department have been
made by Mr. H. L. Shumway, Dr. G. O. Rogers, Mr. J. E. Hall,
Dr. W. M. Haines, Prof. Walter Faxon, Mr. A. N. Cheney, Mr.
Eugene A. Browne, Mr. J. H. Blake, Miss I. Batchelder, and Prof.
Alexander Agassiz. In that made by Dr. Rogers, received through
the kindness of Prof. F. W. Putnam, there were a number of very
desirable Reptiles and Batrachians from Central Mexico.

Among the exchanges sent us there was a valuable series of
deep-sea types, secured by the French Government Expeditions
in the ‘“ Travailleur”’ and the “ Talisman,” forwarded by Prof.
Leon Vaillant from the Paris Museum. Another series of species
from the Kara Sea was received from Prof. Chr. Liitken, of the
Copenhagen Museum; and various Reptiles and Batrachians were
sent us by Dr. George Baur and Mr. A. L. Babcock.

By purchase, a number of choice representatives of West Indian,
African, and Australian species were obtained from the Linnea
Naturhistorisches Institut.

The outgoing exchanges were a comprehensive series of the
South American Siluroids to Dr. K. Kraepelin, of the Natur-
historisches Museum zu Hamburg; another to Prof. C. H. Higen-
mann, of Indiana University ; a lot of Deep-sea Fishes to Prof. R.
Collett, of Christiania, Norway; and others to Dr. George Baur,
of Clark University.

In connection with the continued preparations for the Exhibition
Rooms, certain Selachians, Reptiles, and Fishes have been sent to
Professor Ward for mounting. The condition of the collections as
a whole has been much improved; the waste from evaporation or
other causes has been comparatively small, and the number of
identified species from which exchanges may be made has been
considerably increased.

bo

4

The publications from this department include the follow-
ing, besides unsigned reviews and notices of works on related
subjects.

In the Bulletin of the Essex Institute : —

“On a Genus and Species of the Characines (Henochilus Wheatlandit,
gen. n. et sp. n.).”

“On Balistes vetula.”

“Silurus (Parasilurus) Aristotelis.”

“The Gila Monster (Heloderma suspectum).”

“On a Tortoise found in Florida and Cuba.”

In the Twenty-fifth Annual Report of the Commissioners on
Inland Fisheries of Massachusetts : —
‘“‘ Massachusetts Carp.”

“The River or Brown Trout.”
“‘ New England Saibling.”

In ** The Nation ” : —
“The Blizzard Fossils.”

In “ Forest and Stream ”’ : —
“The Golden Trout.”

In the ‘‘ American Angler,” and in “ Shooting and Fishing” : —

“The Alpine Trout.”

‘The Freshwater Salmon.”

“ Salmo alpinus, 1758 — S. aureolus, 1888.”
“* Nova Scotian Salmon.”

“The Sunapee Saibling.”’

“ A new Trout from Maine.”

“The Sunapee Trout (Salmo alpinus).”

CRUSTACEA.

TuE only items of importance mentioned by Professor Faxon
in regard to the Crustacea are the accessions received from Mr.
Charles Chilton from New Zealand, and the Crustacea of the
Dijmphna Expedition, presented to the Museum by the Director
of the Zodlogical Museum of the University of Copenhagen. A
few dried Crustacea have also been purchased from Ward for
our Exhibition Rooms.

REPORT ON THE PALZZONTOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By ALpHeus Hyatt.

THE work of the past year has been marked by a notable advance
towards completion of the general arrangement of the Inverte-
brates. With the exception of certain small collections of Permian
and Triassic Fossils in Room C which still remain undivided, and
a collection of slabs and undeveloped materials which have been
placed in cases reserved for such purposes in Room A, the larger
part of all the fossils of each class have been brought together
in the following order: the Protozoa, Sponges, Hydroids, Corals,
and Echinoderms in Room A; the Worms, Bryozoa, Brachiopods,
Insects, Crustacea, and Trilobites in Room B; the Lamellibranchs,
Pteropods, and the larger part of the Gasteropods in Room C; and
the remaining Gasteropods and all the Cephalopods in Room D.
There still remain, in all of the collections which have not been
carefully gone over specimen by specimen, a considerable pro-
portion of misplaced fossils, which can only be weeded out by very
close work. This is the case especially in those collections, such
as the Schary, Dyer, Day, and others, which contain considerable
amounts of unnamed specimens. During the progress of this re-
vision, a large number of choice Fossils suitable for exhibition in
the Stratigraphic Collection were picked out and marked with
appropriate labels. Although the separation of the classes into
genera has made considerable progress in past years, and in some
classes may be said to be well advanced, it is hopeless to expect
to complete this for any one of these natural divisions until the
general arrangement has been practically finished.

This work, and that of picking out specimens for exhibition in the
Stratigraphic Collection, can now be continued with much greater
facility. Blue print maps are hung in each room giving floor plans
with the cases in white, and upon these the number of each case is
given and brief abstracts of its contents. Each case has an out-
side label hanging to the knob of the sash giving a number and a

27

synopsis of the contents, so that any material may be as quickly
found as is practicable in the present condition of the collections.
This system admits of constant alteration and replacement of maps
and labels as the arrangement progresses, an obvious advantage
which does not need explanation.

The Assistant has finished the systematic collection of Cephalo-
pods on exhibition, and a full presentation of the genera has been
given. The collections contain a very large proportion of the ori-
ginal types of all the genera yet described in this class, and of the
remaining genera good examples of all except a few recently pub-
lished in Europe. This exhibition is therefore probably the most
complete now in existence as an exposition of the range of natural
modifications in this important class of Fossils.

The Sponges, Hydroids, and Echinoderms have been more or less
worked upon for the purpose of getting together all of the forms in
each genus, thus preparing the way for the permanent arrangement
and the final selection and naming of specimens for exhibition.
Some of the more important families of the Lamellibranchs in the
Jura and Cretaceous have been similarly treated, and are almost
completed.

By the kind permission of Alexander Agassiz, Director, the
extensive foreign collections in the Trias and Jura of the Museum
have been placed at my disposal for the study and comparison of
our American species with the typical European forms. The great
advantages thus gained will be appreciated by all professional pale-
ontologists, especially those engaged in similar work, but obliged
to rely solely upon foreign publications. These collections will
require considerable time to bring them into proper shape for this
purpose, since much of the material has been acquired in separate
lots from different collectors, and needs to be concentrated and
arranged. This work has been begun and an appreciable advance
made during the past year.

Besides efficient services in connection with the general arrange-
ment and superintendence of the removal and placing of fossils, the
department is indebted to Dr. R. T. Jackson for a large amount
of work in the revision of the Mollusca, Corals, and Brachiopods,
which contained unarranged material and considerable special work
upon some smaller groups.

Miss Clark has been employed in preparing labels, and dusting
and remounting specimens. It became necessary to remount a very

28

large number of the specimens in the older parts of the collections
which had been glued to card boards. These were in no danger of
being lost or materially damaged, but had cracked off and were
lying loose in the trays. It is probable, in consequence of the more
durable glue now used and the fact that the trays have reached
their final destination in the Museum, that this work will not
require to be done over again.

The following papers were published during the year by the
assistants in this department : —

Guides for Science Teaching, No. VIII. Insecta, by Alpheus Hyatt
and J. M. Arms. 323 pages, illustrated by 223 figures. D. C. Heath &
Co., Boston, 1890.

The Next Stage in the Development of Public Parks. By Alpheus
Hyatt. Atlantic Monthly, February, 1891.

Dall on Dynamical Influences in Evolution. By R. T. Jackson. Am.
Nat., October, 1890.

Studies of Pelecypoda. By Robert Tracy Jackson. Am. Nat.,
December, 1890, p. 1182.

The Mechanical Origin of Structure in Pelecypods. Am. Nat., January,
1891, p. 11.

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.

By Miss F. M. Sracx.

Dourinc the year ending September 1, 1891, the Library has
received 705 volumes, of which 57 are atlases, 1,998 parts, and 147
pamphlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS

Citra - iets, «Pael ois. 8 43 20
recA CMe mes Wek. Sc) ) sic fee fre ie ep oe AS 854 84
IMCURSOMMCMTAN sy (o. otel «sel ee o* Sante 240 10
PARP OHS IZM fie ssele det Ree sis a os. OO 841 31
UI OBEALCSH. Ns ses te ac ise ts +) ie coe
MMiimeyeiIprarye ef le i ee Gs 8 Od 20 2

705 1998 147

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the greater part of the Whitney Library) is
19,807. There are 18,281 pamphlets bound in 2,182 volumes,
making the total number of volumes 21,989.

50

[A]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1890-91.

Of the Bulletin.

Vol. XX. [Complete.]

No. 2. On the Rate of GrowrTH oF Corats. By A. Acassiz. pp. 4. 4 Plates.
August, 1890.

No. 8. Preliminary Account of the Foss1r Mammats from the White River and
Loup Forki Formations. Part II. Carnivora and ArTiopacty.La, by
W. B. Scorr. PeErissopactyxta, by H. F. Osporn. pp. 36. 38 Plates.
November, 1890.

No. 4. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory.— XIX. CrisTATELLA:
the Origin and Development of the Individual in the Colony. By C. B.
DavENPoRT. pp. 52. 11 Plates. November, 1890.

No. 5. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. — XX. The Eyes in
Buinp CrayYFisHEsS. By G. H. Parker. pp. 12. 1 Plate. November,
1890.

No. 6. Notice of Catamocrinus DiomMED&, a New Stalked Crinoid from the
Galapagos, dredged by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross.”
By A. Acassiz. pp.4. December, 1890.

No. 7. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. — XXI. The Origin and
Development of the Centrat Nervous System in Limax Maximus. By
Annie P. HencHMaAN. pp. 40. 10 Plates. December, 1890.

No. 8. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. — XXII. The ParrEeTaL
Eye in some Lizarps from the Western United States. By W. E. Rirrer.
pp. 20. 4 Plates. January, 1891.

Vol. XXI. [Complete.]

No.1. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXIV. Contributions
to the Morphology of the TurBextiaria. I. On the Structure of PHaco-
CATA GRACILIS, Leidy. By W. M. Woopwortu. pp. 44. 4 Plates. April,
1891. ;

No. 2. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXV. The Compounp

Eyes in Crustaceans. By G. H. Parker. pp. 98. 10 Plates. May,
1891.

No.

31

3. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory.—XXVI. On some
Points in the Morphology and Histology of SirpuNcuLus nupus, L. By
H. B. Warp. pp. 42. 3 Plates. May, 1891.

No. 4. Turee Letters from ALEXANDER AGassiz to the Hon. Marshall

McDonald, on the Drepeine OpPEeRATions off the West Coast of Central
America to the Galapagos, to the West Coast of Mexico, and in the Gulf of
California, carried on by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ Albatross.”
pp. 16. June, 1891.

. 5. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. — XX VII. The De-

velopment of the PronepHROS and SEGMENTAL Duct in Ampuipia. By
H. H. Fretp. pp. 140. 8 Plates. June [August], 1891.

o2

[B]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HARVARD COLLEGE, SEPT. 1, 1890.

Sturgis-Hooper Fond ... . « 2 «- «+. © © «© s, 2 So sc Sinema ete
Graye nnd!) ois. Me) ic. ie Gr aap Paps wero nets mkt 50,000.00
Agassiz’Memorial Fund . . =). s 4 «© 3 << 2 = 2)<c) ellee) memnCOIMOCenne
Teachers'and Pupils Fund) 62 (2...) 3) =) |) ec oe 7,594.01
Permanent Fund. «2.0 50 es -0 20% (5 Bb Se es biol one En rea
Humboldt Fond’ «0%. 20 Sw. ees ee ee ee 7,740.66

$580,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on Vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of which
is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in an analysis
of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund can be applied for the benefit of one or more
students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport Marine Laboratory,
the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl, or elsewhere.

Applications for the Tables reserved for advanced students at the Newport Ma-
rine Laboratory, and for the Tables at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made to
the Curator of the Museum before the lst of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

ANNUAL REPORT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,
PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

1891-92.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.

1892.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. WALCOTT.

OFFICERS.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .
HERMANN A. HAGEN .
NATHANIEL S. SHALER.
EK. L. MARK rat Bree
WILLIAM MORRIS DAVIS .
J. ELIOT WOLFF .
THADDEUS W. HARRIS .
W. M. WOODWORTH

C. B. DAVENPORT
ROBERT T. JACKSON .
WALTER FAXON .

DD SLADE.

SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER.
ALPHEUS HYATT
SAMUEL HENSHAW
MISS F. M. SLACK
MAGNUS WESTERGREN .
H. M. KELLY.

W. S. NICKERSON

RICHARD ELWOOD DODGE .

J. BACKUS WOODWORTH .
LEON S. GRISWOLD
GEORGE E. LADD

ROBERT DeECOURCEY WARD

H. LANDES oa
CHARLES L. WHITLE .

Director and Curator.

Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Entomology.

Professor of Geology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.

Professor of Physical Geography.
Assistant Professor of Petrography.
Jnstructor in Geology.

Instructor in Microscopical Anatomy.
Instructor in Zoélogy.

Instructor in Paleontology.

Assistant in Zodlogy in charge of Invertebrates.
Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
Assistant in Paleontology.

Assistant in Entomology.

Librarian.

Artist.

Assistant in the Zotlogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Zotlogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geographical Laboratory.
Assistant in the Geographical Laboratory.
Assistant in the Petrographical Laboratory.

dil ial es be at Le

To THE PRESIDENT AND FEeLLows oF HARVARD COLLEGE: —

DuRING the past year the usual courses of instruction have
been given at the Museums in Zoédlogy by Professor Mark, Dr.
Slade, and Mr. Davenport, assisted in the Laboratory work by
Messrs. W. M. Woodworth, W. 8. Nickerson, J. C. Hubbard,
and H. M. Kelly.

Professors Whitney, Shaler, Davis, and Wolff gave courses of
instruction in Geology, Paleontology, Physical Geography, and
Petrography. Messrs. Harris, Dodge, Kummel, J. B. Wood-
worth, R. DeC. Ward, Westgate, and R. T. Jackson were the
Assistants in the Undergraduate instruction of the Geological
Department.

For the details of these courses of instruction, as well as of
the summer courses in Geology, I would refer to the accompany-
ing special reports of the Professors and Instructors.

The Reports upon the instruction given in Natural History at
the Museum show how little of the work of our Professors is
devoted to fostering original research or advanced studies. The
fact is, that the Undergraduate classes have become so large, and
their demands upon the time of the Professors so pressing, that
the function of the latter of encouraging, as University Profes-
sors, the attendance of advanced students at Harvard is reduced
to a minimum. In fact, the time which our Professors give to
elementary teaching is entirely out of proportion to that allowed
them for higher instruction. Thus the facilities for original
investigation which might be attained at the Museum, and for
which it was primarily intended, have been thrown away for

4

many years, owing to the inability of the authorities to appoint
men whose duties should lie in this direction.

For more than twenty years it has been my aim gradually to
provide room and materials for such a purpose, and it is not
encouraging to find that the time and means thus spent have
been so unproductive of better results.

It is not the province of the Museum to provide the necessary
instructors, — that belongs to the University ; but it is time that
the authorities of the Museum should protest against the ascen-
dency of the Undergraduate instruction, which threatens to over-
come the higher purposes of the institution, and to render it
comparatively useless for the progress of science and for the more
advanced studies. Itis time that the original aim of the Museum
should be reasserted, and its highest usefulness be made ayail-
able. The appointment by the University of half a dozen men
to the Natural History Department, to carry on original investi-
gation themselves, and to direct the work of advanced students,
would go far towards placing the Museum on a more active
plane. We need teachers in Entomology, in Vertebrate and
Invertebrate Zodlogy and Paleontology, as well as in Marine
Zoology ; additional assistants to the Professors and Instructors
already teaching are needed to fill the gaps in our advanced in-
struction. One of the first requisites in carrying out such plans
is the removal of the Undergraduate instruction to a new part
of the University Museum, the space for which remains in the
vacant southwest corner of the Oxford Street facade of the
Museum.

It is a surprise to me to find how little seems to be known in
this country regarding the publications of the Museum, and the
facilities for teaching in our Natural History Laboratories. In
a recent circular of information issued by the Bureau of Educa-
tion,! the account given of the Museum Laboratories is very un-
satisfactory. This, however, is explained from the unscientific
method of preparation of the circular. Our Annual Reports
have evidently not been consulted, and the mere sending out of
circulars and blanks to be filled up can never supply the requi-

1 Bureau of Education Circular of Information No. 9, 1891. Biological Teaching
in the Colleges of the United States, by John P. Campbell, A. B., Ph. D. (Johns
Hopkins), Professor of Biology in the University of Georgia. Washington, Govern-
ment Printing Office, 1891.

oS)

site data for the compilation of an authoritative report such as
this circular purports to be. The author who supposes that such
loose methods of obtaining information can take the place of
eareful reference to official reports, or of personal acquaintance
with a subject, shows his ignorance of the most rudimentary
principles of attacking a scientific problem.

Considerable correspondence has taken place with the officials
of the Educational Exhibits and of the Fishery Exhibits of
the Columbian Exposition in regard to a representation of the
Museum at Chicago. Instructing as it might be to the public
to send photographs and a description of the institution as it
now stands, this would entail a very considerable outlay both
of time and money, neither of which is at the disposal of the
officers of the Museum for such a purpose.

The Newport Marine Laboratory has, as usual, been placed at
the disposal of the advanced students in Zodlogy, and its tables
have been occupied by Messrs. Davenport, Ward, Kelly, Kofoid,
Mayer, Weysse, Lucas, Woodworth, and Gerould, who were occu-
pied during their stay in collecting material for their special in-
vestigations. The work of the students was principally devoted
to the embryology of Mollusks, of Acalephs, and of Echinoderms.
Mr. Woodworth was kind enough in my absence to put the
Laboratory in working order for the opening of the season.

We have to thank Colonel Marshall McDonald, United States
Fish Commissioner, for facilities granted our students in con-
nection with their work at the Fish Commission Station at
Wood’s Holl. |

In connection with the Newport Laboratory, it is a pleasure to
me to report that the Museum has received from Major Theo-
dore K. Gibbs, of Newport, the sum of five thousand dollars to
establish the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship Fund, the in-
come of which is to be devoted to assisting students interested
in the study of Marine Zodlogy. The conditions which regulate
the use of the income of this Scholarship are similar to those of
the Tyndall Fellowship, and are given in Appendix B to this
Report.

But little change has taken place in any of the Exhibition
Rooms now open to the public. The model of the East Coast
of the United States has been placed in the Geographical Room,
but unfortunately we have been unable to make any progress

6

in its final arrangement, or in that of the Geological Exhibition
Room. Extensive changes have been undertaken in the North
American Faunal Room to accommodate the Greene Smith Col-
lection of Birds.

We have continued to fill a few of the gaps existing in our
collections by purchases, mainly from Ward. Our greatest de-
siderata are now in the African Room, where we should have, in
order to make the collection more characteristic, a good Hippo-
potamus, a Giraffe, and a few additional Antelopes. . We have
devoted one of the wall cases of that room to the Fauna of Mad-
agascar. All the Lemurs and other characteristic Madagascar
Mammals, as well as the few Madagascar Birds formerly in our
African Faunal Collection, have now been placed in the cases
devoted to the Fauna of Madagascar. It is astonishing to see
how the peculiar mammalian fauna of that island gains in dis-
tinctness, now that it is separated from its African surroundings.
This and the Australian faunal exhibits show at a glance the
value of such an arrangement in our Museum.

The rooms containing the Quaternary Pampas Vertebrate Fos-
sils, and a few Tertiary Mammals, are now open to the public.
No more interesting exhibit could be made than by supplement-
ing what has already been placed on exhibition with a series of
our North American Fossil Vertebrates.

The collections of the Museum continue in good condition. I
regret that Dr. Hagen’s prolonged ill-health has made it impossi-
ble for him to attend to his usual duties at the Museum. Owing
to our insufficient means, we have been unable to continue Pro-
fessor Hyatt’s salary at the Museum. He has, however, kindly
consented to keep a general snpervision over the paleontological
collections, which of course suffer less from want of attention
than our more perishable zodlogical material. It has been found
necessary to give more care to the latter, and Professor Walter
Faxon has been placed in charge of the Invertebrate collections.

Professor Edmond Perrier has returned the Starfishes of the
‘* Blake’ which had been sent to him for examination, and has
at the same time presented to the Museum, in behalf of the
Jardin des Plantes, an extensive series of the Starfishes of the
‘** Talisman” expedition, types of the species described by him.

Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards has now returned the
“Blake” Crustacea, with the exception of the Galatheoids, which

ld
‘

he has kept for comparison while working up the Crustacea of
the “ Talisman.”

Professor Verrill still has in his possession the Alcyonoids of
the “ Blake” expedition, and reports fair progress in their deter-
mination ; he also reports that Miss Bush’s paper on the Northern
Atlantic Mollusks collected by the “Blake” during the expedi-
tion of 1880 is nearly ready for publication.

Professor Milne-Edwards’s Memoir on the Paguride of the
“Blake” is now in press. The plates have been completed, and
we hope to publish it early this winter.

Considerable progress has also been made in the press-work of
the Special Bulletin No. 2 of the National Museum, which will
contain the Deep-sea Fishes of the “ Blake,” by Professor Goode
and Dr. Bean.

We have received during the year an anonymous contribution,
to be applied to the increase of Dr. Hagen’s salary. The Cor-
poration have kindly consented to assume a part of Dr. Hagen’s
salary, and charge it upon the retiring allowance fund. This
has enabled me to engage Mr. Samuel Henshaw to devote some
time to the care of the collection, and to superintend its use by
specialists.

Among the principal additions to our collections I may men-
tion two skins of the Wingless Rail from the Sandwich Islands,
presented by the Hon. 8. B. Dole of Honolulu; also, by pur-
chase, a small collection of the principal birds of the Hawaian
group, intended for the Pacific Exhibition Room.

From Ward we have obtained a magnificent alligator for the
North American Room.

We have to thank Mr. Charles Wachsmuth for a number
of interesting Fossil Crinoids.

The fine Rhytina skeleton presented to us by the Smithsonian
Institution has been mounted by Ward and placed in the Pacific
Room. We have also received from the National Museum a
cast of the well known Trilobite, with its appendages, described
by Mr. C. D. Walcott; and from Mr. N. P. Miller, a collection
of Starfishes from Alaska. Professor Mitsukuri of the Impe-
rial University of Tokio has presented a fine Metacrinus, and
a Hyalonema from off Misaka, as well as specimens of Astacus
and of the Ditrema so common in Japanese waters. From a
comparison of this viviparous perch with our Californian Em-

—_ oe

=

8

biotocoid I find that it corresponds to the American genus
Micrometrus of Gibbons.

Since the Hume Collection of Indian Birds was presented to
the Museum we have not received from any quarter so valuable
an addition to our stock as the Collection of North American
Birds presented to the Museum by Mrs. Greene Smith, of Peter-
borough, N. Y. The terms upon which the collection has been
given to the Museum are most liberal, and while the collection
will remain intact as the Greene Smith Collection, it will at the
same time form the bulk of our collection of North American
Birds, just as the Hume Collection practically forms the Bird
Collection of the Indian Room. The Greene Smith Collection
is well known to ornithologists as perhaps the most complete
and best mounted collection of North American Birds brought
together by a private individual. The Museum is fortunate in
being chosen by Mrs. Smith as the recipient of so valuable a col-
lection, and we have to thank her most cordially for the liberal
conditions which she attaches to the gift. (See Appendix C.)

We have to thank the Swiss Confederation for sending us,
through the Polytechnicum, a large number of topographical
maps published by that government.

We owe to Mr. Binney the plates which accompany the last
Supplement to his North American Land Shells, published in the
Museum Bulletin.

The Museum has sent to Dr. Dall for examination a small
collection of Tertiary Fossils from the Isthmus of Panama, sent
us by Mr. F. Sousa.

The remainder of our collection of Bats has been forwarded
to the Marquis Doria, at Genoa, for examination.

We have also sent out for examination small collections of
Reptiles, of Sharks, and of Fishes to Messrs. Goode and Bean.

A number of Crinoids have been sent to Mr. Wachsmuth
for comparison.

A number of European geologists, who attended the Inter-
national Congress of Geologists held at Washington last year,
visited the Museum, and examined, as far as practicable, some
of the special collections in which they were interested.

That part of the collections of the ‘* Albatross” expedition
of 1891 which is to be worked up at Cambridge has been re-
ceived in excellent condition, with the exception of the Aca-

i)
$}

9

lephs, which I fear will hardly give me the material I hoped to
have at my disposal when the collections were made. Mr. Wes-
tergren, the artist who accompanied me on the “ Albatross,” is
now at work at the Museum, and has completed a number of
the plates intended to illustrate the monograph of Mr. Faxon
on the Crustacea of the expedition. He will next devote his
time to the Fishes and the Echini.

With few exceptions, the remaining collections are now in the
hands of the specialists who have kindly consented to work them
up. Short preliminary reports are already under way to illus-
trate the more novel types. Among them is a notice by Professor
Ludwig of some interesting Holothurians, with sketches of the
species in their natural attitudes, from drawings made on board by
Mr. Westergren and myself. Professor Ludwig also informs me
that he has already finished the descriptive text of three families,
and that a number of plates of Holothurians are well under way.
Dr. Goés has finished a notice of the gigantic Foraminifer men-
tioned in my Preliminary Report, and described by him as a new

- genus (Neusina). Both these papers will shortly be published.

Preliminary reports have also been made to Colonel McDon-
ald, the United States Fish Commissioner, by Mr. Ridgway,
on the Birds of the Galapagos, and on the small collection of
Insects by Dr. Riley.

Colonel McDonald has shown the greatest interest in the
collections of the ** Albatross,” and has given me his cordial co-
operation in their final distribution. He assigned to Mr. Richard
Rathbun the care of the large collections on their arrival. at
Washington, and the cordial thanks of the naturalists who are
to work up this valuable material are due to him for the thorough
manner in which he has accomplished the laborious and thankless
task of forwarding from Washington to their destinations the
different collections, with the consent of the Fish Commissioner.

I have myself published in the Museum Bulletin a preliminary
account of the “ Albatross” expedition, and have described in
the Memoirs the interesting Stalked Crinoid, Calamocrinus, dis-
covered by the “ Albatross”’ off the Galapagos.

We have also received from Captain Tanner of the “ Albatross’
an interesting collection from intermediate depths from the sur-
face to three hundred fathoms, made with the Tanner tow-net in
1892, during the exploration for a telegraphic cable from California

)

=

?

10

to the Sandwich Islands. A preliminary examination of the ma-
terial apparently confirms the views expressed in my preliminary
report of the ‘‘ Albatross’ expedition regarding the bathymetrical
distribution of pelagic life.

The Comatule of the ** Blake,” which were in the hands of the
late Dr. P. H. Carpenter, have been sent to Dr. Hartlaub of Got-
tingen, who will work them up in connection with those of the
“ Albatross.” I have to thank Mr. Percy Sladen for the trouble
he has taken in making the transfer to Dr. Hartlaub.

I consider myself most fortunate in having the opportunity to
take charge of the publications of so interesting an expedition as
that of the * Albatross” in 1891. Iam sure that I represent the
views of scientific men in expressing a regret that so little has
thus far been published in connection with the Fish Commission
work regarding the marine fauna of the east coast of the United
States, considering the splendid opportunities which have been
supplied. It seems strange that Congress should not have made
liberal appropriations for the working up by specialists of the
magnificent collections brought together during so many years
by the vessels of the Fish Commission.

A collection of Deep-sea Echini and Ophiurans, from the
various deep-sea explorations sent out under the auspices of
the Coast Survey, has been sent to the British Museum, in
exchange for similar material given to the Museum by the
** Challenger” expedition.

Appendix A of this Report contains a list of the publications
of the Museum issued during the past academic year. We have
published four numbers of the Bulletin, forming Volume XXII.
of the series, and three numbers of the twenty-third volume. Of
the quarto Memoirs two numbers have been published. The
independent publications of the gentlemen connected with the
Museum will be found enumerated with their reports. The Li-
brary continues to increase, and our exchange list is on a most
satisfactory footing.

I give herewith plans and different views of the Newport
Marine Laboratory, showing its present condition. The Lab-
oratory was fully described in my Report of 1876-77. Its effi-
ciency has been increased by the addition, on the second floor,
of a photographic room and microphotographic apparatus. An
additional room of considerable size has also been attached to

i

the building, to be used as a library and a private laboratory for
myself. The unit adopted for the working space of each indi-
vidual has been slightly increased in the new room, and as now
planned it will be a simple proposition to erect a new Laboratory
for general purposes and for special investigation by adopting
the dimensions now in use for each table.

As it has gradually become apparent that each institution will
eventually wish to control its own Marine Laboratory, and that
no co-operation is possible between the different Universities,
it has occurred to me that some expansion of the Newport Ma-
rine Laboratory might meet the demands of Harvard University.
I would here say that various attempts have been made at such
co-operation without success. At the time the Anderson School
was abandoned, an appeal was made to the Colleges through-
out the country to establish a central zodlogical station, but it
received no encouragement. A second attempt was made, in
connection with the late Professor Baird, to interest the Natural
History departments of the larger Universities in supporting a
laboratory for research at Wood’s Holl in connection with that of
the Fish Commission. This likewise failed. Since then the inde-
pendent action of the Johns Hopkins University, of the Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania, of the University of California, of the
Leland Stanford Jr. University, and of others, confirms the im-
pression that every such institution is to have its own establish-
ment for modern zodlogical research.

But if a central laboratory is no longer to be thought of, it may
be practicable to form an international association of marine lab-
oratories, the members of which will exchange the facilities each
may possess, so that all may share in the advantages of position
as regards special opportunities for investigation at the different
stations. Orit might be that with the help of such joint action
an association might be formed for the establishment of a marine
laboratory within the tropics in the vicinity of a coral reef.
While many such schemes loom up as possibilities, in view of the
increased interest in this kind of research, the more immediate
and important question is whether Harvard, like other Univer-
sities, shall have a marine laboratory to facilitate the research of
her own students.

Towards this something might be done in the near neighbor-
hood of my own laboratory at Newport, if the necessary means

12

can be raised. In some form or other, I have had this in mind
since 1876, when the Marine Laboratory at Newport was opened,
to which a certain number of the more advanced students of
Harvard University were regularly invited. In doing this, I
had always hoped that the time might come for joining with
other institutions in establishing a more general laboratory for
research. Such a plan has become impracticable, as we have
seen ; but it still seems to me that if Harvard is to have a ma-
rine laboratory of her own, the conditions at Newport are very
favorable.

I would therefore propose that whenever sufficient means can
be obtained a large Laboratory for research should be built on the
east side of the cove on which my own Laboratory is placed, and
that a dwelling-house for the use of students be erected on a
suitable lot in the immediate vicinity. <A large sea-going launch,
suitable for dredging within fifty to seventy-five miles from New-
port, is also needed, to give better collecting facilities than we
have had before, and to supply larger material for the work of
the Laboratory.

Until this shall be accomplished, a certain number of advanced
students will continue to make use, as hitherto, of the limited
room and facilities afforded by the existing Laboratory. But it
is evident that whatever can be offered will only be an adjunct
as it were of the larger establishment which must soon be neces-
sary if Harvard is to keep pace with sister Universities in this
department of study.

For the less advanced students it would be necessary to equip
the aquarium planned for the Museum, and it would be possible,
with our facilities, to provide during the summer months for the.
instruction in marine zodlogy of a large number of students at
a comparatively small expense, and thus to limit the use of the
smaller Laboratory at Newport to the more advanced students.

The addition of a large public Aquarium to the equipment of
the Newport Laboratory would be an important adjunct. A most
interesting and instructive public exhibit could easily be made
from the more common marine animals of this part of our coast,
and it is quite possible to obtain the support of a sufficient
number of the residents of Newport in the establishment of an
Aquarium, as considerable interest has always been manifested
in such a project. The Aquarium once built and in running

‘a
“

Bee. a

15

order, there is little doubt that its ordinary expenses could be
met by annual subscriptions and by the small admission fees
charged to the transient public. |

It would of course be of immense advantage if the Laboratory
could control a large steamer of about two hundred feet in length,
to be used for research and as a peripatetic laboratory for explo-
ration along all parts of our coast or elsewhere. Such facilities,
however, demand a large original outlay and a large annual ex-
penditure. From $75,000 to $100,000 would be needed for the
equipment of the vessel, and an annual income of from $25,000
to $30,000 to run it to advantage, and to provide the means of
publication for the Station. Such an equipment would, however,
be unique among the stations now in existence, and nothing
would tend to develop more rapidly our knowledge of the
natural history of the sea than such a vessel, well equipped and
in charge of a director competent to undertake even distant ex-
peditions devoted to the solution of some special problem of
thalassography,

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CamprinGe, October 1, 1892,

14

REPORTS ON THE GEOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

I. REPORT ON THE COURSES OF INSTRUCTION.

By Proressors J. D. Wuitney, N. S. SHater, W. M. Davis, anp ASSISTANT
PrRoFEssor J. E. WOLFF.

DurinG the Academic year 1891-92, the following named
courses of instruction were given in the laboratories and in the
field by the instructors in the department.

Instruction in Geology.

1. Geol. 4. A half-course in Elementary Geology ; two lectures a week
by N.S. Shaler, with one hour for special exercises conducted by R. E.
Dodge, Assistant in Geology, with required reading in Dana’s Manual of
Geology. In the spring, voluntary excursions were made to points of
geological interest in the vicinity of Cambridge under the guidance of the
assistant. The course was attended by two hundred and forty-six students.

2. Geol. 5. A half-course of Practical Geological Exercises in the
Laboratory and in the field, with occasional lectures by T. W. Harris, as-
sisted by H. B. Kummel; designed especially for those who intend in
subsequent years to continue the study of Geology and Paleontology.
Half-course, with two-hour exercises, twice a week. Attended by eighty-
seven students.

3. Geol. 8. A course of Advanced Geology, two lectures a week, and
for a part of the year three, by N. S. Shaler, with an additional hour for
review of assigned reading conducted by J. B. Woodworth. Students in
this course were required during the second term to prepare theses on sub-
jects chosen with the advice of their instructors. During the first and
third terms, eight half-day excursions were made into the field in the vicin-
ity of Cambridge, under the guidance of J. E. Wolff and J. B. Woodworth.
Those only who passed a satisfactory examination in the elementary courses
were permitted to attend. Fifty-six students received this instruction.

4. Geol. 9. A course in the Structural and Dynamical Geology of the
stratified rocks, by T. W. Harris. Two lectures a week, with required
reading and theses. ‘This course was attended by seven students.

15

5. Geol. 18. A course in Economical Geology, by J. D. Whitney,
assisted by L. G. Westgate. Lectures twice a week, with required read-
ing and theses. Attended by twenty-eight students.

6. Geol. 22. A course in field-work and geological surveying, designed
to afford special training, with work in the library and the preparation of
geological reports, under the direction of N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis, J. E.
Wolff, and T. W. Harris. Conferences were held once a week during the
year. This course is open only to those who have attained satisfactory
grades in Courses 8, S. 2, and in either Chemistry C or 2. It was attended
by seventeen students.

Instruction in Paleontology.

7. Geol. 14. A course in Palzontology, by N.S. Shaler, assisted in
the Laboratory by R. T. Jackson. Two lectures a week, with four hours’
laboratory work and theses. This course was attended by eleven students.

8. Geol. 15. A course in Historical Geology, designed to train ad-
vanced students in the use of fossils in determining geological horizons,
by N.S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. This course was taken by
one student.

9. Geol. 24. A course in Paleontological Research, under the direc-
tion of N. S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. Attended by one student.

Instruction in Meteorology and Physical Geography.

10. Geol. 1. <A half-course in Elementary Meteorology, by W. M.
Davis, assisted by R. DeC. Ward. ‘Two lectures a week, with two hours
of laboratory work and recitation, first half-year. Attended by eighty-
four students.

11. Geol. 2. A half-course in Physical Geography, by W. M. Davis,
assisted by R. DeC. Ward. ‘Two lectures a week, with two hours of reci-
tation and laboratory work, once a week, second half-year. Attended by
one hundred and seven students.

12. Geol. 20. A course in Advanced Meteorology and Physical Geo-
graphy, by W. M. Davis. Conferences held once a week. Attended by
eight students.

Instruction in Petrography.

13. Geol. 12. A course in Petrography, by J. E. Wolff. Two lec-
tures a week, with laboratory work, theses, and field work. Attended by
thirteen students. ;

14. Geol. 23. A course in Petrographic Research, by J. E. Wolff.
Field and laboratory work. Attended by four students.

16

Instruction in Summer Schools.

15. Geol. S. 1. An elementary course, beginning July 6th and lasting
five weeks, was held in Cambridge, in the Geological Laboratory, by T. W.
Harris and H. B. Kummel. This course is parallel to Geology 5, as given
in the University. Meetings were held five days each week, with field-
work in the vicinity of Cambridge. One excursion was made to the Cam-
brian and Carboniferous deposits in the town of Attleborough, Mass.
This course was attended by sixteen students.

16. Geol. S. 2. An advanced course in field-work on the geology of
the stratified rocks was given at the following places during the summer
of 1892. The class met at Utica, N. Y., July 7, under the charge of
T. W. Harris. On July 20, the class moved to Catskill, N. Y., and on
the 4th of August went to Meriden, Conn., where the work of the class
was in charge of H. B. Kummel. . This course closed on August 19.
Twelve students attended the course.

17. Geol. S. 3. A half-course in independent field investigation and
geological surveying, under the supervision of N. S. Shaler, W. M. Davis,
J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris. Two parties of students began work in
this course in Eastern Massachusetts in the summer of 1892, one with
Dr. Harris on the Structure of the Boston Basin, and a second with J. B.
Woodworth on the Carboniferous and Cambrian Rocks of Norfolk and
Bristol Counties. The work in this course lasts for six weeks, and will
be completed before October Ist. Six students have taken this instruction.

Additional Instruction.

During the year, the students in the advanced courses at-
tended regular Tuesday evening meetings in the Geological Labo-
ratory, which were designed to serve the purpose accomplished
by the Seminaria of the German Universities. A number of the
papers read at these conferences have been announced in the
College Calendar. In addition to the papers presented by stu-
dents, a paper was read by Baron de Geer, of Sweden, ‘* On the
Changes of Level on the Atlantic Coast.”

A

Il. REPORT OF THE STURGIS-HOOPER PROFESSOR
OF GEOLOGY.

By Jostan D. WHITNEY.

DorinéG the past year a course of sixty lectures on Economical
Geology was delivered to about twenty-five students, mostly
Graduates and Seniors. As the instruction in this subject is
now arranged, the subject of Economical Geology occupies two
years, the first half of the course being, as a general rule, taken
by Seniors or Juniors, and the second half by Graduate students.
In the former, the subject of the mode of occurrence of the met-
alliferous ores is very briefly treated; in the latter, the metals,
mining, and metallurgy form the chief topics to which the atten-
tion of the student is directed. Both courses together are in-
tended to furnish a desirable amount of information in regard
to the economical and practical side of Geology, either to the
general student or to those intending to become teachers of the
science, and are also preparatory for special studies in this de
partment, to be taken later by those who find themselves able
and inclined to go further in this direction.

The arrangement and cataloguing of the Sturgis-Hooper Li-
brary has been continued by Miss Clark. The remarks in regard
to this matter which were made last year are still applicable.

The climatic investigations spoken of last year as being under
way are still in hand, and the material which has been collected
is now being arranged for publication.

III. REPORT ON COURSES IN GENERAL GEOLOGY.
By N. S. SHALER.

THE course in Elementary Geology (Geol. 4) has been mate-
rially strengthened by adding to the usual lectures, about sixty
in number, special meetings which are designed to afford further
opportunities for acquiring a clear idea of the more difficult parts

of the subject matter. These meetings have been held in small
3

18

sections of from fifteen to twenty students, under the charge of
Mr. R. E. Dodge, Assistant in the Department. They are in
effect recitations, and they have clearly served to secure ends
which experience shows are unattainable by a lecture system
alone, however fully that method may be supplemented by fre-
quent examinations.

In the course of Advanced Geology (Geol. 8), Mr. J. B. Wood- ~

worth has done a task similar to that effected by Mr. Dodge in
the elementary course; but in addition to holding special meet-
ings in small sections for recitation and review, he has supervised
the preparation of theses which the members of the class are re-
quired to write, and he has also aided Professor Wolff in the
field instruction.

Early in the year, Dr. R. T. Jackson was employed to take
charge of the laboratory work in the first course in Paleontology
(Geol. 14), and of the considerable collection which has grad-
ually been provided for the use of that class. By his aid, the
detailed instruction which is intended to supplement the lectures
and book-work has been at length brought to a satisfactory state.
The collection has been increased by the purchase of specimens
needed to extend the series of fossils which are of the most im-
portance for the use of students, and which could not be spared
from the general collections of the Museum. Dr. Jackson has
also rendered assistance to the student in Historical Geology
(Geol. 15) and Paleontological Research (Geol. 24).

The large magic lanterns placed in the Geological Lecture-
room have been used thronghout the year in the elementary
courses (Geol. 4 and 5) with profit and success. Five cases,
accommodating ninety-six trays, have been placed in Room 2,
for the use of the Paleontological Assistant, and several volumes
needed for laboratory work have been added to the library in the
same room.

A number of specimens illustrating geological phenomena
have been added to the teaching collection in the Geological
Laboratory. Among the most important is a second block from
Kelly’s Island in Lake Erie, showing glacial fluting and striation,
given by Benjamin Cook, Esq. <A portion of a mastodon’s jaw,
with several teeth attached, from the Pleistocene deposits of
Iowa, was presented by Mr. John A. Mott.

The collection of photographs and lantern views has been

ee Se ee eee

19

much augmented during the year. The work of cataloguing
and arranging the collection has been nearly completed by Mr.
J. L. Gardner, Jr., who, as volunteer assistant, has rendered
valuable aid to the department. This collection has proved to be
of very great value in our instruction. The phenomena of moun-
tain structure and the relation of structure to topographic form,
of glaciers and their effects, and of volcanic action, can now be
effectively presented to the classes by the aid of these illustra-
tions. The classification of the photographs and lantern slides,
already undertaken, will provide an arrangement, first, according
to localities, and, secondly, by means of cross references to partic-
ular classes of subjects, which can thus be easily brought together
for temporary use.

Ive REPORT ON .THE LABORATORY OF PHYSICAL
GEOGRAPHY.

By W. M. Davis.

INSTRUCTION in elementary Physical Geography and Meteorol-
ogy has been maintained during the past year, under the direc-
tion of Professor W. M. Davis, and with the assistance of Mr. R.
DeC. Ward, on the plan described in the Report for 1890-91.
The illustration of the lectures on Physical Geography by means
of lantern slides has been the chief innovation, a large series
of slides having been purchased or especially prepared for this
course. Various forms of clouds were illustrated in the same
way in the course on Meteorology. The elementary courses
were repeated in parallel lectures during the year to classes in
the Society for the Collegiate Instruction of Women. ‘Three
public lectures for teachers on Teaching Geography were given
in the spring.

The advanced course in Physical Geography and Meteorology
was attended by seven students, the following subjects being
discussed in weekly conferences: thunder-storms in New Eng-
land in 1886-87 (based on reports by volunteer observers of the
New England Meteorological Society), the ‘*eye”’ of the storm,
the cyclonic storms of India, the diurnal variation of tempera-

20

ture at Denver, Col. (based on thermographic records lent by the
Harvard College Observatory), the evolution of the Mississippi
River, the physical geography of Wisconsin, the physical ge-
ography of Arkansas, and the rivers of Connecticut; the last
three subjects being treated by students who were familiar with
the States mentioned, either from residence, or from geological
field-work within them.

Advanced work in Field Geology has been done by two gradu-
ate students, under the direction of Professor Davis, in connection
with his study of the Triassic Area of Connecticut for the United
States Geological Survey; besides which there has been special
work in the Laboratory by Mr. L. S. Griswold in compiling a
map of the Triassic Area from the reports of various assistants ;
and by Mr. S. Ward Loper in arranging and classifying an ex-
tended collection of Triassic fossils, which has since been sent
to the National Museum in Washington.

The office of the New England Meteorological Society has
been maintained in the Laboratory of Physical Geography for
several years past. The monthly Bulletin of the Society, con-
taining reports from about one hundred and fifty observers, has
been issued regularly from this office, with the assistance of Mr.
J. Warren Smith of the United States Weather Bureau, who
was especially assigned to this work by the Chief of the Bureau,
and with the support of the Director of the Harvard College Ob-
servatory, the Bulletin being published in the Annals of that |
institution. In March, 1892, it seemed advisable to transfer the
work of collecting and publishing monthly meteorological re-
ports to the New England Weather Service, established at that
time for this purpose, the service being under the direction of
Mr. Smith, and having its office in the rooms of the Weather
Bureau, in Boston. Professor Davis has thus been relieved of
the responsibility of superintending the preparation of the So-
ciety’s Bulletins. At about the same time, the publication of
the American Meteorological Journal was removed from Ann
Arbor, Mich., to Boston; Professor M. W. Harrington, who had
founded the Journal and edited it from the beginning, hay-
ing removed to Washington on his appointment as Chief of the
Weather Bureau, and his place as editor being assumed here by
Mr. R. DeC. Ward, Assistant in Physical Geography. Mr. Ward
has also undertaken a study of thunder-storms in New England

21

for the Weather Bureau, on a plan similar to that followed by
Professor Davis for the New England Meteorological Society
from 1885 to 1887. The results of Mr. Ward’s work in this
direction will be published by the Weather Bureau.

The collections of the Laboratory of Physical Geography have
been increased chiefly in the direction of photographs and lan-
tern slides. The most important additions are as follows : —

A series of cloud photographs, presented by Professor Denza, Director
of the Specula Vaticana, Rome.

A series of cloud photographs in the Alps, presented by Jas. Eccles,
Esq., of London.

A series of large landscape views on the line of the Baltimore and Ohio
Railroad, presented by the company.

A series of views of Pilot Mountain, N. C., presented by the Cape Fear
and Yadkin Valley Railroad Company.

A series of photographs and slides, purchased from the Alaskan expedi-
tion of 1891, led by Mr. I. C. Russell.

A series of Spitzbergen photographs, bought through Professor H. Sjé-
gren, of Upsala, Sweden.

A series of photographs and slides of the Mascaret of the Seine at
Caudebec, bought from A. Witz, Rouen, France. :

An extended series of photographs and slides, purchased from Messrs.

W. H. Jackson and Company, of Denver, Col., representing views in the
Western Territories, Louisiana, Florida, and Mexico.

A large number of photographs and slides from Mr. S. R. Stoddard,
of Glen’s Falls, N. Y., representing landscapes in New York and New
England.

A series of lantern slides made from photographs in the Laboratory
collection, by Mr. P. P. Sharples, Class of ’95.

Especial attention has been given during the past year to the
extension of the University collections of modern topographic
maps, on which the more advanced study of Physical Geogra-
phy so largely depends. An appropriation for this purpose was
granted to this department by the University Library Council,
and topographic maps of Saxony, Austria, and the Netherlands
have thus been purchased. It is hoped that this appropriation
may be continued for some years, until the collection of modern
maps is substantially completed. <A large series of maps has been
received from the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, and
from the United States Geological Survey.

V. REPORT ON THE PETROGRAPHICAL LABORATORY.

By J. Exriot Wo.rFr.

Two courses were given in Petrography, an elementary course
in General Petrography, and an advanced course in Petrographi-
cal Research. The first course was attended by fourteen stu-
dents, and the second by five, —2in all, the largest number since
the establishment of the Laboratory.

The equipment was materially enlarged by the purchase of a
large Voigt and Hochgesang petrographical microscope and two
medium-sized microscopes, and in other ways. The collections
were increased by the purchase of 150 rock specimens from
Krantz in Bonn, and otherwise, and by the addition of 350 thin
sections of rocks. The laboratory is also enabled to use, by the
kindness of Mr. Agassiz, the large microphotographic and pro-
jecting apparatus of Zeiss, recently purchased.

It is a pleasure to record the gift to the University for the use
of the Geological Department, by Dr. Lucius G. Hubbard, of the
large and valuable collection of rocks from the Laacher See re-
gion in Germany, which formed the basis of his monograph in
Tschermak’s Mineralogische und Petrographische Mittheilungen,
1887, ‘+ Beitriige zur Kentniss der Noseanfiihrenden A uswiirflinge
des Laacher Sees.”

Petrographical investigation was begun on the felsites of the
Boston region by several students in common, which it is hoped
will continue this year.

A monograph was completed by Mr. G. L. Collie on Conanicut
Island, R. I., and investigations were carried on by Mr. J. B.
Woodworth on rocks of the Narragansett Basin, and by Mr.
L. G. Westgate on rocks from Jenny Jump Mountain, N. J. A
paper, by the instructor jointly with R. 8. Tarr, ‘*On Akmite
Trachytes from the Crazy Mountains,” is ready for publication.

The instructor was engaged during the year with several as-
sistants in the study of the structure of the Archzan Highlands
of New Jersey, and the study of the eruptive rocks of the Crazy
Mountains was continued.

PUBLICATIONS BY MEMBERS OF THE GEOLOGICAL
DEPARTMENT.

THE following papers of a scientific nature have been pub-
lished during the year.

By N.S. Shaler : —

1. General Account of the Fresh Water Morasses of the United States,
_ with a Description of the Dismal Swamp of Virginia and North Carolina.
Tenth Annual Report of the Director of the United States Geological Sur-
vey, Washington, D. C., 1890, pp. 255-339, Plates VI-XIX. 388 figs.

2. The Antiquity of the Last Glacial Period. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat.
Hist., March 4, 1891, Vol. X XV. pp. 258-267.

3. The Story of Our Continent: a Reader in the Geography and
Geology of North America, for the Use of Schools. Boston, U.S. A.,
published by Ginn and Company, 1892, pp. 290. (Illustrated.)

4. Report on the Work done in the Atlantic Coast Division of the United
States Geological Survey for the Year ending June 30, 1889. Tenth
Annual Report of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Wash-
ington, D. C., pp. 117-119, 1890.

By W. M. Davis: —

Ferrel’s Contributions to Meteorology. Amer. Meteorological Journ.,
1891, VIIT. 348-359.

The Catskill Delta in the post-glacial Hudson Estuary. Proc. Bost.
Soc. Nat. Hist., 18 Nov., 1891, Vol. XXV. pp. 318-354. Illustrated.

The Lost Volcanoes of Connecticut. Pop. Sci. Mo., Dec., 1891, XL.
221-255. Illustrated.

The ‘Theories of Artificial and Natural Rain. Amer. Meteorol. Journ.,
March, 1892, VIII. 493-502.

Mirage ona Wall. Ibid., pp. 525, 526.

Meteorology in the Schools. Ibid., 1892, [X. 1-21.
The Teaching of Geography. I. The Physical Basis of Descriptive Ge-
ography. Educational Rev., May, 1892, Vol. III. pp. 417-426. — II. What
to avoid in Teaching Geography. Ibid., June, 1892, Vol. IV. pp. 6-15.

Note on Winter Thunderstorms. Amer. Meteorol. Journ., Aug., 1892,
IX. 164-170.

Biographical Notices of Professor William Ferre]. Science, Nov. 13,
1891; Nation, Oct. 29, 1891; and Pop. Sci. Mo.

Outline of Elementary Meteorology. A Synopsis of Course ‘ Geol-
ogy 1” at Harvard College, 1892-93. Cambridge, Wheeler, 1892, 12mo,
pp. 13.

}

24

Outline of a Course in Elementary Descriptive and Physical Geography,
for Grades IV. and V. in the Cambridge Grammar Schools, 1892-93, 8vo,
pp. 40.

Four Elementary Essays on the Shore Lines of Lake Bonneville, the
Cafion of the Colorado, the Folds of the Appalachians, the Mountains of
Pennsylvania, in Goldthwaite’s Geographical Magazine, January, March,
April, and May, 1892.

By J. E. Wolff: —

The Geology of the Crazy Mountains, Montana. Bull. Geol. Soe.
America, 1892, Vol. III. pp. 445-452.

By T. W. Harris : —

Mount Bob, Mount Ida, or Snake Hill. American Journal of Science,
March, 1892, Vol. XLIII. pp. 236-238.

By R. DeC. Ward: —

Another River Pirate. Science, 1892, XIX. 7-9.

Artificial Rain; a Review of the Subject to the Close of 1889. Amer.
Meteorol. Journal, 1892, VIII. 484-493.

Thunderstorms in New England during the Year 1886. Ibid., 1892,
IX. 21-28.

Thunderstorms in New England during the Year 1887. Ibid., 1892,
IX. 211-215.

The first Scientific Balloon Voyage. Ibid., 1892, IX. 58-63.

By J. B. Woodworth : —

Note on the Occurrence of erratic Cambrian Fossils in the Neocene
Gravels of the Island of Martha’s Vineyard. American Geologist, April,
1892, Vol. 1X. pp. 243-247. (3 figs.)

The following theses by students in the advanced course in
Physical Geography have been published during the year past : —

The Drainage of the Bernese Jura, by Aug. F. Foerste, Graduate
Student. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1892, XXV. 592-418. With two
Plates, and a Supplementary Note on the Drainage of the Pennsylvania
Appalachians, by W. M. Davis. Ibid., 418-420. (Note. The thesis by
Mr. Foerste was prepared in the academic year 1889-90, but its publica-
tion was delayed until after its author had studied his subject on the ground
in Switzerland in the following year.)

The Eye of the Storm, by S. M. Ballou, Class of 793, Harvard College.
Amer. Meteorol. Journal, 1892, 1X. 67-84, 121-127.

Objections to Faye’s Theory of Storms, by W. C. Moore, Special Stu-
dent, Lawrence Scientific School. Ibid., 170-177, 197-206.

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN ZOOLOGY.

By E. L. Marx.

THE courses of instruction in Zoodlogy have been the same in
their general scope during the past year as in the year 1890-91,
but the courses formerly conducted by Dr. G. H. Parker have
been carried on by Dr. C. B. Davenport.

As will be seen from the accompanying table, there were
one hundred and ten students in Zodlogy 1. The First Assist-
ant in the course was Mr. H. M. Kelly, the Second Assistant
Mr. J. C. Hubbard.

Dr. Davenport had the assistance of Mr. W. S. Nickerson in
the laboratory work of Zodlogy 2, in which there were forty-
five students.

Zoology 3 was conducted by Dr. Davenport alone, there being
nineteen students in the course.

There were seven students, principally Graduates and Seniors,
in each of the Courses 4 and 5. Dr. Woodworth, who has been
appointed Instructor in Microscopical Anatomy, in addition to
assisting in the laboratory work of both these courses, delivered a
part of the lectures in Zodlogy 4.

Dr. Slade proposes in the future to make his course in Osteol-
ogy (Zodlogy 10) a research course for advanced students, and
it will hereafter be designated as Zodlogy 20c.

Of the nine students pursuing special work (Zoology 20a),
two received at the last Commencement the degree of Doctor
of Philosophy.

_ The number of students from the separate classes in each of
the zodlogical courses is given in the following table : —
4

26
Class. | Gr. | ‘Sen. | Jun. | Sop. Fr. Spec. Sci.
Zoél. 1 ra Wis Wy esol eee Ie
ey er [este ae 11 10 9 2 4
Sele Send. 4 Son Gea if 2
eo vases 3. os 1
SSD axe 3 3 | 1
f O- 2 1 1 2
“« 20a OSaihs geek |
|

The meetings of the Zodlogical Club have been well attended,
and of the usual interest.

Besides supervising the Contributions from the Zodélogical Lab-
oratory, I have finished the translation of O. Hertwig’s Lehr-
buch der Entwicklungsgeschichte des Menschen, ete., which will
be issued simultaneously by Swan Sonnenschein & Co. in Lon-
don, and Maemillan & Co. in New York. I have also made a
short contribution to the “ Festschrift fiir Leuckart,” to be pub-
lished in October, entitled Polycherus caudatus, nov. gen. et
nov. Sp.

Since my last report the following Contributions from the
Zodlogical Laboratory have been published in the Museum
Bulletin : —

XXVIII. Observations on Budding in Paludicella and some other
Bryozoa. By C. B. Davenport. (12 Plates.) December, 1891, Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. XXII. No. 1, pp. 1-114.

XXIX. The Gastrulation of Aurelia flavidula, Pér. & Les. By

Frank Smith. (2 Plates.) December, 1891, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
Vol. XXII. No. 2, pp. 115-126.

XXX. Amitosis in the Embryonal Envelopes of the Scorpion. By
H. P. Johnson. (5 Plates.) January, 1892, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
Vol. XXII. No. 3, pp. 127-162.

XXXI. The Mesoderm in Teleosts; especially its Share in the For-
mation of the Pectoral Fin. By E.R. Boyer. (8 Plates.) April, 1892.
Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl., Vol. XXIII. No. 2, pp. 91-134.

XXXII. On Nectonema Agile, Verrill. By Henry B. Ward. (8
Plates.) June, 1892. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodél., Vol. XXIII. No. 3,
pp- 185-188.

The following papers are under way:

r By C. B. Davenport : —

On Urnatella gracilis, Leidy. 6 Plates.
» Notes on the Carotids and the Ductus Botalli of the Alligator.
mt Plate. ;

a)

By W. E. Ritter : —

vg On the Eyes, the Integumentary Sense-papilla, and the Integument of
the San Diego Blind-fish (Typhlogobius Californiensis, Steindachner).
4 Plates.

REPORT ON OSTEOLOGY.

BY D>? DS SEADE:.

TuHis department has received no important additions since the
last annual report.

The collections remain in excellent condition, and have re-
ceived neither damage nor loss.

Several specimens have been received for identification, and
two small collections from different sources, which were offered
during the vacation, have not yet been determined.

Instruction by means of lectures, examinations, and laboratory
work has been given during the academical year to five students,
three of whom were undergraduates, one was a Graduate, and
one a Lawrence Scientific Student. The work performed by
them has been generally satisfactory.

The Assistant hopes to make the course of instruction during
the coming year one in which research will receive more atten-
tion than heretofore.

The following papers have been published by me during the
past year : —

Osteological Notes. The Jugal Arch in the Order Insectivora. Science,
Vol. XIX. p. 203.

Osteological Notes. The Jugal Arch in the Order Rodentia. Science,
Vol. XX. p. 46.

Some of the orders in the collection of disarticulated skeletons
are still sadly deficient in specimens, —a want which can only
be supplied through the generosity of some patron who under-
stands the importance of this department to the scientific
student.

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

By WiLii1amM BREWSTER.

The collection of mounted Mammals has received the following
additions : —

A Solenodon (Solenodon cubanus) from Cuba; two Armadillos
(Dasypus sexcinctus and Tatusia novemeincta) from Brazil; an ar-
boreal, prehensile-tailed Porcupine (Synetheres prehensilis) from
Costa Rica; a Hare (Lepus nigricollis) from India; a small Deer
(Dorcatherium aquaticum) from West Africa; a Tree Hyrax (Den-
drohyrax arboreus) and a small Rodent ( Georynchus capensis)
from Cape Colony; and a Genet (Genetta vulgaris) from Alge-
ria (?). The last named is the gift of Dr. H. J. Bigelow. All
the others were bought of Ward.

The collection of Mounted Birds in the North American Room
has long been an object of adverse comment on the part of vis-
itors critical in such matters, and a source of mortification to the
Assistant in this department. Made up chiefly of birds prepared
by a taxidermist, whose handiwork, although neat and smoothly
finished, is aggressively stiff and conventional, and containing a
number of moth-eaten, faded, and dust-stained specimens, con-
tributed years ago by the Harvard Natural History Society, this
collection, while perhaps not inferior in quality to the average
exhibits of American museums, has suffered by comparison with
the superior material in the other and more recently equipped
faunal rooms.

It has been Mr. Agassiz’s intention to remedy this defect, as
soon as opportunity offered and the funds of the Museum permit-
ted, by discarding all but a few of the very best or rarest of the
Birds in the North American Room, and replacing them by really
well mounted specimens. Such an opportunity has at length
occurred, and without the anticipated expense; for Mrs. Greene
Smith, of Peterborough, N. Y., has just given to the Museum,

30

under certain very reasonable conditions, about twelve hundred
North American birds, together with nearly three hundred Hum-
ming-birds from North, Central, and South America. These speci-

mens constitute the greater part of a collection widely known

among ornithologists as the ** Greene Smith Collection,” and of
which a catalogue has been printed and distributed.

In many respects the collection of mounted North American
birds is the most complete and valuable that has ever been
brought together, at least by private effort. It was begun in
1867, and the work continued up to the time of Mr. Smith’s
death, in 1880, after which only a few specimens were added.
At first, Mr. Smith hoped to collect all the birds himself, and
very many were taken by him personally, chiefly in Madison
County, New York, Cook County, Illinois, and Hernando County,
Florida; but failing health finally compelled him to abandon this
plan, and to buy a considerable number of skins, most of which,
together with all the Humming-birds, were obtained from John
G. Bell, of New York City. The entire collection, with the ex-
ception of a few birds, was mounted by Mr. Bell, who at one
time stood foremost amongst American taxidermists, and whose
best work is perhaps not excelled by any of the present day.

The conditions above referred to are, in brief, that the North
American birds shall be kept together and known as the “ Greene
Smith Collection,” and that each specimen originally belonging
to it shall be so labelled. Imperfect or otherwise unsatisfactory
specimens may be discarded, but all such must be returned to
Mrs. Smith or her heirs. The collection may be added to, how-
ever, at the discretion of the officers of the Museum.

These conditions have been accepted, and the collection has
been safely transported to Cambridge. It will be arranged and
placed on exhibition as soon as some changes necessary for its
reception have been made in the cases of the North American
Room. Some of the best of the old birds will be retained and
added to the new collection, but most of them will be unmounted
and distributed among the collection of skins. The Humming-
birds are to be placed in a case by themselves, probably in one
of the Systematic Rooms. .

An important addition has been made to the exhibit in the
Pacific Room by the purchase, from Mr. Scott B. Wilson, of the
following birds from the Sandwich Islands: Charadrius fulvus,

31

Bernicla sandvicensis, Psittacirostra psittacea, Acrylocercus no-
Bilis, Acrylocercus braccatus, Chrysomitridops ceruleirostris, Ves-
Ly tiaria coccinea, Loxioides bailleni, Hemignathus olivaceus, Hemi-
: gnathus procerus, Pheornis obscura, Himatione virens, Himatione
sanguinea, Oreomyza bairdi, Chasiempis ridgwayi, Chasiempis
dolet. Two Rails, probably Corethrura obscura (Gmel.), sent to
Mr. Agassiz by Mr. William T. Brigham, at the request of Hon.
S. B. Dole, by whom they were obtained from Layson Island,
will also be mounted for this collection, which now represents
most of the species resident in and peculiar to the Sandwich
Islands.

The only further acquisitions in this department are two speci-
mens, male and female, of the ‘“ Oropendula” ( Gymnostinops
montezuma), with several of its curious nests, from Copan, Hon-
duras, presented by the Peabody Museum Honduras Expedition,
and a Brazilian Parrot (of the genus Chrysotis), received from
Mrs. Josiah W. Cook, of West Somerville, Mass.

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.

By SaMuEL GARMAN.

THE following are included in the list of those who have con-
tributed to the collections in these departments by donation:
Mr. Bradlee Whidden, Mr. N. Vickary, Dr. J. G. Owens
(through Prof. F. W. Putnam), Dr. T. G. Lee, Dr. L. C. Jones,
Dr. W. M. Haines, Mrs. Capt. Josiah W. Cooke, Miss I. Batch-
elder, and Prof. Alex. Agassiz.

Parcels were taken out for the United States National Mu-
seum, Prof. F. H. Snow, Prof. C. J. Maynard, Dr. G. A. Bou-
lenger, Dr, T. G. Lee, Prof. J. W. P. Jenks, and the University
students.

Valuable exchanges have been received from Dr. Georg Baur,
Prof. J. W. P. Jenks, Dr. Julius Hurter, the United States Na-
tional Museum, and the Imperial Museum at St. Petersburg.
From the last we received important types from Central Asia.
Dr. Hurter, from the Southwestern States, sent us living speci-
mens, which before killing provided occasions for new and con-
firmatory observations on disputed points, and which afterwards
were put into excellent condition for the exhibition cases. The
lot from Professor Jenks contained representatives from the Gulf
coast of the Southwest. Dr. Baur’s collections were from the
Galapagos Archipelago and the adjacent South American coast.
These last, with that of Professor Jenks, were determined and
subjected to special study and publication. In connection with
the routine work, the exhibit for Madagascar has been selected
and put in place, and yarious changes and additions have been
made in other representations. To the number of large mounted
specimens have been added a large Alligator, various Sharks,
several Fishes, and some Land Tortoises. The Deep-sea Fishes
taken in the work of the United *States Fishery Commission
steamer ‘* Albatross”’ in the tropical Pacific are now in hand,
under investigation.

33

Besides reviews and book notices on kindred subjects, not
signed, the subjoined publications have been sent out during
the year.

In the Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy, Vol.
XIV. No, 2:—
“The Discoboli (Cyclopterid, Liparopside, and Liparididz).”

In the Bulletin of the Essex Institute : —

“The Reptiles of the Galapagos Islands.”

“On Texan Reptiles.”

“On Reptiles collected by Dr. Geo. Baur near Guayaquil, Ecuador.”
“ On Cophias and Bachia.”

In the Proceedings of the Boston Natural History Society : —

“Dr. D. H. Storer’s Work on the Fishes.”

In the Annual Report of the Commissioners on Inland Fish-
eries of Massachusetts : —

“ Report on the Lobster.”

In “ Science ”’ : —

“The Vesicles of Savi.”

“The Distribution of Fishes.”

“ Dr. Storer’s Work on the Fishes.” (Also in Proc. B. N. H. Soc.)
Sistrurus and Crotalophorus.”

“The Reptilian Rattle.”

34

REPORT ON THE PALAZONTOLOGICAL
DEPARTMENT.

By A.puHevs Hyatt.

THE Trigoniidz, Ostreidee, Pinnide, and some other families
of Lamellibranchs, have been worked over with greater or less
care, and materials selected for exhibition.

A large amount of miscellaneous work, which cannot be re-
ported upon specifically, has been done in order to prepare the
way for the selection of materials to bé placed upon exhibition.
The Schary, Day, Dyer, Walcott, and other collections of Silu-
rian and Devonian Brachiopoda have been similarily treated,
the genera brought together, and the materials picked out for
exhibition.

The enormous number of specimens in these collections, and
the fact that the same species frequently appears under different
names, and the same genus in one collection may be split up into
half a dozen genera in another, makes such work more tedious
and difficult than had been anticipated. Before the specimens
selected for exhibition are finally labelled, it will be necessary to
revise the generic names to avoid confusion.

As in previous years, the department has had the benefit of
the labors of Dr. R. T. Jackson. He has distributed the Triassic
and Permian collections reported upon last year as still intact,
and therefore all the Fossil Invertebrata are, with the exception
of one tier of cases reserved for slabs and miscellaneous materials
in Room A, arranged zodlogically as described in the last An-
nual Report. He has also done considerable work in various
departments which cannot be reported upon in detail, and has
distributed into their proper genera a large number of Tertiary
Lamellibranchs.

.
30

Miss Clarke has been employed as usual in dusting, securing
specimens on tablets where necessary, writing labels, etc.

We have received from Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer
twenty-eight choice specimens of Crinoids from Indian Creek,
Montgomery County, Indiana.

Mr. C. D. Walcott has returned a small collection of Lower
Cambrian fossils, borrowed by him some years since for investi-
gation.

The following papers have been published during the year by
the Assistants in this department : —

Carboniferous Cephalopods, by Alpheus Hyatt, Geol. Surv. of Texas,
Sec. Ann. Rept., 1890, pp. 829-356, with thirty-seven cuts.

Remarks on the Pinnide, by Alpheus Hyatt. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat.
History, XXV., 1891, pp. 835-346.

Beecher’s Studies of the Brachiopoda (a Review), by R. T. Jackson.
Am. WNat., Oct., 1892.

36

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.

By Miss F. M. Snack.

DurinG the year ending September 1, 1892, the Library has
received 584 volumes, of which 20 are Atlases, 1,915 parts, and
255 pamphlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS.
GGG oe) Shige iad Kak tava es eect MACSA Pe ares 57 12
WOXCHANG ELS; Mali". (Pikes ve: Bed we) to) te ee eee 746 61
ECD Age!? hi Mees eae AC vee cy ce tee ep Oe, 9 RO 238 af
PABBA ASSIZ as Ans; Gots Aces ae oe ea 856 25
Binding Partsi 2s ee een eee eee
Wihiiney: lnibrarys¢s- 2 (2) 82 eee ee en 18 154
584 1915 253

The number of. volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the greater part of the Whitney Library) is
20,391.. There are 14,296 pamphlets bound in 2,366 volumes,
making the total number of volumes 22,757. .

37

[A]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

y FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1891-92,
4
Of the Bulletin.
Vol. XXII. [Complete.]

No.1. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. — XXVIII. Observa-
tions on Buppine in PAtupiceLLa and some other Bryozoa. By C. B.
Davenrort. pp. 114. 12 Plates. November, 1891.

No. 2. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory.— XXIX. The Gas-
TRULATION of AURELIA Fraviputa, Pér. & Les. By F. Smirn. pp. 12.
2 Plates. December, 1891.

No. 3. Contributions from the Zovlogical Laboratory. — XXX. Amrosis in
the EmpryonaL ENVELOPES of the Scorpion. By H. P. Jonnson. pp. 36
3 Plates. January, 1892.

No. 4. A Fourth Supplement to the Fifth Volume of the Terresrriat AtiR-
Breatuine Moxuusks of the United States and Adjacent Territories. By
W.G. Binney. pp. 42. 4 Plates. January, 1892.

Vol. XXIII.

No. 1. Reports on the Dreparne Operations off the West Coasr of Central
America to the GaLapacos, to the West Coast of Mexico, and in the Gur
or CALIForNIA, in charge of ALEXANDER AGAssIZz, carried on by the U.S
Fish Commission Steamer “ ALBarross.” —II. Genrrat Sxercu of the
ExrepitT10n of the “ Atsarross” from February to May, 1891. By A.
AGassiz. pp. 90. 22 Plates. February, 1892.

No. 2. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. —XXXI. The Meso-
DERM in TELEOSTS: especially its Share in the Formation of the PecroraL
Fin. By E. R. Boyer. pp. 44. 8 Plates. April, 1892.

No. 3. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXXII. On Necro-
NEMA AGILE, Verrill. By H. B. Warp. pp. 54. 8 Plates. June, 1892.

Vol. XXIII. to be continued.
Of the Memoirs.
Vol. XIV.

No. 2. The Discosorr. Cyclopteride, Liparopside, and Liparidide. By S.

GARMAN. pp. 96. 13 Plates. April, 1892.
_ 2 Vol. XIV. to be continued.

38

Vol. XVII.

No. 2. Reports on an Expioration off the Wesr Coasts of Mexico, CEn-
TRAL and South America, and off the GaLapacos IsLaAnps, in charge of
ALEXANDER AGAssiz, by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer “ ALBa-
rross,’ during’ 1891.—I. Catamocrinus DiomMepDm, a new STALKED
Crinoip, with Notes on the Apical System and the Homologies of Echino-
derms. By A. Agassiz. pp. 96. 32 Plates. January, 1892.

Vol. XVII. to be continued.

[B]

Tue Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship Fund is to be established in connection
with the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Harvard College, on the following
conditions : —

To apply the net income thereof in supporting or assisting to support one or more
students who may have shown decided talents in Zodlogy, and preferably in the
direction of Marine Zodlogy.

Each person so assisted shall be either a graduate or a student in some depart-
ment of Haryard University, but not necessarily a candidate for a degree. His
studies and researches may be conducted at the Natural History Laboratories of
the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Harvard College, at the Newport Marine
Laboratory, or at such European Laboratories or other place on the sea-shore in this
country or elsewhere as may be approved by the Faculty of the Museum of Com-
parative Zodlogy and by the Professors of Zodlogy and of Comparative Anatomy of
Harvard University.

Such assistance may be continued to the same student from year to year, so long
as he may be recommended by the Faculty of the Museum and the Professors afore-
said; but the appointment must be renewed annually, and only upon satisfactory
evidence that the incumbent is fulfilling the purpose of the endowment.

If in the course of any year no students of suflicient ability and promise shall re-
quire aid from said fund, or for any reason the whole income of said fund shall not
be expended, the surplus is to be added to the principal of the fund.

The President and Fellows are authorized at their discretion to impose such con-
ditions and make such requirements upon the recipient of aid from said fund as will
best secure his faithful devotion to the purposes of this foundation.

7” —a Sele
ag IN

[C]

PETERBOROUGH, N. Y., August 18, 1892.
Witriam Brewster, Esq. : —

Dear Sir, —I wish to place the collection of birds, left by my husband, where it
will be safe, well cared for, kept intact, as far as practicable, and made use of
by students of ornithology ; and where it may remain a monument to the life-work
of Greene Smith.

I will give the collection (with a few exceptions to be named hereafter) to the
Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Cambridge, Mass., on the following con-
ditions : —

lst. That the North American Collection shall practically replace the present
North American Collection of the Museum, and shall be kept together as far as
possible; each specimen to be labelled conspicuously with the name of Greene
Smith.

2d. The Museum shall be allowed to make future additions to the collection; but
it shall be privileged to discard only such specimens as are positively bad.

3d. Any part of the collection which the Museum may at any time discard shall
be returned to me or my heirs.

4th. The Museum, at its own expense, is to pack and transfer the collection
within the next sixty days.

From the Collection of North American Birds I reserve one specimen, No. 886.
I also reserve the foreign specimens, excepting the case of Humming-birds.

Yours very truly,
Evizapetu F. Smirn.

40

[D]

INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HARVARD COLLEGE, Sept. 1, 1890.

Sturgis-Hooper Fund, .. 3.) 0:02. ee ee ee) ee eo,
Gray Bonds cts il Wah oll 1a Glo Ge te tse 50,000.00
Agassiz Memorial Fund «2 0,06 )6) 3 2
Meachers:and! Pupils Humd 6005) in. gees oe ee ee 7,594.01
Permanent. Bund 9 4. 0 fe, ee ys, el Wee ot ce lg hp
Humboldt Mund...) 20 Shen cae Seeete pete eae gn e 7,740.66
Virginia Barret, Gibbs Scholarship) Hund) 200) ) 0) ee 5,000 00

$585,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by the Museum Faculty and a committee of the Overseers. ‘The only funds
the income of which is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually
charged in an analysis of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the
income is applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund (about $400) can be applied for the benefit of
one or more students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport Marine
Laboratory, the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood's Holl, or elsewhere.

Applications for the tables reserved for advanced students at the Newport Ma-
rine Laboratory, and for the tables at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made to
the Director of the Museum before the Ist of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

The income of the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship Fund, of the value of $250,
is assigned annually, with the approval of the Faculty of the Museum, at the recom-
mendations of the Professors of Zodlogy and of Comparative Anatomy in Harvard
University, “in supporting or assisting to support one or more students who have
shown decided talents in Zodlogy, and preferably in the direction of Marine
Zoology.”

ee ee

wv

AH
—

NEWPORT MARINE LABORATORY.

i

ni

Ly if wi t
weet ili

w

, ee

Kt

ARTOTYPE, E. BIERSTADT, N. Y

NEWPORT MARINE LABORATORY.

ANNUAL REPORT

OF

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

1892-95.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S. A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1893.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary.

GEORGE L. GOODALE.
HENRY P. WALCOTT.

OFFICERS.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY .
NATHANIEL S. SHALER.
EK. L. MARK . ‘
WILLIAM MORRIS DAVIS .
J. ELIOT WOLFF .
THADDEUS W. HARRIS .
ROBERT TRACY JACKSON
J. B. WOODWORTH.

H. L. SMYTHE . aie
W. McM. WOODWORTH .
C. B. DAVENPORT

G. H. PARKER .
WALTER FAXON .

D. D. SLADE

SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER .
ALPHEUS HYATT
SAMUEL HENSHAW

MISS F. M. SLACK .
MAGNUS WESTERGREN.
W. S. NICKERSON

W. E. CASTLE .

RICHARD ELWOOD DODGE ;

LEON S. GRISWOLD

GEORGE E. LADD

ROBERT DeECOURCEY WARD

T. A. JAGGAR, Jr.

Director and Curator.
Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Geology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.
Professor of Physical Geography.
Assistant Professor of Petrography.
Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Paleontology.
Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Geological Surveying.
Instructor in Microscopic Anatomy.
Instructor in Zodlogy.

Instructor in Zodlogy.

Assistant in Charge.

Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.

Assistant in Paleontology.

Assistant in Entomology.

Librarian. °

Artist.

Assistant in the Zoélogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Zoélogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratories.

Assistant in the Laboratories of Coa and

Physical Geography.
Assistant in the Geological Laboratory.
Assistant in Meteorology.
Assistant in Petrography.

Ror P Orr:

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE : —

Durine the past year the usual courses of instruction have
been given at the Museum in Zodlogy by Professor Mark, Dr.
Slade, and Mr. Davenport, assisted in the Laboratory work by
Messrs. W. M. Woodworth, H. M. Kelley, and W. S. Nickerson.

Professors Whitney, Shaler, Davis, and Wolff gave courses of
instruction in Geology, Paleontology, Physical Geography, and
Petrography. Messrs. Harris, Robert T. Jackson, J. B. Wood-
worth, Griswold, Ladd, Ward, Landes, and Whittle were the
Assistants in the Geological Department.

For the details of these courses of instruction, as well as of the
summer courses in Geology, I would refer to the accompanying
special reports of the Professors and Instructors. I would call
special attention to the interesting report of Professor Davis in
regard to Physical Geography and Meteorology.

The Newport Marine Laboratory has, as usual, been open to
advanced students in Zodlogy. An unusually large number of
students have come to Newport this year to collect material for
their winter’s work. It will, however, be impracticable for me to
accommodate so large a number again. Some other provision
must be made elsewhere for the less advanced students, — at the
Aquarium of the Museum, for instance, —if it is necessary to
carry on an elementary summer school of Zodlogy.

We have to thank Colonel Marshall McDonald, United States
Fish Commissioner, for facilities granted to our students in
connection with their work at the Fish Commission Station at
Wood’s Holl.

4

The income of the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship was di-
vided, according to the terms of the gift, among three of the
students who spent some of their time at the Newport Laboratory.

We have received during the year an anonymous contribution
to be applied to the increase of Dr. Hagen’s salary.

As will be seen from the reports of the different departments of
instruction, considerable time was spent by the Professors and In-
structors in preparing an exhibit for the Columbian Exposition,
specially intended to illustrate the methods of instruction, and
forming a part of the Harvard University exhibit. The Museum
sent plans of the building, prepared under the supervision of Dr.
Wolff, who also charged himself with advising the Harvard Camera
Club in regard to the views of the most characteristic Exhibition
Rooms of the Museum which accompanied them. The plans,
and the photographs taken by the Camera Club and by Mr. J. L.
Gardner, will be hereafter most useful in the preparation of an
extended account of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy which
it is intended to publish at some future time.

Photographs and plans of the Newport Marine Laboratory were
also sent to Chicago, as well as a complete series of the pub-
lications. issued in connection with the Laboratory, and of other
publications relating to the Marine Fauna of the United States
written by officers of the Museum or naturalists connected with
the different deep-sea expeditions sent out by the United States
Coast Survey and United States Fish Commission in charge of
Louis Agassiz, L. F. de Pourtalés, or myself. Colonel Marshall
McDonald kindly took charge of this exhibit, which was placed in
the space assigned to the Fish Commission in the Government
Building. Duplicate collections of these publications are in the
libraries of the United States Coast Survey and of the United
States Fish Commission.

We have been able to open the Museum on Sundays throughout
the year, the Corporation having assumed the additional expense
involved in providing the necessary service. The number of vis-
itors has been greatly increased in consequence, and this has em-
phasized the need of additional and more general labelling of the
collections for the benefit of the public. In the Systematic Col-
lection the larger Mammals have been more prominently labelled,
and the same has been done with the North American Mammals.
With our limited means, considerable time must elapse before

a a

ie)

the labelling can be extended to the other rooms and the other
classes of the animal kingdom.

I can only repeat what has been stated in former reports, that
the increase of the classes in Geology and Zodlogy has been such
as to render it desirable that the Geological Department should be
accommodated in new quarters to allow for the expansion of the
Zodlogical Department. The Geological Department could be
housed in the southwest corner piece of the Museum, where large
lecture-rooms might also be provided for the use of the Natura]
History Department. But there seems at present no probability
of building such an addition to our building, which would require
$100,000 for its erection and equipment.

During the past winter the Pacific Room, though far from com-
plete, has been opened to the public. The most interesting speci-
mens are its marine Mammals, the Seals, Dugong, and Sea Otter ;
a collection of Birds from the Sandwich Islands, to illustrate one of
its characteristic insular faunz ; and a typical collection of Fishes
and of Invertebrates, which occupies the central cases of the room.

The Greene Smith Collection of Birds has been placed in the
North American Room. New eases have been built to accommo-
date it, and the whole collection has been carefully examined and
thoroughly cleaned by Mr. Clark, who has spent nearly a whole
year upon this work. With this addition in place, we have
every reason to be satisfied with our North American faunal
exhibit.

The additional space devoted to the North American Birds has
compelled us to remove the shore marine forms, which up to the
present time have formed a part of the faunal exhibits. This has
necessitated the rearrangement of the Marine Fishes and Inverte-
brates, and their removal to the Pacific, Atlantic, and Indian
Ocean Faune, limiting the faunal exhibits of the Fishes and Inver-
tebrates to the Land and Freshwater types, — a far more consistent
geographical arrangement than the former mixture of terrestrial
and marine faunal subdivisions. These changes have brought an
unusual amount of work upon Mr. Garman, and especially upon
Mr. Faxon, who has had the general supervision of this rearrange-
ment. Several of the rooms of the oldest part of the Museum
building have been thoroughly renovated.

Although we have received a small Hippopotamus, a few Ga-
zelles, and an African Elephant, we still have some gaps to fill in

6

the African and Pacific Faunal Rooms. The first invoice of mate-
rial to illustrate the fauna of Japan has safely reached us.

Extensive changes and repairs in the Entomological Department
have greatly facilitated the use of the collections, upon which Mr.
Henshaw presents his first annual report. The collections of the
Museum generally continue in good condition. The reports of
the Assistants of the Museum will give the details of the work ac-
complished, and of the additions to the collections received in their
departments during the past year.

Upon’ Professor Faxon, who has been placed in charge of the
collection of Invertebrates, has also fallen the principal share of
the care of the Museum as a whole since he began his duties, and
the improvement in the general appearance of the Exhibition Rooms
is very marked. We are indebted to Professor Hyatt for the care
he has given to the Paleontological Collections in his charge, and
to Mr. Brewster for his interest in supervising the arrangement
of the Greene Smith Collection of North American Birds.

On the 9th of November Dr. Hagen died, in his seventy-
seventh year, after a lingering and painful illness of more than
three years. Dr. Hagen joined the Museum staff in 1867, and
until incapacitated in 1890 he devoted his time and energies
to the interests of the institution with which he had cast his lot.
In 1876 he refused an urgent invitation to assume the charge of
the entomological collection of the University of Berlin, the great-
est scientific prize perhaps in his department. He built up the
exceptionally interesting biological collection of the entomologi-
cal department from nothing, and the comparatively small collec-
tion of Insects which he found on entering upon his duties he has
left greatly increased in size and value. His varied and extensive
information was always at the service of the specialists who fre-
quented his laboratory. During his connection with the Museum
Dr. Hagen published a great number of papers on entomological sub-
jects. Unfortunately for his influence on the progress of Entomology
in this country his publications were usually printed in German.

With regard to the ‘“‘ Blake” publications, two additional me-
moirs have been published, — a Bulletin on the Northern Atlantic
Mollusca collected by the “ Blake” during the summer of 1880, by
Miss Katharine J. Bush, and an elaborate monograph on the Pagu-
ride# by Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards and Mr. Bouvier, illus-
trated with twelve quarto plates. Professor Milne-Edwards has also

7

in hand a final memoir on the Crustacea of the “‘ Blake.” This
leaves still to be published, of the work on the “ Blake”’ collections,
the memoir on the Alcyonaria, by Professor Verrill; the Deep-
sea Fishes, by Professor Goode and Dr. Bean; the Comatule, by
Dr. Hartlaub; and a memoir on Pentacrinus, by Professor H.
Ludwig.

Although not published under the auspices of the Museum, I
should mention as forming a part of the results of the “ Blake”
an important paper by Dr. Wiren, on Solenogaster, a great part
of which is based on specimens dredged by the “ Blake” in 168
fathoms off St. Lucia, in the winter of 1878-79, issued in the
Memoirs of the Stockholm Academy of Sciences.

The available bulk of our Pentacrinus material has been sent to
Professor Ludwig of Bonn, who has kindly consented to work up
this genus from the collections made by the ‘‘ Blake ” in the West
Indies.

A number of publications are in preparation in the different
Laboratories of the Museum. The following work has been done
during the past year on the Collections of the Fish Commission
Steamer “ Albatross’ expedition of 1891. Mr. Westergren has
nearly completed the plates (fifty in number) which are to accom-
pany Professor Faxon’s memoir on the Crustacea of the expe-
dition. Mr. Faxon has already completed the text, and a
preliminary report of the collection has been published in the
Bulletin, awaiting the preparation of the plates for the final
monograph.

Professor Ludwig also reports that he has completed the
monograph on the Holothurians. A preliminary notice was pub-
lished in the Zoologischer Anzeiger and in the Museum Bulletin.
Professor Ludwig states that his report is to be illustrated by
nineteen plates in all, of which eight will be colored plates. The
plates are distributed among different families as follows: Synal-
lactine, one plate; Psychropotine, five plates; Deimatine, five
plates ; Elpidiine, one plate; Dendrochirote, two plates; Mol-
padiide, three plates; Synaptide, one plate; and Pelagothuriide,
one plate. The whole of his manuscript has been received, and
the last plate is in the hands of Werner and Winter.

Professsor Schimkéwitsch has sent in a report on the Pyenogo-
nide accompanied with two plates, Dr. W. McM. Woodworth a
Report on the Planarians, with one plate and Professor S. F.

8

Clarke one on the Hydroids, with three plates. The illustrations
of these papers are in the hands of the lithographer.

Mr. Scudder’s Report on the Orthoptera of the Galapagos (three
plates) has been issued, and a short Bulletin on the Rocks of the
Galapagos has been published by Mr. George P. Merrill.

Excellent progress is also reported by Professor Hoyle, Dr.
G. W. Miiller, Dr. Ward, Dr. Bergh, Mr. Garman, and Professor
Studer with regard to the various collections intrusted to their
care. Professor H. V. Wilson spent some time at the Museum in
examining our collection of Sponges, in preparation for his report
on the Sponges of the ‘‘ Albatross”’ expedition.

Owing to my prolonged absences from Cambridge, I have my-
self made little progress with the groups which I had selected to
work up; but I hope during the coming year to be able to devote
some time to them, and also to take up for publication the large
amount of material on the Acalephs of the East Coast of the
United States now in my hands. For nearly thirty years since
the publication of the Catalogue of North American Acalephs, I
have every summer, and frequently during the winter months
also, paid a good deal of attention to the Jelly-Fishes of our coast.
An immense amount of drawings and of undigested notes have
thus accumulated. Their publication, as well as a revision of the
papers on the same subject issued up to the present time in the
Museum publications and elsewhere, would form an instructive
and connected account of the Acalephian Fauna of our shores.

For a complete list of the Publications of the Museum I would
refer to Appendix A. Of the Bulletin we have issued during
the past academic year four numbers of Volume XVI. of
the Geological Series, three numbers of Volume XXIII., com-
pleting the volume, and the whole of Volume XXIV. Of the
Memoirs, we have issued No. 3 of Volume XIV., completing
the volume.

About the usual number of volumes have been added to the
Library, either by gift, exchange, or purchase. The number of
volumes is now over twenty-three thousand.

As far as the available stock permitted, we have distributed a
number of more or less complete sets of our publications to insti-
tutions and societies with which we have only lately begun to
exchange. It has now become impossible for us to supply com-
plete sets of our publications. Many parts of the earlier volumes

9

both of the Bulletins and Memoirs are out of print, as the demand
for certain numbers has far exceeded that for others.

We have purchased from Zeiss a complete microphotographic
apparatus; during the summer months it will be available for the
Newport Marine Laboratory, and during the rest of the year it will
be at the service of the Museum officers.

In addition to the collections of the Albatross expedition of
1891 sent to the various specialists! who have kindly consented
to work up the material brought together, specimens were sent
for examination to Professor Goode and Dr. Bean, to Professor
Biitschli, to Dr. Steindachner, to Professor Lankester, to Dr. S. J.
Hickson, and to Mr. Bigelow.

To Professor F. Eilhard Schulze was sent our collection of types
of Sponges from the deep waters of the Gulf of Mexico and the
West Indies. This he has examined and already returned, with
notes on the species suggested by his examination of the extensive
series of Hexactinellide from all quarters now in his hands for
monographic purposes.

Our collection of North American Hydroids was sent to
Dr. Camille Pictet, to be used in preparing a monograph on the
Hydroids of the Bay of Naples for the Zodlogical Station. This
collection reached Switzerland a few days before Dr. Pictet’s
death, and it has been returned by the authorities of the Uni-
versity of Geneva.

I hear from Professor Dupont that excellent progress is making
with the cast of the Iguanodon which is to be sent from the Brus-
sels Museum to Cambridge.

Arrangements have been made with Dr. Dohrn by which one of
the tables of the Zodlogical Station at Naples has been placed at
the disposal of the Faculty of the Museum for three years, The
conditions upon which the table is assigned are shown in Appen-
dix B, and a notice? of this has been sent to all the Universities
and Colleges of the country, as well as to specialists interested
in the study of Marine Zodlogy. I regret to say that thus far the
number of applications has been most limited, and there does not

1 A list of the persons who are preparing the Reports will be found on the third
page of the cover of this Report, with the list of the publications of the Museum
now in preparation.

2 Professor James D. Dana was kind enough to give this notice the benefit of an
insertion in the American Journal of Science.

9

10

appear to exist the imperative demand for the maintenance of
the table represented by American zodlogists. The Smithsonian
Institution has also undertaken to supply this need for American
students. The Faculty of the Museum nominated Professor Meek
of Fayetteville, Arkansas, as the incumbent of the table for the
coming winter, and this nomination has received the approval of
the Corporation.

During the past winter | spent three months exploring the Ba-
hama Banks in the steam yacht “ Wild Duck,’ which my friend,
the Hon. John M. Forbes, was kind enough to place at my disposal
for the purpose.

Mr. J. H. Emerton and Mr. A. M. Meyer accompanied me as
draughtsmen and assistants. On our return to Nassau, after ex-
ploring the Great Bahama Bank and the shore of Cuba from San-
tiago de Cuba to Havana, I sent a short account of the progress
of the expedition to Professor James D. Dana for publication in
the American Journal of Science. Subsequently, we examined the
Little Bahama Bank, and I am now preparing an account of the
expedition for the Bulletin. I have to thank Colonel Macdonald,
the U. S. Fish Commissioner, for the use of some deep-sea ther-
mometers and of a Tanner sounding machine. Professor Menden-
hall, the Superintendent of the Coast Survey, was kind enough to
appoint me Acting Assistant of the Coast Survey, as 1 had been
already on former occasions while attached to the ‘“ Blake,” in
order to enable him to assist the expedition in various ways and
to give it an official character. I have specially to thank the
Hon. J.-W. Foster, the Secretary of State, and Mr. Wharton, the
Assistant Secretary, for securing the interest of the Spanish
Minister at Washington, and the kind offices of the Captain
General of Cuba in procuring for the * Wild Duck ” free entrance
to all ports of the Cuban coast, as well as the assistance of the
naval authorities and of the governors of the various provinces
which we visited. To Captain J. W. Wharton, the Hydrographer
of the Admiralty, as well as to Lieut. Commander Richardson
Glover, U. S. N. Hydrographer, I am also indebted for valuable
information regarding the Bahamas. The cruise of the ‘“ Wild
Duck,” while not as successful as I hoped on account of the
unusual violence of the trades, yet accumulated important infor-
mation on the structure of the islands and banks, their geological
history, and the theory of coral reefs. The pelagic fishing, both

11

at the surface and at moderate depths, which I hoped to make
an important feature of the expedition, was quite limited, owing
to the continuous unfavorable weather we encountered. Still we
made sufficient use of the deep-sea Tanner towing-net to confirm
in general the results at which I had arrived while on the
“* Albatross,” in 1891, regarding the limited bathymetrical range
of the pelagic fauna. I may mention as one of the interesting
catches a pelagic Amphioxus, of which the specimens we collected
were sent to Professor Lankester for examination. Mr. Meyer
devoted his time mainly to the study of the Acalephs collected
during our trip.

To Dr. Theo. W. Richards, and to Mr. Churchill of the Class
of 1895, I am indebted for many analyses of the rocks and
bottoms, and to Professor Wolff for kindly preparing slides of
some of the more interesting wolian rocks from the Bahamas.
The report of this reconnoissance of the Bahamas is well un-
der way.

It is hoped that some arrangement may yet be made between
the representatives of the leading Universities and the Fish Com-
missioner by which the exceptional facilities for marine research
now existing at the Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl may
be made available for original investigation. It has been suggested
that the Commission should continue to carry on the station as it
now does, and supply to capable naturalists representing the Uni-
versities or independent specialists the mass of material which it
cannot afford to have worked up. The Fish Commission can hardly
be expected to devote any part of its limited appropriation on ex-
penditures which have no direct bearing on the practical side of the
fishery question. An extensive and expensive plant has been built
up at Wood’s Holl, which it seems useless to duplicate. It is more
than is needed for the purposes of the Fish Commission. At least
twenty persons properly qualified could be supplied with all they
need for original work, provided these persons represented an out-
side interest able to carry on those investigations which are not
directly in the line of the work of the Fish Commission, but which
yet may prove of great value to it. By allowing the leading
Universities to subscribe to a fund which should be sufficiently
large to relieve the Commission of its purely scientific work,
and to afford sufficient means for its publication, fifteen such
subscribers might be found to bring together such a fund, and

12

leave five places open to non-subscribers, to be filled by the goy-
erning board of the Station.

A governing board consisting of representatives of the govern-
ment bureaus interested in subjects kindred to those of the Fish
Commission, together with appointees ‘of the subscribers from the
leading Universities, might form a board of trustees empowered by
Congress to carry on the Wood’s Holl Station for the best interests
of the Fish Commission and of the different branches of science
connected with marine explorations. The vessels under the
control of the Commission would, as far as practicable, also be
available for the general purposes both of the Commission and
of the scientific investigators. Such a combination as that sug-
gested above would in no way interfere with the marine lab-
oratories now or hereafter to be connected with the different
Universities. The Wood’s Holl Laboratory would be a permanent
station, occupied during the whole year by the officers of the Fish
Commission and the Scientific Director, and in addition to the cen-
tral station well equipped laboratories would soon be established
for all branches of the scientific investigation of the sea; and
these permanent laboratories in their turn would be supplemented
by expeditions of greater or less duration in the vessels connected
with the Fish Commission. Should such a central station be
found to work well, it would have a fair claim for support both from
the government and the public.

A beginning might be made by securing an annual sum of five
thousand dollars for five years from the Universities interested in
this work, and a plan prepared to be presented to Congress for their
approval. The position of the laboratory at Wood’s Holl, and its con-
nection with a government bureau, are perhaps the only drawbacks
to enlisting the interest of Universities in the proposed scheme.

There will of course be some difficulty in devising a practical
plan of co-operation between the Fish Commission and the repre-
sentatives of the purely scientific interests of the country. The
distance of Wood’s Holl to the open Atlantic is also a very seri-
ous drawback. During the summers which I spent at Wood’s
Holl, my experience was that, while the shore fauna is perhaps as
varied as that of more exposed parts of the adjoining coast, it
is far less productive so far as the pelagic fauna is concerned
which forms so great a share of the material of a marine labora-
tory. But with an ample equipment of sea-going launches and of

13

larger boats such as are controlled by the Fish Commission, this
is not a very serious difficulty. The expense of living at Wood’s
Holl is practically neither greater nor less than at other New
England summer resorts.

I regret to report that the Visiting Committee of the Museum
appointed by the Overseers have been unsuccessful in their efforts
to obtain funds for some of the most pressing needs of the Museum.
The committee have shown the greatest interest in attempting to
supply the deficiencies to which their attention had been called by
the reports of the Professors and of the Curator of the Museum.

Mr. W. E. D. Scott, who is greatly interested in the progress of
ornithology in this country, is making the attempt to collect funds
for an additional exhibition room of birds. The collection he pro-
poses to bring together is to be modelled on the plan of exhibi-
tion which has been introduced with great success in the British
Museum, and to a limited extent in the National Museum at
Washington. The plan embraces isolated cases of mounted birds,
representing single species as life-like and at the same time as
artistically mounted as possible. Next, cases illustrating the varia-
tion of such species as are non-migratory, but which range unin-
terruptedly over large geographical areas. Next, cases showing
the dichromatic phases occurring in many families, as well as cases
showing the various phases of appearance in any given species
correlated with sex, season, age, etc.

There are many problems of a similar nature which have been
brought into prominence during the past thirty years. Many of
them can be illustrated in a satisfactory way to the public by
exhibits of the different classes of the animal kingdom. The
greater familiarity of the visitors with birds and insects will make
it comparatively simple to explain to them the object of a limited
exhibit of these classes. As regards the more general questions
of development, and the multitude of minor problems which
it would be interesting to place before the public, other classes
must be selected, and the Director of any public Museum will
only be at a loss to know what to exclude from the limited
room usually at his disposal, so as not to oecupy his available
space with exhibits which, however interesting to the student,
will only have a limited interest for the average visitor.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CaMBRIDGE, October 1, 1893.

14

REPORT ON THE COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN
GEOLOGY.

By Proressors J. D. Wuitney, N. S. SHAtER, W. M. Davis, ASSISTANT
Proressor J. E. Wourr, AND Dr. T. W. Harris.

Durine the Academic year 1892-95, the following named courses
of instruction were given in the laboratories and in the field by the
instructors of the Department of Geology.

Instruction in General Geology.

1. (Geol. 4.") <A half-course in Elementary Geology ; two lectures
a week by N.S. Shaler, with one hour for special exercises, conducted
by R. E. Dodge and L. S. Griswold, and with required reading in
Dana’s Manual of Geology. In the spring, voluntary excursions were
made to points of geological interest in the vicinity of Cambridge under
the guidance of the assistants. The course was attended by two hundred
and eleven students.

2. (Geol. 5.) A half-course in Practical Geological Exercises in the
laboratory and in the field, requiring two two-hour exercises a week,
with occasional lectures: by T. W. Harris, assisted by G. E. Ladd;
designed especially for those who intend in subsequent years to con-
tinue the study of Geology and Palzontology. Attended by fifty
students.

3. (Geol. 8.) A course in General Critical Geology, two lectures
a week, and for a part of the year three, by N. S. Shaler; with an
additional hour for review of assigned reading and for conference, con-
ducted by J. B. Woodworth. Lyell’s Principles of Geology was read
parallel with the lectures. During the autumn and spring months, eight
half-day excursions were made in the field in the vicinity of Cambridge,
under the guidance of J. E. Wolff and J. B. Woodworth. During the
winter months, theses were prepared on subjects chosen with the advice
of the instructors. Those ouly who passed a satisfactory examination
in the elementary courses were permitted to take the course. Thirty
students received this instruction.

1 These abbreviated names of courses correspond to those given in the “Announce-
ment of Courses of Instruction,” issued by the Faculty of Arts and Sciences.

15

4. (Geol. 9.) <A course in the Structural and Dynamical Geology
of the Stratified Rocks, by T. W. Harris. Two conferences a week,
with required reading and theses. This course was attended by
eight students.

5. (Geol. 18.) A course in Economical Geology, by J. D. Whitney.
Lectures twice a week, with required readings and theses. Attended
by thirty students. ;

6. (Geol. 22.) A course in Field-work and Geological Surveying,
designed to afford special training in original investigation, with work
in the library and in the preparation of geological reports, under the
direction of N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis, J. E. Wolff, and T. W. Harris.
Conferences were held once a week during the year. This course is
open only to those who have attained satisfactory grades in Courses 8,
S. 2, and in either Chemistry C or 2. It was attended by eighteen
students.

Instruction in Petrography.

7. (Geol. 12.) A course in Petrography, by J. E. Wolff, assisted
by C. L. Whittle. Two lectures a week, with laboratory work, theses,
and field-work. Attended by sixteen students.

8. (Geol. 23.) A course in Petrographic Research, by J. E. Wolff.
Field and laboratory work. Attended by five students.

Instruction in Paleontology.

9. (Geol. 14.) A course in Paleontology, by N. S. Shaler, assisted
in the laboratory by R. T. Jackson. Two lectures and four hours of
laboratory work a week, with theses. This course was attended by
twenty-three students.

10. (Geol. 15.) A course in Historical Geology, designed to train
advanced students in the use of fossils in determining geological hori-
zons, by N. S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. This course was
taken by five students. ;

11. (Geol. 24.) A course in Paleontological Research, under the
direction of N. 8S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. Attended by
one student.

Instruction in Meteorology and Physical Geography.

12. (Geol. 1.) A half-course in Elementary Meteorology, by W. M.
Davis, assisted by R. DeC. Ward. ‘Two or three lectures a week, with
laboratory work and recitations, first half year. Attended by seventy-
three students.

13. (Geol. 2.) <A half-course in Physical Geography, by W. M.
Davis, assisted by R. DeC. Ward. ‘Two or three lectures a week, with

16

laboratory work and recitations, second half-year. Attended by one
hundred and two students.

14. (Geol. 20.) A course in Advanced Meteorology and Physical
Geography, by W. M. Davis. Conferences held once a week. Attended
by eleven students.

Instruction in Summer Schools.

15. (Geol. S. 1.) An elementary course in General Physical Geol-
ogy. This course was given in Cambridge, beginning Wednesday,
July 5th, and closing Friday, August 11, 1893, under the direction of
T. W. Harris. The instruction, primarily intended to meet the needs
of those who intend to take the second summer course and the second
course during term time (Geol. 8), was adapted also to the needs of
teachers. Lectures and laboratory work occupied the forenoon of each
day of the session, and short excursions to localities of geological
interest were taken in the afternoon. This course was attended by
fifteen students, of whom ten are students in the University.

16. (Geol. S. 2.) A more advanced course in geological field-work
was given at different points in Eastern New York and Connecticut,
commencing Monday, August 14, and lasting six weeks, closing Sat-
urday, September 23d. The class assembled at Utica, N. Y., under
the direction of T. W. Harris. On August 28th it moved to Catskill,
N. Y., and there remained until September 9th. On September 11th
the class went to Meriden, Conn., where the remainder of the time was
spent, under the charge of L. S. Griswold, in a study of the Triassic
sandstones and trap-sheets. Eleven students took this instruction, all
of whom are students in the University.

17. (Geol. S. 3.) A course in independent field investigation and
geological surveying, under the supervision of the officers of the Depart-
ment. One student was engaged in this work upon the Pleistocene
deposits of Eastern Connecticut.

Additional Instruction.

18. During the year the students in the advanced courses attended
regular Tuesday evening meetings in the Geological Laboratory, which
were designed to serve the purpose accomplished by the Seminaria of
the German Universities. A number of the papers read at these con-
ferences have been announced in the College Calendar. Outside of the
papers presented by members of the University, one was read by Mr.
Warren Upham relating to a theory of the origin of Drumlins.

19. (Geol. 26.) A half-course on Geographical Methods and Re-
sults. One lecture a week, by J. D. Whitney. Attended by thirteen
students.

17

REPORT OF THE STURGIS-HOOPER PROFESSOR OF
GEOLOGY.

By Proressor J. D. WHITNEY.

Durine the past year (1892-93) two courses of lectures
were given by the Sturgis-Hooper Professor. The first of these
was geographical, and was attended by about fifteen students,
mostly Graduates and Seniors. The object of this course was to
give an outline of the progress of geographical science, beginning
with the very earliest times, and having special reference to the
methods by which this kind of information has been obtained and
represented, on paper or otherwise, so as to be available for prac-
tical use. ‘This course was comprised in about thirty lectures, and
brought the subject down to the circumnavigation of the globe by
Magellan. In the libraries of the University there is a large
amount of illustrative material for a course of this kind, which
could very properly and profitably have been expanded to twice
the length attempted.

The second course, which was attended by about thirty students,
was devoted to the economical geology of the metals and their ores,
and included brief sketches of the methods of mining, ore-dressing,
and smelting. This course is simply a continuation of one given
the previous year on economical geology in general, which, however,
was devoted to the non-metalliferous minerals exclusively. As
matters are now arranged, it seems best to make a permanent
division of the subject of Economical Geology into two courses of
lectures and study, these to be given in alternate years. The first
course will be devoted to the non-metalliferous minerals, the
second to the metals and their ores, each of these courses to run
through the entire College year. The object of these courses is, to
give the student an opportunity to acquire such an amount of
general knowledge of the subject of economical geology as will be
useful both to those who are not intending to make a specialty of

v

18

mining, and to such persons as, having this object in view, may
desire to have at least so much superficial knowledge of the subject
as will be useful to them in arranging their future studies in this
line of work, and in selecting a place where these studies can be
pursued,

Chiefly to aid students in Economical Geology, certain chapters
in the “ United States: Facts and Figures illustrating the Physical
Geography of the Country and its Material Resources,” published
in 1889, and which have special reference to the subjects treated in
the courses indicated above, have been rewritten, considerably am-
plified, and brought down to the latest available date. These
chapters, which will be published separately, are now being printed,
and will be available for reference during the coming College year,
1893-94,

19

REPORT ON COURSES IN GENERAL GEOLOGY
AND PALZONTOLOGY.

By Proressor N. S. SHALER.

THE course in Elementary Geology (Geol. 4) maintained during
the year the special meetings in small sections instituted in the
previous year and commented upon in the last Report. The aid
of an additional Assistant in the course rendered the work of
instruction more effective than it has heretofore been.

In the advanced course in Geology (Geol. 8) the plan of assist-
ance employed in the previous year was also pursued. The field
work was slightly increased by the addition of exercises in geologi-
cal surveying, undertaken by each student on an assigned area of
one square mile. In order to make the most of the limited time
which our students can command for field work, their attention
was directed to a discrimination and survey of the pleistocene
deposits of the country adjacent to the College. The result of
this work has been the preparation of twenty-eight maps covering
as many square miles. The correctness of the maps and the pro-
gress of each student has been gauged by means of a manuscript
map already prepared, and by visits to particular localities.

In the work of paleontological instruction, Dr. Jackson contin-
ued to bring the collections into a more extended use by the
students, and a large amount of time was spent in improving the
condition of the teaching collections. The laboratory work is now
considerably hindered by the want of room.

A machine for cutting and grinding fossils was added to the
equipment of the Department. It is placed in the Petrographical
workshop, and is run by electric power with which that department

is supplied.

Mr, A. Agassiz very kindly gave the department a fine specimen
of the recent Pentacrinus decorus, in alcohol, which will be an
invaluable accompaniment to fossil types. Considerable palzonto-

20

logical material was received from the Museum as a gift or in
exchange.

A collection illustrating typical fossils of the New York State
rocks was received from the New York State Museum, at Albany,
through the kindness of Professor John M. Clarke. For this
collection an exchange will be returned. Thanks are due to Mr.
H. L. Jones for a collection of fossils illustrating the Waverly
Group of Ohio. Considerable material was purchased from
Ward’s Natural Science establishment at Rochester, and ma-
terial was obtained by purchase, exchange, or gift from several
other sources.

The thanks of the Department are due to Miss Mary L. Ware,
of Boston, who generously gave one hundred dollars to the
Paleontological section. With this recent gift much important
material has been purchased.

A few necessary paleontological books were purchased for the
laboratory. Thanks are due for a number of technical papers
received from their authors. Especially to be mentioned are
nearly complete sets of their publications, given by Professor
Alpheus Hyatt, and Dr, E. C. Beecher of New Haven.

Arrangements have been made to employ the electric arc-light
with a magic lantern in the Geological Lecture Room, in place of
the gas-light heretofore used. By the transfer of a number of
duplicates of government geological reports from the Museum
Library to the Department, means have been provided for per-
fecting the preparation of theses in Geology 8, the books being
at present reserved for the use of students in this course. During
the year, the usual number of rock specimens were added to the
teaching collection to replace worn or undesirable material.

The work of cataloguing the collection of photographs belonging
to the department was advanced by Mr. J. V. Lewis. Through
the generosity of Mr. J. L. Gardner, the department has a fund of
$5,500 devoted to the augmentation and care of this means of in-
struction, which it has been voted by the Corporation to call the
‘*¢ Gardner Collection of Photographs.”’

During the winter and early spring much time was given by the
officers of the Department to the preparation of exhibits of our
means of instruction for the World’s Columbian Exposition at
Chicago. A special edition of the General Account of the Depart-
ment has been issued, in which these exhibits are fully described.
The preparation of this exhibit has made felt the want of illus.

21

trative material in the form of rock collections, maps, and models,
particularly in Course 8.

The Commonwealth of Massachusetts has called on the Pro-
fessor of Geology for service in three boards: the Commissioners
of the Topographical Survey, the Commissioners of Highways,
and a committee of the State Board of Agriculture charged with
the extermination of the Ocneria dispar, or Gypsy Moth. These
duties have demanded a considerable part of his time, and have
necessarily diminished the amount of research work which should
otherwise have been done. He has also been much engaged in
supervising and directing the work of several assistants in the
Atlantic Coast division of the United States Geological Survey.

REPORT ON THE PETROGRAPHICAL LABORATORY.

By Assistant Proressor J. Evior Wo.trFr.

THE instruction in Elementary Petrography was attended by
fifteen students. The usual lectures were given twice a week,
supplemented by a large amount of laboratory work. Mr. C. L.
Whittle was appointed assistant by the Corporation, and gave the
instructor much needed aid in the care of the laboratory and the
more systematic arrangement of the laboratory work.

Six students pursued advanced work in Petrography, and made
original investigations in the following subjects, among others: —

The Felsites of the Boston Basin.
The Schistose Bombs of the Laacher See, in the Hubbard Collection.
A Basie Dike in the Connecticut Triassic.

During the winter extensive improvements were made in the
geological workshop in the basement, and in the arrangements for
illumination and projection in the Petrographical Lecture Room up-
stairs, and in the large Geological Lecture Room. The increasing
size of the classes and large amount of mechanical work done by
them and other students of geology, in slicing and polishing rocks
and fossils and preparing thin sections, made the use of power
desirable, and almost necessary. A five-horse power electric motor
was therefore placed in a corner of the Chemical Laboratory in
the basement, and the shafting carried through the wall to the
adjoining workshop. From this a lathe is run carrying the ver-
tical tin disk charged with bort for sawing rocks, and three other
lathes with horizontal revolving iron or zine plates for grinding
and polishing rocks and sections through the different stages.
A useful saving of time and labor is thus gained over the old
method of working by foot and hand power.

At the same time a one-kilowatt, 55-volt dynamo is run from
the motor by suitable shafting, and the current carried to the two

Ee,

23

lecture-rooms on heavily insulated wire with all possible precau-
tions. In the Petrographical Lecture Room this is utilized alter-
nately for illuminating the room by incandescent lights and by
means of a 2,500 c. p. arc lamp for microscopic projection or pho-
to-micrography with the large Zeiss apparatus placed there. In
this way brilliant projections of thin rock sections are shown to
the class in illustration of the lectures ; and for the ordinary screen
projection of photographs by lantern slides the same apparatus is
eminently satisfactory, especially since, owing to the great power
of the lamp, the projection can take place by daylight or by
partial darkening of the room.

The instructor has continued during the year his work on the
Archean of the New Jersey Highlands, and in the preparation of
a monograph on the Crazy Mountains of Montana.

An exhibit in Petrography was prepared for the Chicago Expo-
sition as part of the contribution of the Department of Geology to
the general exhibit of Harvard University, comprising illustrations
of the methods of laboratory work and material for lecture illus-
tration, examples of the collections, etc.

REPORT ON THE LABORATORY OF PHYSICAL
GEOGRAPHY.

By Proressor W. M. Davis.

INSTRUCTION in Physical Geography and Meteorology has been
continued on the same plan as in former years; the intention
being to give under the first heading a general account of the
oceans and a more particular account of the meaning and develop-
ment of land forms and their relation to habitation; and under
the second heading, an understanding of the arguments on which
the acceptance of the modern physical theories of meteorology are
based. The instruction in these elementary courses was given in
the form of lectures delivered in the large Geological Lecture
Room, supplemented by exercises in the Laboratory on the fourth
floor. Written and verbal tests were required nearly every week
under the two instructors, besides the usual final examinations.

The lectures, particularly those on Physical Geography, re-
ceived frequent illustration by the lantern, for which our growing
collection of slides gives abundant means. The laboratory exer-
cises were based, much as in previous years, on the special collec-
tion of maps and models formed for this purpose and still increas-
ing. The paper models, described in previous Reports, are still in
constant use in the Laboratory; although it is now desirable that
a new edition of them should be prepared, not only thus better to
meet our own needs, but also to be able to supply the demand for
the models that comes from other colleges. At present the series
is not duplicated for sale or exchange. The employment of a
capable assistant to revise the models is greatly desired.

An almost equal use is made of the large-scale topographic maps
of our own and of foreign countries, of which the Laboratory con-
tains an extended collection, apart from the much larger collection
in the University Library, which is referred to below. In most

So ee

<<
ay

25

cases these maps are prepared for students’ use by mounting
together a group of sheets, representing some chosen district.
Besides many examples that might be mentioned from our own
country, the following may be cited from abroad: the longitu-
dinal forms of the Austrian coast of the Adriatic, the transverse
forms of the coast of southwestern Ireland, the straight-lined
coast of southwestern France, the dissected plateau of north-
western France, the rugged highlands of Scotland, the lacustrine
lowland of Finland, the fluviatile plain of Hungary, etc. It is
found in teaching that these large-scale maps supply an essential
supplement to even the best physical wall maps, such as Kiepert’s.
The latter show the general form of a country as a whole, yet
they fail to represent its physical features with exactness ; but
the former remedy this deficiency, and enable the student to recog-
nize almost the smallest details of geographical form. ‘Their use
has greatly improved the quality of our teaching. It is believed
that the knowledge of the value of accurate maps thus gained by
our students will contribute to establishing an interest in the con-
tinued preparation of accurate and large-scale maps of our own
country. ;

The advanced course in Physical Geography and Meteorology is,
as in previous years, still carried on chiefly through informal class
conferences, but partly also in individual meetings. This course
was attended by eleven students, of whom five were Graduates
and five Seniors. The subjects studied were: the physical features
of Missouri, Arkansas, and North Carolina, by Messrs. Clendenin,
Griswold, and Harris, based on personal observation in these
States, as well as on areview of what has been written about them:
the physical features of Middle England, by Mr. Moore; the devel-
opment of river terraces, by Mr. Dodge ; the features of our eastern
coast line, by Mr. Hill; foreign studies of thunder-storms, by Mr.
Ward ; maps of annual and seasonal temperature anomalies, by
Mr, Batchelder, and of equal annual temperature ranges, by Mr.
Connolly, these being based on Buchan’s ‘“ Challenger” charts.
Mention may be made in this connection of two models constructed
under my direction by Mr. Gulliver ; one showing the Newtonville
glacial sand-plain in its present condition, and the other restor-
ing it as it presumably existed in the closing stages of the glacial
period Some of the essays prepared by these students will be

published during the coming year.
4

26

Some beginning has been made on a project to form a teaching
collection of photographs and lantern slides, with which to illus-
trate the geology and geography of our several States. Besides a
considerable number of excellent views obtained by gift, the in-
come of the Gardner Fund, supplemented by the general laboratory
funds, enables us to purchase practically all the good photographic
illustrations of geographical and geological features that we can
find for sale. Most of the photographs have now been catalogued
and classified, in order to show not only what we have, but what
we want as well. Correspondence has been opened with a number
of photographers in different parts of the country, and with the
officers of certain State geological surveys, in order to extend our
collection in certain desired directions. It is believed that in a
few years we shall be able to select from this large amount of ma-
terial a series of graded collections of much educational value, thus
extending the usefulness of the University in this a beyond
its immediate classes.

It is noticeable, however, that in spite of the ease with which
good photographs are now taken, it is still difficult to obtain a
well selected series of views properly illustrating the characteristic
features of any State. The attempt has therefore been made,
through an address to the National Geographic Society, to turn
the attention of our State surveys to the subject of a geographical
examination of their domains. It is indeed a curious fact, that,
while the geological accounts of our States have advanced greatly,
the descriptions of the more elementary subject of their geography
are still scanty. Such as they are, they may generally be found
in the State or national geological reports; but most of them fall
far short of what they should be in the light of modern geographi-
cal study. Just as the State surveys have specialized their work
in the direction of paleontology and later of petrography, it is
hoped that the next few years may see a specialization by the sur-
veys in the direction of geography, in the hands of trained experts,

as other technical subjects are. There is encouragement to think ~

that some of the surveys will at once proceed to the development
of this line of study. If so, a decided improvement in local geo-
graphical teaching may be looked for through the reports that
shall thus be prepared. At present, school teachers have prac-
tically no source of information outside of ordinary text-books
to which they may turn for accounts of the physical features of

27

their home districts; but such accounts might be well supplied
through the illustrated geographical reports published by the State
surveys.

The special appropriation allotted by the Council of the Univer-
sity Library for the purchase of large-scale topographical maps
has been increased from $300 for the year 1891-92 to $350 for
the current year, and in this way our collection of modern maps
has been most serviceably enlarged. The University Library pre-
viously possessed in the Kohl collection a large number of older
maps of great historical interest, but of practically no value in
teaching physical geography. When the recent purchases began,
the only considerable topographical maps in the Library were the
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain, the Etat Major and the Public
Works maps of France, the Dufour and the plane-table maps of
Switzerland. Since then, the topographical maps of the Nether-
lands, Belgium, Norway, Germany, Saxony, Austria, Italy, and
Spain have been secured. It is hoped that the appropriation for
this purpose may be continued for several years to come, as all of
the best geographical matérial of the world can then be placed
before our students.

There has been opportunity of extending the relations of the
geographical section of the University with the public schools in
several ways. In the summer of 1892, an address was delivered
before the American Institute of Instruction at Narragansett
Pier, R. L, on Geographical Illustrations, and repeated before the
Middlesex Teachers’ Association and the Bristol County Teachers’
Association in the autumn. The object of the address was to em-
phasize the importance of using various means of illustration,
such as maps, models, views, diagrams, etc., in teaching geography.
It has since then been published by the University as a reprint
from the Proceedings of the Institute. During the year, a course
of lectures on Geography was given to teachers ; this being one of
three courses of lectures, on Geometry, Physics, and Geography,
- offered by the University to the teachers of the Cambridge public
schools. In this way sixty or seventy of the teachers from the
grammar schools met in our large Geological Lecture-Room once
a week, from November to April.

During the Christmas recess the writer attended a conference
of ten members, appointed by a special committee of the National
Educational Association, and held in Chicago, to consider the

28

teaching of geography and related subjects in the secondary
schools. A report on the work of the conference will be duly
published. A sub-committee was appointed by the geographical
conference, consisting of Mr. C. F. King of the Dearborn Grammar
School, Boston, Professor G. L. Collie, of Beloit College, Wisconsin,
and the writer, to prepare a list of governmental maps that might
be advisably used in geographical teaching. The committee met
in our Laboratory in June, and made a selection of about two
hundred maps and charts from among those published by our vari-
ous official surveys. This list will be shortly published, with indi-
cations of the means of obtaining the maps, and with some account
of the features that they illustrate. It is believed that the list
may have a beneficial effect on the teaching of geography in the
schools.

The field study of the Triassic area of Connecticut, mentioned
in my previous reports as having been undertaken for the United
States Geological Survey, has been finished during the past year,
with the assistance of Mr. L. S. Griswold. Mr. Griswold has also
completed a colored map of the district on the topographical
sheets of the survey, and has prepared a number of true-scale sec-
tions, on which, after plotting the various fault-lines by which the
formation is frequently dislocated, he has indicated the inferred
depth of the deposits underground, and has restored the portion
lost by erosion above ground; he then reversed the movements on
the fault-lines, and thus returned the dislocated blocks of each
section to their original positions, as nearly as can be determined ;
producing an excellent illustration of the trough in which the
Triassic sandstones and lavas were accumulated.

Much spare time has been given during the past two years to
the completion of a text-book of Meteorology, which is now in the
printer’s hands, It will be ready for use with the class in EKiemen-
tary Meteorology, in the second half of the current year.

Besides the share that Mr. Ward has had in the work of the
elementary courses, he has carried on a special study of thunder-
storms in New England for the National Weather Bureau, and
has continued in the editorship of the “ American Meteorological
Journal,” of which mention was made in the last Report. Finding
that the preparation of the Journal calls for an increasing share of
his time, he proposes to withdraw from certain of his other duties
for the coming year, and devote a greater part of his time to
editorial work.

>

29

PUBLICATIONS BY MEMBERS OF THE GEOLOGICAL
DEPARTMENT.

Tue following papers of a scientific nature have been published
during the year.

By N. S. Shaler: —

1. The Conditions of Erosion beneath Deep Glaciers, based upon a
study of the Boulder Train from Iron Hill, Cumberland, R. I. Bull.
Mus. Comp. Zoél., XVI. No. 11, pp. 185-225. January, 1893. 4
plates, 1 map.

2. The Interpretation of Nature. Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston
and New York, 1893. 16mo., pp. xi., 805.

3. Report on the Work done in the Atlantic Coast Division of the
U.S. Geological Survey for the Year ending June 30, 1890. Eleventh
Annual Report of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey, Part I.
pp. 62-64. Washington, D. C., 1891.

4. Report of the Commission to improve the Highways of the Com-
monwealth of Massachusetts. Boston, 1893, pp. 238. [With Geo. S.
Perkins and W. E. McClintock. ]

5. On the Antiquity of Man in North America. Amer. Geol., 1898,
XI. pp. 180-184.

By W. M. Davis: —

1. Geographical Illustrations. Suggestions for teaching Physical
Geography, based on the Physical Features of Southern New England.
An Address delivered at Narragansett Pier, R. I., July 6, 1892. Proc.
Amer. Inst. Instruction ; also reprinted and for sale by the University.

2. The Extension of Physical Geography in Elementary Teaching.
An Address delivered before the Middlesex Schoolmasters’ Club in
Boston, October, 1892. School and College, December, 1892... T.. pp:
599-608.

3. Geography in the Schools. School Review, June, 1893, I. pp.
327-339.

4. The Improvement of Geographical Teaching. Nat. Geogr. Mag.,
July, 1893, IV. pp. 68-75.

5. The Subglacial Origin of Certain Eskers. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat.
Hist., 1892, XXV. pp. 477-499.

30

6. The General Winds of the Atlantic Ocean. Amer. Met. Journ.,
1893, IX. pp. 476-488.

7. Brief Meteorological Articles : — Proposed Subjects for correlated
Study by State Weather Services. Amer. Met. Journ., 1893, X. pp.
68-74. Notice of H. F. Blandford, Ibid., pp. 74-76. Cloud Meas-
urements at Blue Hill Observatory, Ibid., pp. 107-109.

8. The Convex Profile of Bad-Land Divides. Science, Oct. 28, 1892,
p. 245.

9. The Topographical Maps of the United States Geological Survey,
Science, April 28, 1893, pp. 225-227.

10. The Geologic Atlas of the United States. The Nation, Jan. 19,
1893, pp. 45, 46.

11. Lunar Craters. [ Review of ‘‘ The Moon’s Face,” by G. K. Gil-
bert.] The Nation, May 11, 1893, pp. 342, 343.

12. Special Students in Harvard College. Harv. Grad. Mag., 1893,
I. pp. 536-541.

13. Articles on (Lake) Agassiz, Bad-lands, Beach, (Lake) Bonneville,
Cafion, Cataracts, Cave, Cliff, Coast, Colorado River, Coral Islands.
Delta, Deserts, Dune. Johnson’s Universal Cyclopedia, New York,
1892, Vols. I. and IT.

By J. E. Wolff: —

Acmite Trachyte from the Crazy Mountains. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
XVI. No. 12, April, 1893, pp. 227-233. [With R. S. Tarr. ]

By T. W. Harris: —

1. Mountains as Storm-breeders. Amer. Met. Journ., X. 1893, pp.
126-151.

By R. T. Jackson : —

Beecher’s Studies of the Brachiopoda. Amer. Nat., XXVI. 1892,
pp. 857, 838.

By R. DeC. Ward: —

1. Thunderstorms in New England during the Year 1887. Ameri-
can Meteorological Journal, [X. pp. 211-215.

2. The First Aerial Voyage across the English Channel, Ibid., IX.
pp. 307-311.

3. Recent Foreign Studies of Thunderstorms, Ibid., IX. pp. 532-541,
X. pp. 111-126, 178-184.

4. Thunderstorms in New England during the Years 1886 and 1887.
Annals Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College, XX XI. Part II.
pp. 261-545.

5. Investigation of Thunderstorms in New England. In Report
on the Forecasting of Thunderstorms during the Summer of 1892,

ol

by N. B. Conger. United States Department of Agriculture, Weather
Bureau, Bulletin No. 9, 8vo, Washington, 1893, pp. 30-50.

6. Our Immigration Laws: What they are and what Changes should
be made in them. The Boston Commonwealth, July 15, 1893.

7. Edited: The American Meteorological Journal, an Illustrated
Monthly devoted to Scientific Meteorology and Allied Branches of
Study, 8vo, Ginn & Company, Boston, Mass., Publishers.

By J. B. Woodworth : —

1. The Ice-wall on the Beach at Hull, Mass., January, 1898. Sci-
ence, Feb: 10, 1893, XXI. pp. 71, 72 (38 figs.).

2. Feeding-lines of a Living Land Gasteropod on Lichened Slate.
Science, March 24, 1893, XXI. p. 159.

3. Spirula fragilis found on the Beach near Gay Head, Mass. The
Nautilus, February, 1893, VI. pp. 119, 120.

4. Subjects for Theses, with leading References to the Literature.
Department of Geology, Course 8, Bulletin VII. Published by the
University. pp. 15.

d. Notes on the Wood or Fallow Ant of Southeastern Massachusetts.
Science, Sept. 8, 1893, XXII. pp. 132, 133.

By L. S. Griswold : —

Whetstones and the Novaculites of Arkansas. Annual Report of
the Geological Survey of Arkansas, 1890, Vol. III., Little Rock, Ark.,
1892, pp. xviii., 443, with 9 plates and 2 maps.

A Basic Dike in the Connecticut Triassic. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodl.,
August, 1893, XVI. No. 14, pp. 239-242, with 1 plate.

By C. L. Whittle : —

1. Some Dynamic and Metasomatic Phenomena in a Metamorphic
Conglomerate in the Green Mountains. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Feb., 1893,
IV. pp. 147-166, with 2 plates.

2. An Ottrelite-bearing Phase of a Metamorphic Conglomerate in
the Green Mountains. Amer. Journal Sci., Oct., 1892, XLIV. pp.
270-277.

By R. E. Dodge: —

1. The Moon’s Face, by G. K. Gilbert. [A review.] Amer. Met.
Journ., 1893, X. pp. 126-131.

32

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN ZOOLOGY.

By E. L. Marx.

THE instruction in Zodlogy during the Academic year 1892-93
has been substantially the same as that of the previous year, the
only exception being a change in the course in Osteology by Dr.
Slade, which is now conducted as a research course (Zodl. 20 ¢).

The accompanying table shows the number of students by classes
in each of the zoological courses : —

| | |
j Class. Gr. | Sen. Jun. | Soph. | Fr. | Sp. Be.

iV ior?) Merl) ier)

as
eR
—T

to bo
courWN re

|

The laboratory work in Zodlogy 1 was under the immediate
supervision of Mr. H. M. Kelly, the Assistant during the previous
year, who had as sub-assistants Dr. H. S. Pratt, and Messrs.
J. H. Gerould, H. L. Jones, C. A. Kofoid, and A. G Mayer.

The department was also fortunate in being able to retain for
another year the services of Mr. W. 8S. Nickerson as Assistant in
Zoélogy 2. The number of students in Zodlogy 5 necessitated the
employment of an assistant in that course, — Mr. W. A. Lecompte.
Each of the students wrote a thesis in connection with and sup-
plementary to the routine dissections of the course on a problem
in comparative anatomy.

As usual, Dr. W. McM. Woodworth assisted in the laboratory
work in Zodlogy 4 and 5, and gave a portion of the lectures in the
former course. The number of students in these courses exceeded
the accommodations in room 2, and it was necessary to divide the
class for laboratory work into sections, and assign them to different

33

rooms, — an arrangement that entailed considerable inconvenience
to students as well as instructors. If the classes continue to be as
large, it will be very desirable to provide in the future additional
room for their accommodation. Temporary relief from the over-
crowded condition of the room for students engaged in research
was provided by the Director of the Museum, who allowed Drs.
Davenport and Woodworth to fit up one of the rooms used for the
storage of collections as a private laboratory, in which a place was
also made for one of the advanced students.

Satisfactory progress was made by those engaged in research,
and the meetings of the Zodlogical Club every two weeks were
well attended. At Commencement the degree of Ph. D. was con-
ferred on one student, now Professor of Zodlogy in the University
of California, and that of A. M. on three others.

Considerable time was given, especially by the chairman of the
Department and Dr. Woodworth, to the preparation and arrange-
ment of material for the World’s Fair Exhibit at Chicago. The
zoological exhibit contained, besides photographs of the various
laboratories, samples of work done by students, and special appli-
ances and apparatus used in the laboratories and lectures. The
collection also embraced both wax and plaster models, in various
stages of advancement, made from microscopic objects and such
apparatus as is employed by advanced students in making
them.

During the second half of the year Dr. Davenport gave at the
Museum a brief course of lectures on ‘* Morphogenesis,’ which was
open to all members of the University interested in the subject.
Similar courses of lectures on other topics would undoubtedly be
valuable both to zodlogical students and others interested in the
work of the Department.

Since my last report the following contributions from the
Zodlogical Laboratory, Nos. XXXIII.-XXXVII., have been pub-
lished : —

XXXIII. On Urnatella gracilis. By C. B. Davenport. 44 pp., 6 pl.
January, 1893.

XXXIV. Note on the Carotids and the Ductus Botalli of the Alligator.
By C. B. Davenport. 6 pp.,1 pl. January, 1893.

XXXV. On the Eyes, the Integumentary Sense Papille, and the
Integument of the San Diego Blind Fish (Typhlogobius californiensis,
Steindachner). By W. E. Ritter. 54 pp.,4 pl. April, 1893.

5

34

XXXVI. The Development of the Scales of Lepidosteus. By W. S.
Nickerson. 26 pp. 4 pl. July, 1893.

XXXVII. Studies in Morphogenesis. I. On the Development of
the Cerata in Aolis. By C. B. Davenport. 8 pp., 2 pl. July, 1893.

Since the last report there has also been published “ Polyche-
rus caudatus, nov. gen. et nov. sp.,” by Edward Laurens Mark.
‘“‘ Festschrift zum siebenzigsten Geburtstage Rudolf Leuckarts,”
pp- 298-309. 1 Pl. Leipzig, [Oct.] 1892. Also the translation of
Hertwig’s ‘‘ Lehrbuch der Entwicklungsgeschichte,” ete., under the
title, “* Text-book of the Embryology of Man and Mammals.”

The first part of Korschelt u. Heider’s “ Entwicklungsgeschichte
der wirbellosen Thiere,” by Drs. Mark and Woodworth, is nearly
ready for the printer.

By the appointment of an additional Instructor in Zodlogy more
time will be allowed for the supervision of research work, and two
half-courses are added, one by Dr. Parker on The Nervous System
and its Terminal Organs, the other by Dr. Davenport on Experi-
mental Morphology.

The most urgent need of the Department is still the proper equip-
ment of the aquarium and vivarium, there being no adequate pro-
vision for keeping even the animals required in the laboratory work
of the regular courses; these are often needed at a time when fresh
material cannot otherwise be had. But, for the proper develop-
ment of the department, provision for keeping fresh material to be
used in the class-work of undergraduates, is less important than
it is to have well arranged compartments in which animals may be
subjected to constant and predetermined conditions of environ-
ment, the effects of which may be systematically studied. Pro-
vision should be made for carrying on investigations of this kind
running over long periods of time, as well as for the briefer experi-
mentations which may be carried on by students during the term
of a single course. Those engaged in embryological work should
also be provided here with every facility for accumulating and
keeping under control the material needed in their researches.

The necessities of the Department in this particular, which have
long been anticipated by the Curator, so far as regards the space
in the Museum building required, cannot much longer remain un-
satisfied, unless we are willing to accept an inferior position in the
facilities afforded for advanced work in Zodlogy.

35

REPORT ON OSTEOLOGY.
By Danret DENISON SLADE.

SINCE my last report, the osteological collections have received
no important additions. They remain in good condition.

In the collection of disarticulated skeletons, many of the orders,
notably the Chiroptera, Insectivora, and Rodentia, are deficient in
several of the families. This lack of material is a serious draw-
back, not only to the instructor, but to the scientific student, and
it is hoped that it may be supplied in the near future by means now
unforeseen.

Specimens from various sources have been received for identifi-
cation, and have been duly returned after determination.

In accordance with my own previous ideas, and in unison with
the suggestions made by the Curator in his last Annual Report,
in regard to the original aim of the Museum, to the effect that its
highest usefulness may be made available for the purposes of
science, and for the more advanced studies, the course of compara-
tive osteology during the last academical year, was devoted more
especially to research. This plan, although it does not debar
those students who desire to gain merely a general acquaintance
with the subject, allows those more advanced to pursue the inves-
tigations in which they may be especially interested.

Instead of a final examination, as formerly required, written
theses have been adopted, and the results have been very satisfac-
tory. Lectures, as also oral examinations, have been given at the
option of the instructor. The important subject of Dentition also
received more attention than it has been possible to give to it dur-
ing the few past years. Four students, three Graduates and one
Senior, availed themselves of the opportunities offered by the ex-
tensive collections of the University in this department during the
last year, — opportunities not to be obtained in any other institu-
tion in the country.!

1 This small number of students, as is the case in other departments, must be at-
tributed to the increased number of elective studies.

36

Besides a review of Professor Flower’s volume on ‘*‘ The Horse,”
and also other papers, the following have been published by
me : —

Osteological Notes, Science, Vol. XXI., No. 523, p. 78; No. 539,
p- 301.

Ready for publication in the Museum Bulletin : —
The Significance of the Jugal Arch.

37

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

By WILLIAM BREWSTER.

THE collection of mounted Mammals has received the following
additions : —

A Bat from Alaska ; an Elephant, a Hippopotamus, four Ante-
lopes ( Oryx beisa, Nanotragus melanotis, Cephalolophus pygmeus,
and C. Mazwelli) and a Wild Hog, from Africa; and five Lemurs
CGneluding Lemur catta, L. renifrons, Propithecus coronatus, and
Microrhynchus laniger), from Madagascar. A fine skin of the
African Leopard has also been mounted for exhibition in the Afri-
can Room.

The large and very valuable collection of mounted birds given
to the Museum by Mrs. Greene Smith, as described in the last
Annual Report, has been prepared for exhibition and arranged in
the new cases in the North American Room. After the specimens
had been reidentified and relabelled by the assistant and catalogued
by Miss Parker, they were transferred from the original moss-
covered stands — which proved unsuitable for Museum purposes —
to plain white painted stands, uniform with those in general use
throughout the Exhibition Rooms. This part of the work and the
general renovation of the collection were intrusted to Mr. James
T. Clark, a well known professional taxidermist, whose skill in
removing dust and grease stains, mending broken parts, and re-
storing rumpled or defective plumage has enhanced very materially
the general beauty of the collection, as well as reduced the num-
ber of specimens too imperfect to be retained to but little more
than one hundred.

Our old North American collection has been similarly treated,
and all the damaged or worthless specimens remounted or thrown
out. Those remaining have been arranged with the Greene Smith
birds, but the latter are distinguished by their different labels. The
combined collection, in accordance with the promise made to Mrs.

38

Smith, will be hereafter called the ‘‘ Greene Smith Collection of
North American Birds.”” Taken as a whole, it forms an attractive
and very satisfactory representation of the North American bird
fauna. Of course there are still gaps to be filled, but most of these
concern birds which can be obtained without much difficulty. A
pair of Bachman’s Warblers, a Snowy Heron, Night Heron, Mal-
lard, Wood Duck, Harlequin Duck, Goosander, and Hooded Mer-
ganser have been already bought for this purpose.

The Greene Smith Humming-birds, numbering about three
hundred specimens, haye been placéd on exhibition in the South
American room, where an entire case has been devoted to them.
This disposition is perhaps open to some criticism on the ground
that certain of the species are peculiar to the West Indies, while
others breed only in North America. But as by far the greater
number are exclusively South or Central American, and as the
family is of undoubted Neotropical origin, it seemed best to waive
this objection. The only alternative was a place in the Systematic
Room or in one of the halls, where the light would have been more
or less unsatisfactory. The case in the South American room
has a clear, direct light, admirably adapted for bringing out the
metallic or iridescent tints which form the chief glory of these
exquisite little creatures. Mr. Clark has displayed the specimens
to unusual advantage by mounting them on invisible wires fas-
tened to horizontal wooden strips, which extend quite across the
case and rise in tiers, each above and a little behind the next, like
the seats in a theatre. The flexibility of the wires made it easy
to adjust each specimen at precisely the right angle with the rays
of light, and the birds, being placed close together and freed from
the usual detracting adjuncts of shelves and stands, present an
appearance nearly as brilliant and striking as that of a bank of
flowers. If the approval of the visiting public may be taken as a
criterion, the success of this unconventional treatment can be open
to no doubt, for the case of Humming-birds has attracted general
and marked attention ever since it was first placed on exhibition.
It is perhaps necessary to add that esthetic considerations were
not allowed to interfere with a strict scientific classification, and
that small labels bearing the usual inscriptions are pasted on the
horizontal strips below the specimens to which they relate.

Five birds sent to the American Museum a year or more ago
have been returned by Mr. Allen.

3g

The Assistant in this department has published the following
papers and notes in “The Auk” : —

Description of a new Humming-bird from Northern Mexico.

A Brood of Young Flickers (Colaptes auratus) and how they were
fed.

On the Occurrence of certain Birds in British Columbia.

The Ipswich Sparrow (Ammodramus princeps) on the Coast of
Georgia.

40

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.
By SamureL GARMAN.

THE work in these departments has included fitting up exhibits
for the Pacific and the Asiatic rooms, and rearrangement of the
North American and the Australian specimens, beside the usual
routine work, identifications, and studies. Better representatives
have replaced a considerable number of those formerly on the
shelves, and many duplicates have been entirely withdrawn from
the collections. Several tortoises and a large alligator were
mounted for the North American room. Among the outgoing
material was that furnished students in the laboratories, and a
couple of series of Reptiles and Batrachians sent to Dr. Hurter.

Donations were received from Mr. Philipp Adams, Dr. Harrison
Allen, A. N. Cheney, Esq., Mr. Chick, William Clapp, Hon. J. G.
A. Creighton, Prof. W. Faxon, J. B. Greenough, Esq., Mr. Thomas
A. Hillery, Dr. L. C. Jones, W. H. Jones, Esq., Mrs. J. M. May-
nard, Colonel McDonald, U. 8. Fish Commissioner, Gerrit S.
Miller, Esq., Mr. Wm. B. Richardson, Mr. W. W. Rockwell, Robt.
Gaston Smith, Esq., Mr. Rollo W. Snell, Miss Elizabeth Taylor,
Bradford Torrey, Esq., and Mr. N. Vickary. Many of the acces-
sions are of rare and desirable species. Especially valuable are the
live specimens sent by Dr. Hurter; kept living for a time, they
afforded the means of determining much relating to the life his-
tories of their species.

A particular study of the Acipenseroids was made by Mr. Nic-
olas Borodine, sent out by the Russian government.

The amount of loss from evaporation, leakage, or breakage is
very small.

The list of publications is made up of the following, in addition
to unsigned reviews and other articles.

In “ Science’ : —

‘¢OQn Chelydra serpentina.”
‘¢ On the Growth of the Rattle of Crotalide.”

:

41

“The Lac de Marbre Trout.” (Reprinted by Forest and Stream,
and others.)

In the Proceedings of the Massachusetts Historical Society : —

‘**On Cabinet, Library, and Wardrobe Pests,” in ‘‘ The Ravages of
Bookworms,” by the Librarian of the Society, Dr. S. A. Green. (Also
in Science.)

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.
By SaMuEL HENSHAW.

Appitions to the collection of the department have been
received from Messrs. A. Agassiz, M. A. Barber, F. Blanchard, P.
P. Calvert, D. W. Coquillett, J. W. Freese, H. H. Lyman, C. J.
Maynard, G. S. Miller, Jr., A. P. Morse, S. H. Scudder, J. G.
Shute, Roland Thaxter, William Trelease, and the Peabody Acad-
emy of Science, Salem.

Various portions of the collection have been studied at the
Museum by Messrs. F. Blanchard, T. L. Casey, H. G. Dyar, E. P.
Felt, C. H. Fernald, Roland Hayward, G. H. Horn, J. G. Jack,
A. P. Morse, F. W. Russell, S. H. Scudder, and Roland Thaxter ;
assistance has also been given to Messrs. P. P. Calvert, D. W.
Coguillett, H. H. Lyman, and Roland Thaxter.

The entire collection has been examined three times, and though
not entirely free from pests, is, as a whole, in excellent condition.

The withdrawal of duplicates and the condensation of scattered
material has relieved the department of various odd boxes and
cabinets ; the Loew collection of Diptera and a part of the Odonata
are the only portions of the collection not in the regular Museum
boxes and cabinets.

A rearrangement of the cabinets, rendered desirable by the
increased space afforded by the additional room, has been effected ;
the systematic and biological collections of Lepidoptera and Co-
leoptera are in one room, the other orders are in a second room,
while the third room is reserved for the library and laboratory.

The routine work has been chiefly to facilitate the work of
specialists wishing to study the collection; for this purpose por-
tions of the Odonata, Orthoptera, Hemiptera, Coleoptera, and
Lepidoptera Rhopalocera have been rearranged.

Additional space having been granted in the North American
room, three boxes, two of Odonata and one of Hemiptera, are
ready to be placed on exhibition.

The library has been rearranged; a considerable number of
books have been transferred to the Museum library.

REPORT ON THE INVERTEBRATA (EXCLUSIVE OF
INSECTS).

By WALTER Faxon.

A coop deal of time has been spent during the past year in
rearranging and extending the exhibition collections of Inverte-
brata. A change of plan was decided upon early in the year, by
which the marine forms were to be eliminated from the rooms
assigned to illustration of the Continental Faune. Space was
thereby gained for a fuller display of land and fresh-water types,
and much unnecessary duplication of species exhibited in the
rooms devoted to the Oceanic Faune was avoided. This radical
change of plan involved a complete overhauling of the Invertebrata
in the North American, South American, and Europzo-Siberian
Rooms. An entirely new series of land and fresh-water shells has
been selected, mounted, and placed on exhibition in the African,
Australian, and Indian Faunal Rooms; another collection of ter-
restrial shells from the Polynesian Islands has been placed in one
of the cases in the Pacific Ocean Room. ‘The preparation of these
collections for exhibition was intrusted to Misses Clark and
Parker. The Pacific Ocean faunal collection, though far from
completed, was brought up to a condition such as to warrant
opening the room to the public last winter.

Material for study has been sent from the Museum to F. E.
Schulze, Berlin, C. Pictet, Geneva, F. Meinert, Copenhagen, G.
W. Miller, Naples, and R. P. Bigelow, Baltimore. A collection
of corals has been given to the Bigelow School, Marlborough,
Mass. Gifts of specimens have been received from the California
Academy of Sciences, the Boston Society of Natural History, the
U. S. National Museum, A. Agassiz, Cambridge, Ign. Bohrar,
Madrid, G. S. Miller, Jr., Cambridge, and C. J. Maynard, Boston.

An elaborate final Report on the Museum collection of Pagu-
ride dredged by the “ Blake ” Expeditions of 1877-80 has been
prepared by Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards and Mr. EH. L. Bou-

te

vier, and published in the Memoirs of the Museum, Vol. XIV., 172
pages, 12 plates. My own Report on the Crustacea secured during
the cruise of the U. S. Fish Commission steamer “ Albatross” off
the tropical Pacific Coast and in the Gulf of California, during
1891, was finished last winter. On account of the length of time
required to prepare the plates which are to accompany this Report,
preliminary descriptions of the new genera and species have been
printed in the Museum Bulletin, Vol. XXIV., pp. 147-220.

ee

REPORT ON THE PALZONTOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By Atpueus Hyatt.

In connection with work on the Carboniferous Cephalopods of
Texas, which will be shortly published, the Assistant has classi-
fied and renamed the corresponding collection in the Museum,
and made a number of preparations showing the stages of growth
of different species and genera.

The Whitney Collection of California fossils presented to the
Museum this year has been looked over and in part studied. It
is small, but it contains some fossils of extraordinary interest.
Among those that may be mentioned are a number of the types of
Gabb’s descriptions of California fossils. The value of these origi-
nals, especially with reference to the history of Mesozoic Geology
of the West cannot be overestimated.

Through Professor Pickering the Museum has also received a
small collection of South American fossils collected by Mr. A. E.
Douglass.

The department is indebted to Dr. R. T. Jackson for work upon
the collections, and the superintendence of the work of Miss Clarke
in mending broken fossils of the Gebhard and other collections.

The following papers have been published : —

Bioplastology and the related Branches of Scientific Research, by
Alpheus Hyatt, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XXVI., 1893, pp. 59-125.

The Terms of Bioplastology, by Alpheus Hyatt, Zool. Anzeiger,
Nos. 426, 427, 1833.

Bemerkungen zu Schulze’s System einer deskriptiren Terminologie,
Biol. Centralbl., XIII., Nos. 15, 16, 1893.

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.
By Miss F. M. Stack.

Durine the year ending September 1, 1893, the Library has
received 633 volumes, of which 5 are atlases, 1,830 parts, and 107
pamphlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS.

Gift Ohee ce ) oe ea ts es La en ee tS 118 11

xchange A. 3.) 2 2 6 aa aa pee 8S 675 48

Burchasew tees se pes A ott Tel gee oe 224 1

ACCAIPASBIZ Bre, io. teh Sy Coby eee ee oe OO 785 40

Bindinegrarts* 7 ects ae ee toe olG

Wihiineyaliprary: tre See es ee Wee Lees 33 7
633 1830 107

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the Whitney Library) is 21,024. There are 14,417
pamphlets bound in 2,452 volumes, making the total number of
volumes 23,476.

‘
;

47

[A]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1892-93.

Of the Bulletin : —
Vol. XVI. [Geological Series Vol. II.].

No. 11. The Conditions of Erosion beneath Derr Guiacrers based upon a
Study of the BoutpeR Trarin from Iron Hitz, Cumberland, R. I. By
N. S. SHater. pp. 42. Map and 4 Plates. January, 1893.

No. 12. Acmite Tracuyte from the Crazy Mountains, Montana. By J. E.
Wo rr and R. S. Tarr. pp. 10. April, 1893.

No. 13. Report on the DrepGrne OpeRATIONs off the West Coast of Central
America to the GaLapaGos, etc. V. Report upon Rocks collected from
the Galapagos Islands. By G. P. Mrerrity. pp. 4. July, 1893.

‘No. 14. A Basic Dike in the Connecticut Triassic. By L. S. Griswo.p.
pp-4and1 Plate. August, 1898.

[Vol. XVI. to be continued.]
Vol. XXIII [Complete.]

No. 4. Studies from the Newport Marine Laboratory. — XXIX. Preliminary
Note on some Modifications of the CHromaropHores of FisHes and
‘Crustaceans. By A. Acassiz. pp. 6. 1 Plate. December, 1892.

No. 5. Reports on the DREDGING Orrrations off the West Coast of Central
America to the GaLapaGos, etc., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
“Arpatross.” III. On a Peculiar Type of ARENACEOUS FORAMINIFER
from the American Tropical Pacific, Neusina AGassiz1. By A. Goés.
pp. 4. 1 Plate. December, 1892.

No. 6. Report on the Resurts or Dreperne by the U. S. Coast Survey
Steamer “ Brake.” XXXIV. Report on the Mottusca dredged by the
“Brake” in 1880, including Descriptions of several New Species. By
KaTHARINE J. Busn. pp. 43. 2 Plates. January, 1893.

Vol. XXIV. [Complete. }

No. 1. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — X XXIII. On Urna-
TELLA Graciztis. By C. B. DavENporr. pp.44. 6 Plates. January, 1893.

No. 2. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXXIV. Note on
the Carotips and the Ducrus Borattr of the ALiiGator. By C. B.
Davenport. pp. 4. 1 Plate. January, 1895.

No.

No.

No.

48

3. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXXV. On tlhe
Eyes, the Integumentary Sense PapiLtLz, and the InTEGuMENT of the
San Diego Blind Fish (TyPHLOGOBIUS CALIFORNIENSIS, STEINDACHNER)
By W. E. Ritter. pp. 54. 4 Plates. April, 1893.

.4. Reports on the Drepeine Operations off the West Coast of Central

America to the GaLapacos, ete., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer.
“ Arpatross.” IV. Vorlaiufiger Bericht itiber die erbeuteten HoLtoruv-
RIEN. Von H. Lupwic. pp. 10. June, 1893.

5. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory.— XXXVI. The Deve -
OPMENT of the Scares of LepipostEeus. By W. S. Nickerson. pp. 27.
4 Plates. July, 1893.

6. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. — XXXVII. Srupies
in MorrHocenesis. I. On the DEVELopMeENT of the Cerata in Mo .is.
By C. B. Davenport. pp. 8. 2 Plates. July, 1893.

. 7. Reports on the Drepeine Operations off the West Coast of Central

America to the GALAPAGOS, etc., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
“ ArpaTross.” VI. Preliminary Descriptions of NEw Species of Crus-
TACEA. By W. Faxon. pp. 72. August, 1893.

Of the Memoirs : —
Vol. XIV. [Complete.]

No.

3. Reports on the Resutts or Drepeine by the United States Coast
Survey Steamer “ Brake.” XXXIII. Descriptions des Crustacts de la
Famille des Pacuriens recueillis pendant Expédition. Par A. MItne-
Epwarps et E. L. Bouvier. pp. 172. 12 Plates. April, 1893.

49

[B]

Tue Faculty of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy will receive
applications from candidates desiring to occupy the table at the Naples
Zoological Station, which has been placed at its disposal from October
1, 1893.

The applicant must be (or have been recently’) a student or instructor
at some American University, preferably a person who has taken the
degree of Ph.D. or S.D.; he must have published some creditable
original investigation, and should be reeommemded as an able investi-
gator by the professor under whom he has studied.

Applicants will please forward to the undersigned their recommen-
dations, and a statement of their qualifications, and of the subject to
which they hope to devote themselves.

In order that the Faculty may make the most satisfactory disposi-
tion of the table during the whole year, the applicants are requested to
state the length of time they desire to remain at Naples, and also the
earliest and latest dates within which they can avail themselves of the
appointment.

The Faculty will, at suitable intervals, nominate to the Corporation
of Harvard College for approval the incumbent or incumbents for the
year 1895-94.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,
Director.

~~!

[C]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

IN THE HANDS OF THE TREASURER OF HARVARD COLLEGE, Sept. 1, 1893.

Sturgie-Hooper Fund: 9: cy 5 fk Ga oe ce Be Bh nee tw)
Grayshund? Sees Gee 3. te. bid, Boe ee ose ch et ee 50,000.00
Avassiz Memorial Bund ~:* 5... 61s. ss) ist eres as oe ve ee ee
Teachers andsbapis Bund 6s )cyc.n.u pecs. wien 2 leh ce 7,594.01
PermanentsBund);. |. <4 eed os © Bde Se oy ep ee ee ee
Hm DOldte Wun: - ce Were usc, Seo ee ae oe 1 ek geet, cnn eee 7,740.66
Virginia Barret Gibbs Fund PE es SIE ce 5,000.00

$585,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of which
is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in an analysis
of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Humboldt Fund (about $400) can be applied for the benefit of
one or more students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport
Marine Laboratory, the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl,
or elsewhere.

Applications for the tables reserved for advanced Students at the Newport
Marine Laboratory, and for the tables at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be
made to the Curator of the Museum before the 1st of May. Applicants should
state their qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

The income of the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship Fund, of the value of $250,
is assigned annually, with the approval of the Faculty of the Museum, at the recom-
mendation of the Professors of Zodlogy and of Comparative Anatomy in Harvard
University, “in supporting or assisting to support one or more students who have
shown decided talents in Zodlogy, and preferably in the direction of Marine
Zoology.”

See Appendix B of this Report for the conditions upon which the table at the
Naples Zodlogical Station is assigned.

ANNUAL REPORT

THE CURATOR

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT HARVARD COLLEGE,

TO THE

PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE,

FOR

1893-94.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:
UNIVERSITY PRESS: JOHN WILSON AND SON.
1894.

FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

Faculty.

CHARLES W. ELIOT, President.
ALEXANDER AGASSIZ, Curator. GEORGE L. GOODALE.
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY, Secretary. HENRY P. WALCOTT.

Officers.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ
JOSIAH D. WHITNEY
NATHANIEL S. SHALER .
KE. L. MARK : sre ee
WILLIAM MORRIS DAVIS
J. ELIOT WOLFF .

Director and Curator.
Sturgis-Hooper Professor of Geology.
Professor of Geology.

Hersey Professor of Anatomy.
Professor of Physical Geography.
Assistant Professor of Petroyraphy.

APPOINTED BY THE FACULTY OF THE MUSEUM.

WALTER FAXON .

DADS SLADE.
SAMUEL GARMAN
WILLIAM BREWSTER .
ALPHEUS HYATT
SAMUEL HENSHAW.
MISS F. M. SLACK . .
MAGNUS WESTERGREN .

Assistant in Charge.

Assistant in Osteology.

Assistant in Herpetology and Ichthyology.
Assistant in Ornithology and Mammalogy.
Assistant in Paleontology.

Assistant in Entomology.

Librarian.

Artist.

APPOINTED BY THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS.

ROBERT TRACY JACKSON .
J. B. WOODWORTH .

H. L. SMYTH .

G. H. PARKER ie :F

W. McM. WOODWORTH

Cc. B. DAVENPORT

H. S. JENNINGS .

H. V. NEAL

ROBERT DeECOURCEY WARD .

RICHARD ELWOOD DODGE
LEON S. GRISWOLD.

R. A. DALY

Cities WEE Bis:

Cc. R. EASTMAN

Instructor in Palaeontology.

Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Geological Surveying.
Instructor in Zodlogy.

Instructor in Microscopic Anatomy.
Instructor in Zoology.

Assistant in the Zodlogical Laboratories.
Assistant in the Zodlogical Laboratories.
Assistant in Meteorology.

Instructor in Geology.

Instructor in Geology.

Assistant in the Geological Laboratory.
Assistant in the Petrographical Laboratory.
Assistant in the Paleontological Laboratory:

ee ee ee eee

REP Ord

To THE PRESIDENT AND FELLOWS OF HARVARD COLLEGE :—

Durine the past year the usual courses of instruction have been
given at the Museum in the Natural History Laboratories. Those
in Zodlogy were given by Professor Mark, Dr. Slade, Dr. Daven-
port, and Dr. Parker, assisted in the Laboratory work by Messrs.
W. E. Castle, J. H. Gerould, H. V. Neal, and W. S. Nickerson.
Dr. W. McM. Woodworth has, as in previous years, taken charge
of the Laboratory work, and has given some lectures in the course
on Microscopical Anatomy.

Professors Whitney, Shaler, Davis, and Wolff gave courses of
instruction in Geology, Paleontology, Physical Geography, Mete-
orology, and Petrography. Messrs. Harris, Robert T. Jackson,
J. B. Woodworth, R. EK. Dodge, C. E. Ladd, T. A. Jaggar, L. S.
Griswold, R. DeC. Ward, and H. L. Smyth were the Assistants in
these Departments.

For the details of these courses of instruction, as well as of the
summer courses in Geology, I would refer to the accompanying
special reports of the Professors and Instructors.

Professor Davis spent the past summer in Europe, with the
special object of studying certain rivers and valleys in England,
France, and Wiirtemberg, and of attending the Sixth International
Geological Congress in Zurich.

The Newport Marine Laboratory has, as usual, been open to
advanced students in Zodlogy. Hight students spent a part of
their time in the Laboratory collecting material for their special
investigations, which they will continue at the Museum, and
prepare for publication.

The Laboratory has been equipped with a microphotographic
apparatus. Dr. W. McM. Woodworth, who spent considerable time

4

at Newport, made a large number of slides of interesting pelagic
types. He assisted me materially in preparing the illustrations

for an article on some variations of the genus Eucope, which -

we hope to publish jointly during the coming winter. From our
short experience with photography at the sea-shore, it is evident
that it is destined to become an important adjunct to every marine
laboratory as a rapid method of sketching, not only pelagic types,
but fresh preparations, whether microscopic or macroscopic.

We have to thank Colonel Marshall McDonald, United States
Fish Commissioner, for the facilities granted to our students in
connection with their work at the Fish Commission Station at
Wood’s Holl.

It is greatly to be desired that, in addition to any general
laboratory for research which may in the future be established,
the University should have its own marine laboratory, in charge

of the same instructors in the different departments, who are now ~

obliged to discontinue the supervision of their students during a
great part of their advanced work.

The income of the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship was
divided, according to the terms of the gift, among some of the
students who occupied their time in the study of marine zodlogy.

Colonel Marshall McDonald has returned to us in excellent
condition the material sent by the Museum to the Fish Commission
Building of the Columbian Exhibit. The photographs illustrating
the characteristic exhibition rooms have also been returned.

On account of the greatly increased number of visitors at the
Museum on Sundays, the city of Cambridge has detailed a special
policeman for duty on that day.

The Museum has received an anonymous contribution, which
was applied to the increase of Dr. Hagen’s salary during a part of
the past fiscal year.

We are indebted to Professor Hyatt for the care he has given
to the Paleontological Collections in his charge, and to Mr. Brew-
ster for his interest in supervising the care of the collection of
Birds and Mammals.

Owing to the immense accumulations of collections in former
years, it has often been impossible for the Assistants in charge to

take proper care of the accessions, so that much material was.

often misplaced or improperly labelled. Our staff is so limited in
numbers that it is most difficult for us to distribute their work

ee —

5

to the best advantage of the collections. This is specially true of
the large alcoholic and dry collection of Marine Invertebrates.
Fortunately, thanks to Professor Faxon’s interest in the collections
placed under his charge, this unsatisfactory state of things is fast
approaching an end. Mr. Faxon has also been indefatigable in
his care of the exhibition collections. They have been greatly
improved in their appearance since he has taken general charge
of the exhibition rooms.

Our magnificent collections of Fossil Vertebrates and Inverte-
brates remain without a special custodian. Under these condi-

. tions it is of course impossible for us to fill intelligently the

existing wants, and keep the collections up with the demands of
the day. Until the means are provided for two Assistants, one
for Vertebrate and one for Invertebrate Paleontology, we can-
not hope to make any progress towards the arrangement of the
Paleontological Exhibition Rooms.

The unfortunate condition of things existing in the Palzonto-
logical Department is not wholly limited to those collections. It
exists in nearly all the other departments, but to a less degree, —
as in Conchology, in Entomology, in Marine Invertebrates, and in
Birds and Mammals.

While it is not within the province of a University Museum to
compete with national, state, or municipal establishments, either
in this country or abroad, it should be possible for a University
Museum to provide not only for the maintenance of collections
necessary to promote original research among its Professors, but
it should be also possible to make appropriations to obtain such
additions to this material, either by purchase or by sending out
collectors, as will keep the Professors and Assistants in touch with
the progress of their departments.

In the Entomological Department I have to note the increased
use of both the collections and library by entomologists and
students.

Comparatively little progress has been made with the arrange-
ment of the Geological and Geographical Exhibition Rooms, owing
to the want of money for obtaining the necessary cases. With a
very moderate expenditure a beginning might be made by using
temporarily the cases from the Chicago Exposition given to the
Geological Department by the Corporation, as a large number of
specimens, both large and small, have been brought together, so

6

that an exhibit of sufficient interest to warrant opening the rooms
could probably be arranged.

The equipment of the Lecture Room of the Geological Depart-
ment has been greatly improved by the installation of an electric
lantern, and the formation of an extensive collection of Photo-
graphs (the Gardner Collection), and the accumulation of a
great number of lantern slides specially selected by the different
instructors.

I must again call attention to the crowded condition of the
Laboratories of the Zodlogical and Geological Departments, which
causes great loss of time to both instructors and students. Some
of the Assistants in those Departments are temporarily housed
in the rooms devoted to special collections, and do not have the
facilities for work to which they are entitled. No progress has
been made towards the equipment of the needed Vivarium and
Aquarium.

In view of the increased demands made upon the Museum by
the growth of the Undergraduate Department, from which our
income is in no way benefited, the Corporation has kindly voted
an annual subsidy of fifteen hundred dollars to the Museum, as re-
payment for the expenditures made in the past by the Museum
on behalf of the Undergraduate Department, this allowance to
continue until the indebtedness of the Museum is extinguished.

Our exchanges of publications with scientific societies are on a
satisfactory footing. 'The Library has received from that source
the usual number of invoices. The number of volumes in the
Library is now over twenty-four thousand.

A list of the publications of the instructors and officers of the
Museum, other than those contained in our Memoirs and Bulle-
tins, will be found accompanying the special reports.

For a complete List of the Publications of the Museum during
the past year I would refer to Appendix A. The number of our
publications has been much smaller than usual. We have only
issued seven numbers of Vol. XXV. of the Bulletin, — less than
one hundred pages. This is due in part to the number of unfin-
ished Reports of the ‘Albatross’? Expedition, now in press, and
also to the inability of the Museum to provide for the printing
of the usual number of contributions from the Natural History
Laboratories.

Owing to the financial straits of the Museum, Dr. Mark has been

tb

compelled to send the results of the work done in his department
to various scientific societies for publication. He will thus be able
to issue a few of the contributions from his Laboratory ; but there
are at least five numbers, which, with the accompanying plates,
will nearly fill a volume of the Bulletin, for whieh no provision
has been made. The Museum has no funds specially devoted to
publications. We have been able so far to meet the wants of the
Zodlogical Laboratory. But, owing to the large outlays incurred
by the Museum for the benefit of the Undergraduate Department,
we shall be able to publish only a part of the contributions to the
Bulletin from the different Laboratories until the indebtedness of
the Museum has been paid off. It is greatly to be hoped that this
important function of the Museum will not be curtailed for any
great length of time.

During the coming year the publications of the “ Albatross”
will more than supply this deficiency, as we may hope to issue
the Monograph of Professor Ludwig on the Holothurians, and the
Report of Dr. Bergh on the Opisthobranchs, of Dr. Ortmann on
the Pelagic Schizopods, of Dr. Miiller on the Ostracods, and of Dr.
Giesbrecht on the Copepods, some of which are already in the
hands of the binder, others in press, and others nearly completed.
From the expedition of the “* Wild Duck”’ to the Bahamas, a short
paper by Mr. Dall on the Shells of the Bahamas, and one by Mr.
A. G. Mayer on some Meduse from the adjoining waters, have
been sent to the printers. I have myself nearly revised the proofs
of the Report on the Bahamas and the Coast of Cuba.

Mr. Garman has completed a Memoir on the Cyprinodonts_ of
North America, mainly based upon material brought together by
Professor Agassiz many years ago, and for which a number of
plates had been prepared by Mr. Sonrel.

Professor Faxon’s Report on the Crustacea of the “ Albatross”
is in the hands of the printer. It is accompanied by over sixty
plates, which are nearly all printed.

I have also received from Professor Alphonse Milne-Edwards
the manuscript for a fine Monograph on the Galatheidx of the
“ Blake”? written in conjunction with Mr. Bouvier. This memoir
is accompanied by twelve plates, which are now in the hands of
the lithographer.

In connection with the explorations of the ‘* Wild Duck”’ along
the coast of Cuba, there were many interesting points connected

8

with the history of the elevated coral reefs to which it was impos-
sible for me to give the necessary attention. I therefore gladly
availed myself of the proposition of Professor R. T. Hill of the
United States Geological Survey to make an extended examination
of parts of the coast of Cuba. The Director of the United States
Geological Survey was kind enough to grant him leave of absence
for three months. Professor Hill’s expedition was most success-
ful. I have received from him an interesting Report on the Geol-
ogy of the Cuban Coast. This will be published in the Museum
Bulletin as soon as the necessary illustrations can be prepared.
An abstract of his observations has been published in the Sep-
tember number of the American Journal of Science.

I have myself prepared for the Bulletin a Report of my last
winter’s visit to the Bermudas. This will be published in the
same volume with the Report on the Bahamas. These two papers
are specially devoted to the geological history of the Bahamas and
Bermudas, and to the study of their coral reefs in connection with
those of Florida and the Caribbean Sea, as well as the living and
elevated reefs of the Cuban Coast.

From Messrs. Charles Wachsmuth and Frank Springer we have
received the manuscript and plates of their Memoir on the Cri-
noidea Camerata of North America. This will form one of the
most important publications on the subject ever issued. The
authors have devoted years to the preparation of this magnificent
monograph. The beginning of the work dates back to the time
when Mr. Wachsmuth was Assistant at the Museum, having come
to Cambridge at Professor Agassiz’s request to take charge of the
collection of Crinoids, of which the material brought together by
Mr. Wachsmuth constituted an important part. After leaving
Cambridge, Mr. Wachsmuth settled in Burlington, in the midst
of the richest field of Fossil Crinoids, and commenced a second
collection. He then became associated with Mr. Springer, and the
work interrupted more than twenty years ago was resumed, and
has just been brought to a happy termination. To complement
their own unrivalled private collection, the authors have been
supplied with material from all private and public collections of
the United States, and from many persons and public institutions
abroad.

The Monograph is accompanied by 83 exquisite plates, drawn
under the supervision of the authors in their Museum, by Messrs.

ev SFR bee <> er

_—

ee ae

a

3)

Westergren and Ridgway. The publication of so elaborate a
Memoir will naturally require considerable time ; but we hope to
issue it as fast as it is practicable to print the manuscript and
prepare the plates for publication, it will occupy one volume of
text and one of plates.

Mr. J. N. Rose, of the United States Department of Agricul-
ture, has published a Report on the Plants collected at the Gala-
pagos during the ‘ Albatross” Expedition of 1891, in Vol. I. No. 6
of the Contributions from the United States National Herbarium.

Professor Verrill reports good progress with his Memoir on
the Alcyonaria of the ‘ Blake.” About forty plates are now
completed. Dr. Hartlaub is also well advanced with the Report
on the “ Albatross” Comatule. Mr. Hoyle has a number of plates
in hand to illustrate his Report on the Cephalopods, and Pro-
fessor Studer has the greater part of his Memoir on the Alcyo-
naria in hand. With the consent of Colonel Marshall McDonald,
a set of deep-sea Crustacea from the ‘ Albatross” was sent to
Professor Chun, who will prepare a Report on the Eyes of Deep-
Sea Crustacea in comparison with those of the surface and pelagic
ty pes.

Dr. A. Goés writes that he has completed his Report on the
“ Albatross” Foraminifera, and that the manuscript, with the ac-
companying plates, is on its way to the United States. The
collections of the ‘+ Albatross,’ as well as those made by the
“Wild Duck” at the Bahamas, and the large collection of
bottoms from the Caribbean and the east coast of the United
States, sent him for comparison by the United States Coast
Survey, the Fish Commission, and the National Museum, are also
packed and ready for shipment.

Mr. Westergren, having completed the plates for Mr. Faxon’s
Monograph on the Crustacea of the ‘* Albatross ’’ Expedition, has
been occupied in drawing the illustrations for Mr. Garman’s
Monograph of the Fishes of the same Expedition. Over twenty
plates have been finished.

I may mention, as among the more important invoices sent
from the Museum, the collection of deep-sea Crustacea and Kehino-
derms forwarded to the Oxford Museum with the consent of the
Fish Commissioner.

Material for study has been sent, among others, to Mr. True, to
Dr. Plate, to Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer, and to Professor

9

10 F

MeMurrich. Mr. Kofoid, of Ann Arbor, will prepare a paper on
the interesting group of Solenogasteride based upon material col-
lected by the ** Albatross” both in the Atlantic and in the Pacific.
The Atlantic species have been intrusted to Mr. Kofoid by Professor
Goode of the National Museum.

We have to thank Professor Mendenhall of the Coast Survey,
and Commander Sigsbee of the Hydrographic Office, for charts,
and for other assistance connected with my expeditions to the
Bahamas and to the Bermudas. To Professor George Davidson
we are indebted for a specimen of trachyte from Clipperton Island,
and for a sketch of that atoll. To Captain Wharton of the
British Hydrographic Office 1 am also indebted for information
regarding some early charts of the Bahamas, and to Captain Barr,
R. N., and to the Hon. A. Allison for assistance during my visit
to the Bermudas.

Among our most important acquisitions | may mention a col-
lection of birds from the ‘‘ Albatross ” Expedition of 1891, collected
at the Galapagos, and determined by Mr. Robert Ridgway, and a
general collection of shells, presented by the family of the late
William M. Wheildon of Concord, Massachusetts.

From the United States Geological Survey, through the National
Museum, we have received a fine slab of Climactichnites Youngi,
and some interesting fossils have been purchased from Mr. Charles
Sternberg. From the Royal Museum of Brussells we have received
an admirable cast of an Iguanodon, which we propose to mount as
the central piece of the Jurassic Exhibition Room. We are in-
debted to Professor Dupont for the great trouble he took in
making the arrangements necessary to procure this cast.

Mr. C. B. Riker has sent us an important series of borings
from an artesian well on Port Royal Spit, Jamaica, which passes
through the coral reefs of the Point. It is interesting to note
that a preliminary examination of the specimens indicates a very
moderate thickness of reef rock resting upon the older limestones.

To Professor Verrill we are indebted for sending us a series
of corals collected by Professor Gabb from the elevated reef of
Santo Domingo, for comparison with the species collected at vari-
ous points of the elevated reef of Cuba during the “ Wild Duck ”
Expedition. None of the species examined appear to differ from
the Cuban types, and they also appear to be identical with species
now living in the West Indian seas. To Dr. Dall we are indebted

11

for an examination of the Tertiary Mollusks of the Cuban coast
collected by the ‘* Wild Duck.”

Mr. Scott, I regret to state, has been unable to make any progress
with his plans for the benefit of the Ornithological Department.

Among the collections sent us by the Fish Commission, which
supplement the pelagic material collected by the “ Albatross”
in 1891 off Central America in the Pacific, is a small collection
made by the ‘“ Albatross” with the Tanner tow-net on the line
between San Francisco and the Sandwich Islands and in the
Bering Sea. Captain Tanner reports that in the northern part
of the Pacific the net was not used below two hundred and fifty
fathoms from the surface, and when closed at that depth it
usually contained very little. In the hauls made at three
hundred fathoms from the surface, on the other line, the closed
part of the Tanner net did not bring up anything.

The Faculty of the Museum nominated, as occupants of the
Naples Table for parts of the year 1893-94, Mr. E. L. Rice,
a graduate of Wesleyan College, Middletown, who was recom-
mended by Professor Richard Hertwig of Munich, and Mr. C. M.
Child, recommended by Professor Leuckart. During the coming
year Professor W. E. Ritter of the University of California, and
Professor Reighard of the University of Michigan, formerly
students of Professor Mark, will occupy the Museum Table at
Naples.

To Baron Osten-Sacken has been sent his entomological corre-
spondence, deposited in the Museum Library many years ago, to
assist him in working up many interesting points in the history
of North American Diptera.

Miss Rathbun, of the National Museum, spent some time at
the Museum examining the types of the “ Blake ”’ deep-sea Crus-
tacea, and other collections of that group. Professor Nutting, of
the State University of Iowa, brought his collection of Florida
Hydroids to the Museum for comparison with the types collected
by the “ Blake,’ and described by Allman and others.

The Geological department, following the example of the
Zoological Department, is paying considerable attention to the
formation of collections intended as means of instruction by
the Professors, and also to the collection of other material to be
known as students’ collections, which are to be placed in the hands
of the students and to be replaced as fast as may proye neces-

12

sary. In a University Museum like ours, which displays only a
small part of its resources to the public, and where the great
bulk of the collection is stored in smaller rooms to be available
for research, such a course as that pursued by the Geological
Department is essential. There is a natural temptation for the
Instructors to make the freest possible use in their class-room of
the specimens originally placed on exhibition only for the benefit
of the public, and of the students as part of that public. It needs
but little experience to show that the use of the collections in-
tended either for exhibition or for research for purposes of instruc-
tion is ruinous. No specimen can be moved from its case without
detriment, and it seldom goes back to its place in as good a con-
dition as it left it.

The Director of a Museum must decide how far it is for the
benefit of science to allow specimens once placed on exhibition or
intended for research to leave their shelves. My own experience
teaches that, when a collection is once placed on exhibition, no one
should be allowed to have access to the cases or to the special col-
lections to remove the specimens, and nothing should sanction
their use for purposes of instruction or of scientific examination
except in the clearest case of a positive gain for science by such a
course. The Director of a Museum intended to meet the demands
of the public, of the investigator, of the teacher, and of the student
must provide each with the suitable material, and all attempts
to perform these various functions with one collection will neces-
sarily fail. This principle means of course a large amount of
duplication, but this is essential for the safekeeping of valuable
collections, which are too often sacrificed for comparatively unim-
portant scientific indulgences.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

CAMBRIDGE, October 1, 1894.

SO SEL De ee.

Agee

13

REPORT ON THE COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN
GEOLOGY.

Durine the Academic year 1893-94, the following named courses
of instruction were given in the laboratories and in the field by the
instructors of the Department of Geology.

Instruction in General Geology.

1. (Geol. 4.) A whole course in Elementary Geology ; two lectures
a week by N.S. Shaler, with a third lecture and an hour for special
exercises by R. E. Dodge, and with required reading and field work.
Attended by two hundred and thirty-eight students.

2. (Geol. 5.) A half-course in Practical Geological Exercises in the
laboratory and in the field, requiring three two-hour exercises a week,
with occasional lectures during the second half-year: by T. W. Harris,
assisted by G. E. Ladd; designed especially for those who intend in
subsequent years to continue the study of Geology and Paleontology.
Attended by forty-three students.

3. (Geol. 8.) A course in General Critical Geology ; two lectures a
week, by J. B. Woodworth, with an additional hour for review. Dur-
ing the autumn and spring: ten half-day excursions were made in the
field to points in the vicinity of the University. Each student prepared
a thesis during the winter months and a map and report upon some
locality in the neighborhood. Seventeen students took this course.

4. (Geol. 9.) A course in the Structural and Dynamical Geology
of the Stratified Rocks, by T. W. Harris. Two conferences a week,
with required reading and theses. This course was attended by one
student.

5. (Geol. 22.) A course in Field-work and Geological Surveying,
designed to afford special training in original investigation, with work
in the library and in the preparation of geological reports, conducted
by Mr. Griswold, under the direction of N.S. Shaler, W. M. Davis, and
J. E. Wolff. Conferences were held once a week during the year. It
was attended by fourteen students.

14

Instruction in Petrography.

6. (Geol. 12.) A course in Petrography, by J. E. Wolff, assisted by
T. A. Jaggar, Jr. Two lectures a week, with laboratory work, theses,
and field-work. Attended by eight students.

7. (Geol. 23.) A course in Petrographic Research, by J. E. Wolff.
Field and laboratory work. Attended by eight students.

Instruction in Economic Geology.

8. (Geol. 18.) A course on the Economic Geology of the non-
metalliferous minerals, by J. D. Whitney. Lectures twice a week,
with required readings and theses. Attended by nineteen students.

Instruction in Mining Geology.

9. (Geol. 10.) A course in Mining Geology, by H. L. Smyth.
Lectures, laboratory and field work; half-course, three times a week,
beginning the first Monday in December and closing the last Friday in
April.

10. (Geol. 11.) A course in Geological Surveying, by H. L.
Smyth. Lectures, laboratory and field work, three times a week,
beginning the first Monday in December and closing the last Friday
in April.

Courses 10 and 11 are specially intended for students in the
Lawrence Scientific School, and cannot be counted for the degree
of A. B. except by special vote on petition.

Instruction in Paleontology.

11. (Geol. 14.) A course in Paleontology, by N.S. Shaler, assisted
in the laboratory by R. T. Jackson. Two lectures and four hours of
laboratory a week, with theses. This course was attended by twelve
students.

12. (Geol. 15.) A course in Historical Geology, designed to train
advanced students in the use of fossils in determining geological hori-
zons, by N.S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. ‘This course was
taken by nine students.

13. (Geol. 24.) A course in Palzontological Research, under the
direction of N. 8S. Shaler, assisted by R. T. Jackson. Attended by two
students.

ee eee

—
a ee ae

15

Instruction in Meteorology and Physical Geography.

14. (Geol. 1.) A half-course in Elementary Meteorology, by W.
M. Davis, assisted by R. DeC. Ward. Two or three lectures a week,
with laboratory work and recitations, second half-year. Attended by
fifty-nine students.

15. (Geol. 2.) A half-course in Physical Geography, by W. M. Davis,
assisted by L. S. Griswold. Two or three lectures a week, with labo-
ratory work and recitations, first half-year. Attended by fifty-five
students.

16. (Geol. 20.) A course in Advanced Meteorology and Physical

Geography, by W. M. Davis. Conferences held once a week. Attended
by nine students.

REPORT OF THE STURGIS-HOOPER PROFESSOR OF
GEOLOGY.

By Proressor J. D. WHITNEY.

During the past year (1893-94), in accordance with the plan
proposed in his last Report, the Sturgis-Hooper Professor delivered
a course of lectures on Economical Geology, extending through
the whole year, and devoted exclusively to the non-metalliferous
minerals, water, salt, and saline substances in general, coal and
petroleum being the substances treated with the largest amount of
detail. In the next year the metals and their ores will be taken
up, and the lectures and instruction given will be entirely con-
fined to this subject. With this arrangement much more time will
be given to the metals than has before been possible, since the
whole subject of Economical Geology will occupy fully a hundred
and ten lectures. This development of the instruction in this
branch of the science will be useful to students of general geol-
ogy, and more especially to those who intend to become teachers,
or to engage in practical geological work. For those who may wish
to go still farther in this direction, and make a specialty of mining
engineering, the information acquired during this course will be
found useful, as enabling them to plan their future studies, and
to select a place where these can be pursued with those special
advantages which are offered by the great mining schools at home
or abroad.

The Library collected by the Sturgis-Hooper Professor is already
fairly complete in the departments of Mining and Metallurgy, there
being but few important works in those branches which are not
found in it, while additions are being constantly made. The same
is the case also with regard to that department of Economical
Geology which relates to the uon-metalliferous minerals, both
from the scientific and economical point of.view. Some progress
has been made in cataloguing and arranging this library, and new

17

shelving has been added, and these facilities have led to a more
extended use of the books in this department than has before been
possible. This library is already so extensive, and is increasing
so rapidly, that a large amount of time is required for the recep-
tion, binding, and arrangement of the new works which are
added to it. Here, as in other departments of the Museum, the
needs are beginning to exceed the means. The rapidity of the
increase during the past few years in the number and bulk of
geological and mining books issued from the press is indeed most
remarkable.

During the past year, in accordance with the suggestion made
in the Sturgis-Hooper Professor’s last Report, a Supplement to his
work on the United States has been prepared and issued. This
work embraces, in about 350 pages, similar in form and style to
the original volume, the subjects of population, immigration, and
irrigation, much the larger part of the work being devoted to the
last-named topic. In this volume the statistics of population are
brought down to the latest possible date, including the results of
the Census of 1890, the original work having been published just
before that was taken. The statistics of immigration include the
essential facts down to as late as the end of the first half of the
year 1894.

In the original work to which the present volume forms a sup-
plement, the subject of irrigation was not touched upon at all, and
chiefly because detailed information regarding it was, so far as
the United States ‘are concerned, almost entirely wanting, much
the larger portion of the already somewhat voluminous literature
relating to this subject bearing dates more recent than 1890.
Investigation of the material published by our government, in the
reports of the various irrigational and geological surveys, showed
that very interesting scientific and economical problems were
involved in the irrigation question, and it seemed decidedly worth
while that there should be made of it an analytic and critical
review from an entirely disinterested standpoint. This, it is
believed, has been done, and it is hoped that the volume thus
prepared will be found useful to teachers and others interested
in the physical geography of the country and the development of
its resources. As an Appendix to this volume, there has been
added a brief discussion of the question whether changes of cli-
mate can be brought about by the agency of man, and on secular

9
Vv

18

changes of climate in general, with special reference to the arid
region of the United States. This part of the work naturally
connects itself with the previously published volume of the Sturgis-
Hooper Professor, which appeared in the Memoirs of the Museum
twelve years ago, and bears the title of ‘‘ The Climatic Changes
of Later Geological Times: a Discussion based on Observations
made in the Cordilleras of North America.”

oe ee

19

REPORT ON COURSES IN GENERAL GEOLOGY AND
PALEONTOLOGY.

By Pror. N. S. SHALER.

Courses.

THE course in Elementary Geology was conducted during the
year with the aid of Mr. R. E. Dodge as Assistant. Systematic
field-work was introduced in the fall and spring to take the place
of excursions before required in Course 5, which was given in the
last half of the year. Dr. T. W. Harris, who conducted the labo-
ratory, course (Geol. 5), severs his connection with the department
at the end of the academic year, and has accepted the position of
Superintendent of Schools at Keene, N. H.

Owing to the pressure of his duties as Dean of the Lawrence
Scientific School, the Professor of Geology, at the beginning of
the year, relinquished the instruction in Course 8, General Critical
Geology, and Mr. J. B. Woodworth was appointed Instructor for
that course. In addition to giving the lectures, Mr. Woodworth
has also conducted special exercises and all of the field excursions,
in which Professors Davis and Wolff assisted in former years.
During the April recess, a party of students from this course
visited the well known section at Gay Head, on the island of
Martha’s Vineyard, under the guidance of Mr. Woodworth and
Dr. Jackson. Four days were spent in continuous field-work upon
the cliffs and neighboring parts of the island.

The instruction in Palwontology has been kept up, as in the
previous year, with the aid of Dr. Jackson, who continued the effort
to increase and improve the condition of the teaching collections
in which considerable advance has been made. During the year,
Mr. T. Wayland Vaughan, a Graduate student in Geology, was
given some employment in determining and labelling Tertiary
fossils, which group is his line of specialty. Most satisfactory

20

assistance was received from Mr. H. W. Dutch, a member of the
Sophomore Class, who, as the recipient of a Price-Greenleaf Scholar-
ship, spent four hours a week in doing clerical work.

Courses 10 and 11, the former relating to Mining Geology and
the latter to Geological Surveying as carried on in mining work,
were given during the year by Mr. H. L. Smyth. For lack of room
elsewhere, the lectures in these courses were given in the Petro-
graphical Lecture Room. Field-work was prosecuted in the vicinity
of the University.

The course in Research (Geol. 22) was directly supervised by
Mr. Griswold, who spent much of his time in the fall and spring
in the field with students. The attention of the students was
mainly directed to the structure of the rocks in the Boston basin
and the contiguous areas of Carboniferous rocks in the Narragan-
sett Basin. The valuable results obtained will be embodied in
future publication. Shore phenomena in Eastern Massachusetts
and metalliferous deposits in Essex and Berkshire Counties were
also investigated. In the spring an excursion was made to Katah-
din Iron Works, Maine. One student conducted a series of experi-
ments with wave and current marks with a view to publishing the
results. Mr. T. Wayland Vaughan, graduate student, carried on
during the year an investigation of the Eocene fauna of Louisiana,
and prepared a report for publication. At the beginning of the
present government year, he was appointed assistant paleontolo-
gist of the United States Geological Survey and was assigned to
duty in the southwestern States. Mr. Alfred Brooks, graduate
student in geology, was also appointed assistant geologist in the
same organization and proceeded in mid-summer to the southern
Appalachians. Mr. F. P. Gulliver accompanied Mr. Gilbert of the
Survey in an expedition to Colorado, and Mr. F. C. Schrader,
another graduate student, was employed as a temporary assistant
of the Survey in southern New England. Mr. Merrill, graduate
student of year before last, has presented for publication in the
Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology a paper on flint
sponge spicules from the cretaceous of Texas.

Additional Courses.

For many years a considerable share of the time in Courses 4
and 8 has been given to the subject of glacial geology, and with a

view to bringing this matter into better form to meet the demands
for instruction on this subject, a new course has been provided for
during the coming year, to be given by Mr. Woodworth. Mr.
Smyth has arranged to give in the coming year an additional
course on the Pre-Cambrian Geology of North America, and ad-
vanced students in Geology who wish to carry on original researches
will be enrolled in the following year in Course 225.

The Geological Conference.

During the year, the Tuesday evening meetings of the advanced
students in the department have been maintained. The papers
read at these meetings have been announced each week in the Col-
lege Calendar.

It should be mentioned in this connection that the Geological
Society of America met in the Geological Lecture Room for one
day in December last, thus affording our students an opportunity
of attending a session of this organization.

Scientific Work.

The Professor of Geology has continued his services as a Com-
missioner in the State Board of Highways, and also as a Geologist
of the United States Geological Survey. During the year, he pre-
pared a Report on the Geology of Highways for publication by the
Survey, and supervised the work of several assistants.

Mr. J. B. Woodworth has also been employed in his spare time
and during vacations as Assistant Geologist of the U. S. Geologi-
cal Survey, mainly in the preparation of maps of the Pleistocene
Geology of the New England States. The following named map-
sheets have been surveyed and prepared for the engraver, with an
accompanying report: in Massachusetts, Boston, Nantucket, Mus-
keget, Martha’s Vineyard, Gay Head (in part) ; in Rhode Island,
Providence, Burrillville, Narragansett Bay, Newport, Sakonnet,
Block Island ; in Connecticut, New Haven and Meriden.

Mr. R. E. Dodge has also been employed during vacations
heretofore in work of this nature. During the field season just
closed, he was employed as volunteer assistant of Dr. Hayes in
Tennessee.

Dr. Geo. E. Ladd, who assisted Dr. T. W. Harris in Course 5,
performed during the year a series of tests upon clays, the results

22

of which were embodied in his thesis for the philosophical doctor-
ate. He conducted the elementary course in geology in the
summer schools, and at their close went to Munich, Germany, to
continue his studies. Dr. Ladd and Mr. Jagger also attended the
International Cougress of Geologists held at Zurich. Mr. Griswold
attended the International Congress of Geologists at Zurich the
past summer, and with members of the Congress made excursions
through the Juras and Alps for the purpose of studying physio-
graphic and dynamic phenomena.

A list of the publications of the members of the department is
appended to the Reports.

Equipment.

Since the introduction of the stereopticon in the Geological Lec-
ture Room two years ago, the curtains for darkening the room have
been raised and lowered by hand, much to the inconvenience of the
lecturer and the students. During the summer of 1894, Dr. Wolff
and Mr. Woodworth installed a half horse-power motor and wind-
lass, by means of which the curtains on both sides of the room can
be pulled down simultaneously to any desired place and released
at will.

Another 2,500 candle-power arc lamp has also been imported
from Germany for use in the Petrographical Lecture Room, the
one heretofore employed being reserved for the Geological Lecture
Room.

lilustrative Materials for Teaching.

With the use of the stereopticon, the method of illustrating
lectures before large classes has been greatly changed. Not only
does the practice permit of the freer and better exhibition of pho-
tographs reproduced in lantern slides, but by photographing stan-
dard published sections, and reproducing them in the stereopticon,
considerable advantage both in the amount and fidelity of draw-
ings is gained. Following this plan, lantern slides have been
prepared for use in Courses 4 and 8, exhibiting the principal types
of mountain structure, faults, folds, ete., in their actual occur-
rence. To a limited extent the same method has been pursued in
the elementary class in the illustration of the characteristic fossils
of the principal geological epochs.

It is proposed te publish for the use of colleges and schools at

ee ae

nee ee ee eee

2 Ara

23

the earliest convenient date a list of the views which experience in
the lecture room has shown to be serviceable in our system of in-
struction. The plan provides for the sale of the photographs and
lantern slides by some reputable dealer, so that the time of the
officers of the department will not be taken up by the business and
correspondence which may grow out of the undertaking.

The Gardner Collection of Photographs.

The selection and purchase of these views has been during the
year in the hands of a Department committee consisting of Pro-
fessor Davis and Messrs. Dodge and Woodworth. A number of
views mostly of Huropean localities were added during the year.
There is now a total of over 2,100 photographs, most of which are
mounted on cardboard, labelled, and entered in a card catalogue,
and ready for service. At present the collection is stored in trays
in the Geological Lecture Room.

Geological Exhibition Room.

When the World’s Fair Exposition closed, the Corporation
kindly turned over to this department a number of wall and table
cases which were used at Chicago for the display of the University
Exhibit. These, to the number of twenty-four, have been placed
in the Geological Exhibition Room on the third floor of the
Museum, but owing to a lack of means for repairing the cases the
Department has been unable to arrange its collections in them and
open the room to the public. It will cost about $500 to put the
room in order.

Gifts and Purchases of Specimens.

A. few specimens of rocks and fossils have been donated to the
Department for use in its teaching collection during the year.
Two segments of a basaltic prism from the Giant’s Causeway
were given by Prof. J. P. Cooke. A collection of rocks and clays
were obtained by the members of an expedition to Gay Head,
Mass., illustrating the stratigraphy of that section, and a few
specimens needed for illustrating Glacial Geology and for class-
room demonstration were gathered by Messrs. Woodworth and

24

Dodge from the immediate vicinity of the University. The
following is a more complete list.

Object. Remarks. Donor.
Potsdam Sandstone. From bored well on shore of Mr. John T. Mce-

Keeweenaw Bay. : Clintock.
Norite. Hand specimen from hanging wall Mr. W. H. Thomas,
of Gold Bronze Mine, Vanderbilt, Salt Lake City,

Cal. Utah.

/®olian Pebbles. From near Colorado River. Mr. G. K. Gilbert,
Washington, D.C.
Cross-Bedding. From sandstone parting in Roxbury Mr. W. W. Dodge,
Conglomerate, Dorchester, Mass. Cambridge, Mass.

A collection from the Triassic of Connecticut was purchased of
Mr. S. Ward Loper. This collection embraces fishes, plants, and
certain geological features of the formation, as rain-drop impres-
sions, ripple marks, ete. A box of Eocene fossiliferous sand from
Claiborne, Alabama, was received from Professor P. H. Mell. This
material was sorted and determined by Mr. Vaughan. The rich-
ness of the sand is attested by the fact that a half-bushel of it
yielded one hundred and sixty species, mostly Mollusca. Repre-
sentative Tertiary and some Cretaceous material from the Atlantie
coast was received from Professor Wm. B. Clark of Johns Hopkins.
As in previous years, thanks are due to Professor C. E. Beecher
of Yale for material received from him. Cretaceous and Ter-
tiary material from the West, and Carboniferous from Joggins,
Nova Scotia, was purchased of Mr. George B. Frazar.

Especial mention should be made of the gift of two geological
maps to the Department by the French Geological Survey. One
of these is the large ‘ Carte Geologique du Plateau Central,’ by
MM. Delafond, Fontannes, Fouqué, De Launay, Le Verrier, Lory,
Michel-Lévy, and Termier; the other map is the “ Carte Geolo-
gique de la France”? (a l’échelle du millionéme).

I a I eS

REPORT ON THE PETROGRAPHICAL LABORATORY.
By Assistant Proressor J. E. Wo.3rFr.

THE course in Elementary Petrography was attended by eight
students, and the advanced course by an equal number.
In connection with the latter course, field and laboratory

investigation was carried on by students in the following
areas : —

Ascutney Mountain, Vermont (Monograph in preparation).
Ayers Mountain, Connecticut.

Blue Hills, Massachusetts.

The Felsites and Associated Rocks in Saugus, Massachusetts.

In the summer of 1894 a six weeks’ course in General Petrogra-
phy was conducted at the Museum, and attended by four students,
either teachers or members of geological surveys.

The Instructor has continued his field and laboratory work on
the Archzan Highlands of New Jersey and elsewhere.

A considerable amount of petrographical material for exhibition
purposes has accumulated by gift and otherwise, and awaits the
opening of the Geological Exhibition Room.

REPORT ON THE LABORATORY OF PHYSICAL
GEOGRAPHY.

By Proressor W. M. Davis.

Durine the Academic year 1893-94, the courses in Physical
Geography and Meteorology have been conducted on the same
plan as in previous years. Mr. Ward has continued to act as
Assistant in the course in Meteorology, but has withdrawn from
the course in Physical Geography, in order to give more of his
time to editing the American Meteorological Journal, which has
now been in his charge over two years. Mr. Griswold has acted
as Assistant in Physical Geography, in addition to his duties in
connection with the course in Field Geology.

The more advanced courses have been attended by six students,
of whom four were college graduates. The special subjects studied
were as follows: Mr. Abbe, the topographical development of shore
lines, with special reference to the features of our Atlantic coast ;
Mr. Daly, the development of escarpments ; Mr. Gulliver, the
topographical criteria of the elevation or depression of the land ;
Mr. Marbut, the flood-plain of the Mississippi; Mr. Schraeder, the
Great Plains of the West; Mr. White, the effect of local topography
on the general winds, and the features of Arctic climate.

A gift of great value has been received from the Geographical
Service of the French Army. The large series of geodetic and
topographic maps of France and Algeria and the exquisite model
of the valley of the upper Moselle, exhibited at the World’s Fair
at Chicago, were by direction of the Chief of the Service pre-
sented to the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey and the
Harvard Laboratory of Physical Geography. The collection was
divided by conference with the Superintendent of the Coast and
Geodetic Survey, and a number of valuable maps, as well as the
model, remain to enrich our collections.

= *

——e F

:

—~..

rH

Recognizing the disconnection of the. elementary and the ad-
vanced courses, it is now proposed to introduce two intermediate
half-courses on the Physical Goography of the United States, and
of Europe, to be given in alternate years, beginning in February
next.

Certain new material for the elementary courses may be briefly
mentioned. First, a model, consisting of three elliptical rings at
right angles to one another, around a black globe, has been con-
structed to illustrate the problem of the tides. In connection
with the tracings of a selected series of tidal curves obtained from
the United States Coast and Geodetic Surveys, this model serves
to make the matter of the diurnal inequality, and its variation
during a lunation, relatively simple. Second, a number of grouped
sheets of foreign topographical surveys, selected according to the
plan explained in previous Reports; the new members of this
collection being chiefly from the German maps on a scale of
1: 100,000. An account of the method pursued in the elementary
course on Physical Geography, with special reference to its disci-
plinary value, was published in the [Chicago] Journal of Geology,
for January, 1894.

Apart from the regular work of teaching, and from administra-
tive duties connected with the Committee on Special Students, the
work of the Professor of Physical Geography has been chiefly as
follows. During the winter, four lectures were given to an audience
of over a hundred teachers in Providence and its vicinity, by invi-
tation from the Superintendent of Public Instruction in Rhode
Island, on the physical features of that State, and especially on the
illustration of these features given in the topographical map of
Rhode Island, which had been previously distributed to all its
schools. In the spring a list of 126 lantern slides, illustrating a
number of typical examples of geographic features, such as plains,
plateaus, mountains, volcanoes, rivers, glaciers, lakes, coasts, was
made by selection from our laboratory collection, —a part of the
Gardner Photographic Collection. The list was published, with
explanatory notes, as an appendix to the Annual Report of the
Superintendent of Schools of Cambridge for 1895. Arrangements
have been made with Mr. E. E. Howell, 612 Seventeenth Street
N. W., Washington, D. C., to supply both the lists and the slides
at moderate price to teachers who desire them. In order to bring
these slides to the notice of the teachers in the Cambridge schools,

28

a number of them were shown in two lectures to an audience of
teachers and children from our Grammar Schools. A list of
twenty-eight cloud views has been prepared by Mr. Ward, and
published in the American Meteorological Journal; the prints and
slides of these views can also be obtained from Mr. Howell.

The list of Governmental Maps for Use in Schools, referred to
in last year’s Report as in preparation by Messrs. Davis, King,
and Collie, was completed during the winter, and published by
Messrs. Henry Holt & Co. of New York. The use of a number
of the maps here referred to was explained and illustrated in a
special lecture to some thirty of the teachers of Cambridge in
the spring.

The past summer has been spent in Europe, with the special
object of studying the arrangement of certain rivers and valleys in
Eastern England, Northeastern France, and Wiirtemberg, and of
attending the Sixth International Geological Congress in Zurich.
Besides the general accounts of this excursion, already published
in ‘*The Nation,” as stated below, a special article on certain
rivers in England has been prepared for the Journal of the Royal
Geographical Society of London.

ae ee ee ee ree ee eee eee

29

PUBLICATIONS BY MEMBERS OF THE GEOLOGICAL
DEPARTMENT SINCE THE LAST REPORT.

By N.S. Shaler: —

1. Pleistocene Distortions of the Atlantic Seacoast. Bull. Geol. Soc.
Am., 1894, Vol. V. pp. 199-202.

2. Relation of Mountain Growth to Formation of Continents. Ibid.
pp. 203-206.

3. Phenomena of Beach and Dune Sands. _Ibid., pp. 207-212.

4. The Geological History of Harbors. Thirteenth Annual Report of
the Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey for 1891-92. Washington,
1894, pp. 93-209. Plates XXII-XLV., Figs. 7-15.

5. The United States of America, 2 vols., pp. 670, 641 (Illustrated).
D. Appleton & Co., New York, 1894.

6. The Origin and Nature of Soils. Twelfth Annual Report of the
Director of the U. S. Geological Survey, for 1890-91, pp. 213-345.
Washington, D. C., 1891. (Illustrated).

7. Report on the Work done in the Atlantic Coast Division of the
U. S. Geological Survey, for the Year ending June 30, 1891. Twelfth
Annual Report of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey, Part I.
pp- 66-67, Washington, D. C., 1891.

8. Edited Geological Terms in Standard Dictionary of the English
Language (with Prof. W. B. Dwight), Vol. I. Funk and Wagnalls Co.,
New York, 1894.

9. Report on the work done in the Atlantic Coast Division of the.
U.S. Geological Survey for the year ending June 30, 1892. Thirteenth
Annual Report of the Director of the U.S. Geological Survey, Part i.
pp. 99-100, Washington, D. C. 1893 (title-page dated 1892).

10. Discussion on Facetted Pebbles, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am. 1894,
Vol. V. p. 608.

11. Report of the commissioners of the Topographical Survey of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts for the year 1893 to His Excellency,
Frederic T. Greenhalge. House. No. 74, pp. 3-30. (With Henry
L. Whiting and Desmond Fitzgerald.)

By H. L. Smyth :—

Relations of the Lower Menominee and Lower Marquette Series in
Michigan (preliminary), Am. Jour. Sci., 1894, (8rd. Ser.) Vol.
XLVIII. pp. 216-223. Illustrated.

30

By W. M. Davis: —

1. Elementary Meteorology. Boston, Ginn & Co., 1894. 8vo,
pp. xii. 355. Illustrated.

2. The Winds of the Indian Ocean. Amer. Met. Jour., December,
1893, Vol. X. pp. 333-343. 2 plates. Also reprinted, and in German
version, in Annalen der Hydrographie, Berlin, February, 1894.

3. Winds of Atlantic Ocean. German translation. Annalen der
Hydrographie, Berlin, January, 1894. .

4. Biographical Notice of William Ferrel. Proc. Amer. Acad., Vol.
XXVIII. pp. 388-393.

5. The Redfield-Espy period. Rep. Chicago Meteorol. Congress, pt.
2, pp. 305-316.

6. Brief Meteorological Notes. The Theory of Cyclones. Am.
Met. Jour., November, 1893, X. pp. 319-320. Festooned, Mammi-
form, and Pocky Clouds. Am. Met. Jour., August, 1894, Vol. XI.
pp. 151-153. Note on Diffusion of Water Vapor, and on Atmospheric
Absorption of Terrestrial Radiation. Am. Met. Jour., August, 1894,
Vol. XI. pp. 147-151.

7. Joint Author with others of Report of Conference on Geography.
In Report of Committee [of Ten] on Secondary Schools. Washington,
1893, pp. 204-236.

8. Governmental Maps in Schools (with C. F. King and G. L. Collie)
Educational Rev., March, 1894, Vol. VII. pp. 232-239.

9. Governmental Maps in Schools (with C. F. King and G. L. Collie).
New York, H. Holt & Co.

10. Physical Geography in the University. Jour. of Geol., 1894,
Vol. IL. pp. 66-100.

11. Instruction in Physical Geography. The Harvard Graduates’
.Magazine, 1894, Vol. II. 509-515.

12. The Osage River and the Ozark Uplift. Science, November 17,
1893, Vol. XXII. pp. 276-279.

15. Monadnock and Ben Nevis. The Nation, August 9 and 16,
1894.

14. The Seine, the Meuse, and the Moselle. The Nation, September
6 and 138, 1894.

15. Discussion on Railroad Location. Trans. Amer. Soc. C. E., 1894,
Vol. XXXI. pp. 105-107.

16. A Step towards Improvement in teaching Geography. Harvard
Teachers’ Association. Leaflet No. 11, January, 1894. .

17. Geography in the Schools. Harper’s Weekly, April 7, 1894.
pp. 522-325.

18. Geographical Work for State Geological Surveys. Bull. Geol.
Soc. Amer., 1894, Vol. V. 605-608.

a a ee

ae aad eS 8.

:
}
é
|

31

19. List of Geographical Lantern Slides prepared for Use in the
Cambridge Public Schools. Annual Report of School Committee,
Cambridge, 1893, pp. 103-119. Also reprinted.

20. Syllabus of Four Lectures on Physical Geography, designed
especially for Teachers in the Schools of Rhode Island. January 12,
19, February 9, 16, 1894. Providence, pp. 2.

21. Articles in Johnson’s Cyclopedia (New Ed.) : Estuary, flood-plain,
geyser, glacier, Glen Roy, gorge, Great Salt Lake, harbor, islands,
Lake Lahontan, lakes, Luray Cavern. New York, June, 1893.

22. Facetted Pebbles on Cape Cod. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist.,
1894, Vol. XXVI. pp. 166-175. 2 photo-plates.

23. Eastern Boundary of the Connecticut Trias. (With L. 8. Gris-
wold.) Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 1894, Vol. V. 515-530.

24. An Outline of the Geology of Mount Desert: in the Flora of
Mount Desert Island, by E. L. Rand and J. H. Redfield, Cambridge,
1894, pp. 48-71.

By J. E. Wolff: —

1. Notes on Apparatus for the Geological Laboratory. Am. Jour.
Sci., May, 1894.

2. The Hibernia Fold, New Jersey. [Abstract.] Am. Geol. 1894,
Vol. XIII. pp. 142-143.

In press: Monograph XXIII. U. S. Geological Survey, Part IL,
*¢ Geology of Hoosac Mountain, Mass.” Also: Geological Survey of
New Jersey. Annual Report, 1894: ‘+The Geological Structure in
the Vicinity of Hibernia, Morris Co., N. J., and its Relation to the Ore
Deposits.” With Map and four Plates.

By R. E. Dodge : —

1. Additional Species of Pleistocene Fossils from Winthrop, Mass.
Am. Jour. Sci., 1894, Vol. XLVII. pp. 100-104.

2. Continental Phenomena illustrated by Ripple Marks. Science,
1894, Vol. XXIII. pp. 38-39.

3. The Geographical Development of Alluvial River Terraces. Proc.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 1893, Vol. XXVI. pp. 257-273.

By L. S. Griswold : —

1. Eastern Boundary of the Connecticut Trias. (With W. M.
Davis.) Bull. Geol. Soc. An., 1894, Vol. V. pp. 515-530.

2. The Harvard University Geographical Exhibit at the Columbian
Exposition. Amer. Geol. April, 1894, pp. 279-283.

By T. W. Harris :-—

The kames of the Oriskany Valley. Am. Geol. 1894, Vol. XIII. pp.

384-390.
By T. A. Jaggar, Jr. : —

Some Conditions of Ripple Mark. Am. Geol., 1894, Vol. XIII. pp.

199-201.
By Geo. E. Ladd : —

A Sketch of the Literature of Clays. The Brickbuilder, Boston,
Mass., 1894, Vol. ILI. pp. 75-78 ; 99-100.

By R. De.C. Ward : —

1. Recent Foreign Studies of Thunderstorms. Am. Met. Jour.
1893-94, Vol. X. pp. 411-420.

2. The Newspaper Weather Maps of the United States. Am. Met.
Jour., 1894-95, Vol. XI. pp. 96-107.

3. List of Cloud Photographs and Lantern Slides. Am. Met. Jour
1894-95, Vol. XI. pp. 111-116.

4. Edited: The American Meteorological Journal. An Illustrated
Monthly devoted to Scientific Meteorology and Allied Branches of
Study. Boston, Ginn and Company, 1893-94, Vols. X., XI.

By J. B. Woodworth : —

1. On Traces of a Fauna in the Cambridge Slates. (Abstract.)
Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1893, Vol. XXVI. pp. 125-126.

2. An Attempt to estimate the Thickness of the Ice-blocks which
gave rise to Lakelets and Kettle-holes. Am. Geol., 1893, Vol. XII.
pp. 279-284.

3. Post-Glacial Eolian Action in Southern New England. Am.
Jour. Sci. 1894, (8rd Ser.), Vol. XLVIII. pp. 63-71.

4. Some Typical Eskers of Southern New England. Proc. Bost.
Soc. Nat. Hist., 1894, Vol. XXVI. pp. 197-220.

5. Carboniferous Fossils in the Norfolk County Basin. Am. Jour.
Sci. 1894, (8rd Ser.), Vol. XLVIII. pp. 145-148. |

6. The Geology Excursion to Gay Head. Harvard Graduates’
Magazine, 1893-94, Vol. I]. pp. 586-538.

7. Werner’s Real Contribution to Geology. Science, 1894, Vol.
XXIII. pp. 19-20.

8. Text-book of Geology, by Sir Archibald Geikie. (Review of.)
Science, 1893, Vol. XXII. pp. 235-237. Abstract reprinted in Book
Reviews, 1893, Vol. I. pp. 184-185.

9. Economic Geology of the United States, by R. S. Tarr. (Review
of.) Science, 1894, Vol. XXIII. p. 123. .

33

10. Edited Geological Terms in Standard Dictionary of the English
Language, Vol. I., 1894 (with Professors N. S. Shaler and W. B.
Dwight). ;

11. The New Geological Map of Pennsylvania. Science, 1894,
Vol. XXIII. pp. 148-144.

_ 12. Abstracts of three Papers by Professor Shaler (Nos. 1, 2, 3 of

this list). Am. Geol., 1894, Vol. XIII. pp, 143-145.

34

REPORT ON THE INSTRUCTION IN ZOOLOGY.

By E. L. Marx.

AT the beginning of the year 1893-94 the corps of instructors
in the Zodlogical Department was increased. This has made it
possible to offer to students additional courses, and to give more
time to the supervision of those engaged in special researches.

The following table exhibits the courses and the number of
students of the different classes attending each during the year,

Course. | Grad.| Sen. | Jun. | Soph Fr. | Spec. | Sci. | Div.
Zool. 1 4 7 18 20 25 7 42 1
ss 2 4 7 7 8 0 0 26 0
& 3 | 6 3 3 1 0 0 8 0
cs 4 | 4 1 1 0 0 0 3 0
‘S 5 | 3 It 1 0 0 0 1 0
cs 6 3 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
x 7 6 2 0 0 0 0 4 0
ee 0 er 7 1 0 0 0 0 3 0
ceeelie 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

During the past year Dr. C. B. Davenport has had charge of
Zoology 1 in addition to Zodlogy 2 and a new half-course, Zodlogy
6. The course in Zoélogy 2 will be given during the coming year
by Dr. G. H. Parker, and the new course by Dr. Davenport in
Experimental Morphology will then be a full course extending
through the entire year.

The elementary course in Zodlogy (Zodl. 1) was assumed for the
first time by Dr. Davenport. The course, though pursuing in gen-
eral the plan previously adopted, was slightly modified in its details.
In the lectures more attention was given to Distribution and to Gen-
eral Physiology than formerly, and in the laboratory work less time
was spent upon the tissues of higher animals and more upon such
topics as these; Illustrations of the principles of classification; The

=
:
4
;
:
$
;

30

later stages of development and the metamorphoses of animals;
Adaptation to environment. The chief Assistant in the laboratory
work was Mr. W. E. Castle, and the sub-Assistants were Messrs.
J. H. Gerould, H. V. Neal, and W.S. Nickerson.

As in 1892-93, Zoblogy 2 was carried on by Dr. Davenport, who
had as Assistant in laboratory work Mr. W. S. Nickerson. The
Department has been fortunate in having the services of Mr.
Nickerson for a number of years in this course. He leaves this
year to become Professor of Biology in the University of Colorado.
It is scarcely to be expected that so faithful and efficient an As-
sistant can usually be retained in this position forso long a period.
The lectures and the laboratory work have followed without mate-
rial change the general plan long since adopted.

The new half-course by Dr. Davenport — Experimental Mor-
phology — was conducted in the second half-year, a portion of the
Aquarium Room in the basement having been fitted up to serve
temporarily for this purpose. It was found that the room could
not be adequately heated during very cold weather, but this will
be remedied during the coming year. The course is intended
for those who desire to pay particular attention to problems of
growth and the development of organisms, with special reference
to artificial modification and control. The introductory lectures
were on methods of work in experimental morphology, the suc-
eceding ones being devoted to variation in development as the
result of crossing and of changes in external conditions.

The laboratory work of each student was distinct from that of
the others. The following topics indicate the nature of some of
the experiments: Individual adaptation of organisms to high
temperatures; On the artificial modification of cleavage cavity
and blastula; Influence of external conditions on the form of re-
generated parts ; The laws of individual and correlated variation.

Dr. G. H. Parker upon his return from Europe was reappointed
Instructor in Zoélogy and has had charge of Zoélogy 3 and a new
half-course, Zoélogy 7, occupying the first half-year.

In resuming charge of Zodlogy 8, Dr. Parker has continued the
plan, inaugurated before he went abroad, of supplementing the lec-
tures and regular class work in the dissection of Vertebrates by
the assignment to each student of some topic in the Comparative
Anatomy of the group. This plan has been found to succeed well,
giving a desirable stimulus to individual work as distinct from

36

class work. The laboratory Assistant in the course was Mr. J. L.
Frazeur. :

The new course by Dr. Parker — Zodlogy 7, The Nervous Sys-
tem and its Terminal Organs —is intended to meet the needs of
advanced zodlogical and prospective medical students, as well as
those in other departments who desire to keep up with modern
methods in the study of the nervous organization of animals and
the important results to which they have led. The topics dis-
cussed in this course are, as announced in the annual Circular of
the Department : —

(1) Methods of investigating the nervous system.

(2) General structure and functions of the nervous system. The
neuron and its significance.

(3) Terminal organs of afferent nerves. Types of sense organs and
the origin of the afferent impulse.

(4) Central organs. ‘The transmission and translation of impulses.

(5) Terminal organs of efferent nerves: muscles, electric organs,
luminous organs, glands, etc.

The course has been successful, and may ultimately be expanded
from a half to a full course.

The courses in Microscopical Anatomy (Zodél. 4) and Embry-
ology of Vertebrates (Zool. 5) were conducted in the same manner
as during the previous year. Dr. W. McM. Woodworth had charge
of the laboratory work and gave some of the lectures in ZLodlogy 4.

The work of those engaged in research has been satisfactory,
and the number of papers for publication exceeds that of any
previous year.

The course in Comparative Osteology (Zool. 20c) by Dr. Slade
was given as usual. :

At the last Commencement the degree of Ph. D. was conferred
on two students in Zodlogy, that of Sc. D. on one, and that of A. M.
on four. Of those receiving the higher degrees two have positions
in other colleges, one as Professor, the other as Instructor, and the
third as a Parker Fellow from Harvard University is continuing
in Europe his studies in Zodlogy.

The meetings of the Zodlogical Club have been well attended, and
have afforded the usual opportunity for the discussion of current
zodlogical topics and for reports on the progress of work in the
research laboratories.

37

Since my last report the following Contributions from the Zoé-
logical Laboratory, Nos. XXX VIII.—XLI. have been published : —

XXXVITI. A Method of Orienting Small Objects for the Micro-
tome. By W. McM. Woodworth. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zodél., Vol. XXV.
No. 3, pp. 45-47, December, 1893. Reprinted in The American
Monthly Microscopical Journal, Vol. XV. No. 5, pp. 129-1382. May,
1894.

XXXIX. On Some Laws of Cleavage in Limax. A Preliminary
iNetce. By ©. A. Kofoid. Proc. Amer. <Acad., Vol. XXFX.
pp. 180-203. 2 Pls. February 25, 1894.

XL. Studies in Morphogenesis. II. Regeneration in Obelia and
its Bearing on Differentiation in the Germ-Plasma. By C. B. Daven-
port. Anatomischer Anzeiger, Bd. IX. No. 9, pp. 283-294. With 6
Figures. February 15, 1894.

Also, ‘* Nachtrag zu dem Aufsatze, von C. B. Davenport (No. 9,
p- 283).” Ibid., No. 12, pp. 391, 392, Fig. 5. April 14, 1894.

XLI. The Origin of the Endocardium in Bony Fishes. By A. T.
Holbrook. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXV. No. 7, pp. 79-97.
5 pls. August, 1894.

Three numbers of the Contributions are now in the press, and
will be issued soon, viz. : —

1. On the Cell Lineage of the Ascidian Egg. A Preliminary Notice.
By W.E. Castle. 2 Pls.

2. On the Blastodermic Vesicle of Sus scrofa domesticus. By A.
W. Weysse. 4 Pils.

3. On the Introitus Vagine of certain Muride. By G. S. Miller,
LF i ad

There are five more numbers for the Contributions, aggregating
some two hundred or three hundred pages and upward of twenty
plates, for the publication of which arrangements have not yet been
made.

Besides the Contributions, some other productions by members
of the Department have been published, or are well under way.

Dr. W. MeM. Woodworth has published in the Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zoél., Vol. XXIV. No. 4, a Report on the Turbellaria of the
“ Albatross”? Expedition in charge of the Director of the Museum
during 1891.

The English translation of the first part of Korschelt u. Heider’s
“ Hntwicklungsgeschichte der wirbellosen Thiere,” with additions

38

by the authors and translators, has been completed by Drs. Mark
and Woodworth, and is being printed by Swan Sonnenschein & Co.
of London and Macmillan & Co. of New York.

Dr. Parker has completed a memoir on The Retina and Optic
Ganglia in Astacus, which will be published in the Mittheilungen
a. d. Zodl. Station zu Neapel.

A paper by Dr. Davenport and W. E. Castle, on The Acclima-
tization of Organisms to high Temperatures, is nearly completed.

The funds hitherto employed in publishing the Contributions
from the Zodlogical Laboratory are not now available for that pur-
pose. The Department is therefore in need of immediate aid for
this object, to avoid the necessity of sending the Contributions to
foreign journals, or to those in America which are conducted in
the interests of other Universities. Although we still need as
much as ever aquaria and vivaria, this unexpected deprivation of
the means of publication is of far greater importance. No more
efficient aid could be rendered to the Department of Zodlogy at pres-
ent than the establishment of a fund to provide for the publication
of researches carried on in the Zodlogical Laboratories.

REPORT ON OSTEOLOGY.

By Dantet Denison Srape.

THE osteological collections remain as stated in the last Report.
No material has been added, owing to the lack of funds which
might be so usefully applied to the increase of the collection of dis-
articulated skeletons, still sadly deficient in several of the orders.

Specimens, as heretofore, have been received for identification.
Among these were portions of a human skeleton lately exhumed
in the vicinity of Chicopee, Massachusetts. Being determined as
Aboriginal, and as they offered several unusual and interesting
anatomical points, with the permission of the gentleman by whom
they were forwarded, they were presented to the Peabody Museum,
for the advancement of the Science of Ethnology.

The plan adopted during the preceding year, for conducting the
course of Comparative Osteology as one of research, was pursued,
but with only partial success, as shown by the paucity of students
who applied. The increased number of elective studies, and the
addition of two half-courses in Zodlogy, given by teachers admi-
rably fitted for the work, undoubtedly contributed in great measure
to this result.

A plan similar to that published in the curriculum for the ensu-
ing year will be adopted, with the expectation that it will not
exclude those who wish to acquire a general knowledge of the
framework upon which the bodies of Vertebrate animals is con-
structed, and which is so essential to the student of Zodlogy. At
the same time, it will prove whether there are those who wish
to avail themselves of the highest usefulness of the Museum,
in pursuing original investigation in this as well as in other
Departments.

40

During the past year, two Graduates, and others connected with
the usual courses of instruction at the Museum, have made use of
the material for study.

“The Significance of the Jugal Arch,’ a paper announced in
the last Report as ready for publication in the Museum Bulletin,
has been delayed for the preparation of suitable illustrations.

‘
+

4+
i apy

41

REPORT ON THE MAMMALS AND BIRDS.

By WixLiiasmM BREWSTER.

The following Mammals have been added to the collection
during the past year: —

An Aye-Aye (Chiromys madagascarensis), bought of Ward; a
Cheetah (Cynelurus jubata), the gift of Mr. Hart, of New York ;
a remarkably fine Jaguar (Felis onea), obtained from Mr. J. T.
Clark; a black (melanistic) Woodchuck (Aretomys monazx) and a
Red-backed Mouse (Hvotomys gappert) from North Adams, Mass.,
presented by Mr. Walter Faxon; and five unidentified Japanese
Mammals, — two Monkeys, a Badger, a Wild Boar, and an Ante-
lope, —furnished by Mr. Alan Oroston, of Yokohama. The Aye-
Aye, Cheetah, and Woodchuck are mounted, and already on
exhibition.

Of Birds the Museum has received by gift : —

From Mr. Matthew Luce, Jr., of Boston, thirty-one mounted
specimens and two hundred and sixty-four skins; from Mr. Allan
C. Brooks, of Mount Forest, Ontario, Canada, nineteen skins;
from the United States National Museum, through Mr. Agassiz,
eighteen skins of Galapagos birds collected during the visit of
the United States Fish Commission steamer ‘‘ Albatross” to the
Galapagos Archipelago in 1893; from Mr. Walter Faxon, eight
mounted New England birds (chiefly Warblers and Sparrows) ; a
nest and egg of Swainson’s Thrush (Zurdus swainsonii), from
Cape Breton, and a nest of the Orchard Oriole (leterus spurius),
taken at Arlington, Mass.; from Mr. John G. Hall, of Boston, a
skin of the Wandering Albatross (Diomedia exulans); and from
Mr. T. A. Hillery, of the Museum, an alcoholic specimen of the
Brazilian Canary (Sycalis).

Mr. Luce’s gift deserves something more than a bare acknowl-
edgment, for his collection contains a number of exceptionally fine

6

42

skins of some of the more brilliant of the Birds of Paradise, Old
World Parrots, and Fruit Pigeons. Several of these are new
to the Museum, and all are of considerable value. Most of the
specimens, however, are North American, and very many of them
were taken by Mr. Luce himself in the immediate neighborhood of
Boston.

Mr. Faxon’s birds are peculiarly acceptable, from the fact that
they were collected with especial reference to filling gaps in the
Greene-Smith Collection.

Of the Galapagos skins thirteen have been mounted for the
Pacific Room, where they are now on exhibition in one of the
cases devoted to “Island Faune.”

Mr. Agassiz has purchased for the Museum seventy-two skins
of Japanese birds furnished by Oroston; a Flamingo (Phene-
copterus ruber), a White-winged Scoter (Ozdemia deglandi), a
Red-breasted Merganser (Merganser serrator), a Peacock (Pavo
eristatus), a Crowned Pigeon (Gonsa victoria), and an Impeyan
Pheasant (Lophophorus impeyanus), obtained and mounted by
Clark ; and two skins of the Huia-bird (Heteralocha acutirostris),
from New Zealand.

In the last Report, Mr. Agassiz mentioned (page 15) the fact that
Mr. W. E. D. Scott hoped to secure funds sufficient to equip an
additional Exhibition Room with isolated cases, each of which
should illustrate, by a liberal number of artistically mounted
birds, the individual, seasonal, or geographical variations of a
single species. Unfortunately the financial depression of the past
years has prevented Mr. Scott from obtaining a sum of money
sufficiently large to warrant a serious beginning of this most
desirable undertaking; but he has decided, nevertheless, to for-
ward to the Museum, at an early date, about one hundred mounted
birds (chiefly from Florida), which he wishes us to consider as
forming the nucleus of the proposed collection. He has also
promised to send with them some three thousand skins which
he collected on Jamaica in the winter of 1890-91, and which
represent very fully the characteristic birds of that island. As
our West Indian collection is comparatively insignificant, this
generous gift will be most timely and acceptable. .

A number of skins of Mammals and Birds loaned for purposes
of study or comparison to Dr. Slade and Mr. G. 8. Miller, Jr.,
have been returned in good condition.

—

43

The Assistant in this Department has published the following
notes and papers in ‘The Auk” :—

Some Additional Eastern Records of Swainson’s Hawk (Buteo swain-
soni).

Capture of another Ardetta neoxiana at Toronto, Ontario. (Tech-
nical notes appended to a communication, under the above title, from
Mr. Hubert H. Brown.)

Two Corrections.

44

REPORT ON THE REPTILES AND FISHES.

By SamvuEt GARMAN.

Donations to these Departments have been made by Messrs.
Philipp Adams, Outram Bangs, A. N. Cheney, W. F. Clapp, Cap-
tain Josiah W. Cook, H. L. Clayton, Dr. G. H. Curry, Professor
W. Faxon, Professor H. Garman, A. C. Gould, Dr. L. C. Jones,
Gerrit S. Miller, F. H. Rindge (through the Peabody Museum),
Dr. George B. Shattuck, and Robert G. Smith. In all cases the
receipts were in excellent condition. Many of them were for-
warded alive to be specially prepared for exhibition, to take the
places of faded or otherwise inferior specimens. Work has been
continued on the faunal representations, in which numerous
changes have been made. In the storage collections also there
has been a good deal of rearrangement, labelling, ete. Inspection
discloses a comparatively small amount of damage by evaporation,
breakage, or ravages of insects. A lot of live Reptiles was sent
to the Zodlogical Society of London; others were furnished the
students.

The Kentucky Fishes have been studied by Professor H. Gar-
man in connection with a Zolodgical Survey of that State. He
has named the unidentified specimens, and supplied from his
own collection certain species not before included in our lists.
He reports his work much advanced by the opportunities here
afforded. 5

More time than usual was this year devoted to study of the
storage collections. This has resulted in a considerable amount
of text and illustration in press on the way to publication, as
well as in a large increase in the number of identified species and
of new and rare species held by the Museum.

REPORT ON THE ENTOMOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By SamMuEL HENSHAW.

Girts of specimens have been received from Messrs. Outram
Bangs, William Beutenmiiller, H. K. Burrison, W. R. Cabot, P. P.
Calvert, S. C. Carpenter, T. D. A. Cockerell, J. H. Comstock,
C. B. Cory, G. F. Curtiss, James Fletcher, G. B. Gordon, Roland
Hayward, G. H. Horn, J. G. Jack, G. S. Miller, Jr., A. P. Morse,
G. A. Purdie, E. A. Schwarz, S. H. Scudder, W. T. Sedgwick,
Roland Thaxter, and H. F. Wickham.

For an excellent life-size crayon of Dr. Hagen, by Miss Meisel,
the Department is indebted to Mrs. Hagen.

The use of the collections and of the library has increased very
much during the year; among the persons who have studied in
the Department at the Museum the following may be mentioned:
Messrs. A. L. Babcock. William Beutenmiiller, Frederick Blan-
chard, H. K. Burrison, J. H. Comstock, C. B. Davenport, J. H.
Emerton, Roland Hayward, G. H. Horn, J. G. Jack, C. W. John-
son, A. P. Morse, A. S. Packard, E. B. Poulton, F. W. Russell,
S. H. Seudder, Roland Thaxter, and W. L. Tower. Assistance has
also been given Messrs. T. E. Bean, H. K. Burrison, P. P. Calvert,
G. H. Cook, G. H. French, J. G. Jack, J. A. Lintner, A. P. Morse,
F. W. Russell, W. T. Sedgwick, Roland Thaxter, C. H. T. Town-
send, and the Biological Department of Wellesley College.

We are indebted to Dr. F. W. Goding for the determination of
several Membracide, and to Mr. 8S. H. Seudder for the identification
of our series of Ceuthophili; a few Orthoptera from the Galapagos
Islands were also studied and named by Mr. Scudder (see Bulletin
Museum Comparative Zodlogy, Vol. XXV. No. 1).

The collections are in good condition; three days of each week
have been given by one of the Assistants to their inspection and
eare; the alcoholic Orthoptera have been assorted by families, and
many specimens have been remounted and labelled.

46

The arrangement of the Papilionide and Sphingide among the
Lepidoptera, and of the Termitide, Psocide, and Myrmeleonide
among the Neuroptera has been revised; in the Coleoptera a re-
arrangement of the Carabide has been commenced and consider-
able time has been spent in making portions of the collection more
easily available for specialists. The Menge collection of spiders
has been rearranged and labelled ; a part of the general collection
of Arachnida has also been rearranged. The crowded condition
of a large part of the Le Conte collection of Coleoptera makes a re-
arrangement desirable; this has been accomplished for all of the
Heteromera with the exception of the Tenebrionide.

The exhibition series for the North American Faunal Room, con-
sisting of twelve boxes of Insecta, and representatives of Myrio-
poda and Arachnida has been completed ; the selection of the series
for the African Faunal Room has been begun.

a

ee a

. es

47

REPORT ON THE INVERTEBRATA (EXCLUSIVE OF
INSECTS).

By Water Faxon.

But few accessions to the collections have been received during
the past year. The most noteworthy acquisitions consist of a fine
representative collection of the marine Crustacea of Japan (pur-
chased) ; two dozen specimens of Nautilus pompilius preserved in
the flesh, from the South Pacific (purchased); three shells of
Nautilus micromphalus, received from the Boston Society of Natu-
ral History ; and a collection of Corals, Acalephs, and Crusta-
cea, collected at the Bahama Islands in 1895 by the ** Wild Duck ”
Expedition, and presented by Mr. A. Agassiz. A large collection
of Molluscan shells brought together by the late Wm. W. Wheil-
don has been given to the Museum by his family. The Museum
is also indebted for the gift of specimens to Messrs. R. T. Jackson,
S. D. Judd, and C. B. Davenport.

The surface Schizopods of the ‘‘ Albatross’ Expedition of 1891,
which were sent last year to Dr. Arnold Ortmann in Strassburg,
have been returned, accompanied by a report which has been pub-
lished in the Bulletin of the Museum (Vol. XXV. No. 8, Septem-
ber, 1894). Professor A. E. Verrill has returned a lot of the
‘‘ Blake’ Mollusca, and Professor Alphonse Milne Edwards the
Galateidz of the “ Blake” Expeditions of 1877-79. The * Blake”
Galateide form the subject of an elaborate report by MM. Milne
Edwards and Bouvier, to be published, with twelve lithographic
plates, in the Museum Memoirs. The memoir entitled ‘ Consid-
érations Générales sur la Famille des Galathéidés” by Milne
Edwards and Bouvier, lately printed in Annales des Sciences
Naturelles (Zool., sér., 1894, Vol. XVI. pp. 191-327), is based
in part upon the ‘“ Hassler” and “ Blake”’ collections of our
Museum.

48

Material for study has been loaned to Dr. W. Giesbrecht of
Naples, Dr. H. J. Hansen of Copenhagen, and Miss M. J. Rath-
bun of the U. S. National Museum in Washington. A set of
deep-sea Crustacea from the “ Albatross”? Expedition of 1891
has been presented, with the permission of Colonel Marshall
McDonald, U. S. Fish Commisioner, to Dr. Carl Chun of Breslau,
and another to Oxford University.

Our collections have been visited by several specialists during
the year just closed. Professor C. E. Nutting, in particular,
spent considerable time in examining the Hydroids, in view of
a monographic treatment of the Hydroids of the West Indian
seas. Miss M. J. Rathbun spent two weeks in studying the Crus-
tacea, her special purpose being a critical examination of A. Milne
Edwards’s types of West Indian Brachyura.

The work in the Exhibition Rooms of the Museum has been
seriously delayed through failure to procure slate tablets of a
suitable quality to replace the old and faded cardboards. In the
mean time Miss Hannah Clark has employed a part of her time in
restoring faded and discolored labels, thereby improving in a
marked degree the appearance of some of the older exhibition col-
lections. Dr. R. T. Jackson has been of great assistance to me in
selecting certain fossil species for the systematic collections. The
Department has especially profited by the good will of Dr. W.
McM. Woodworth, who has selected and artfully prepared a collec-
tion of Worms for exhibition, more particularly for the Atlantic
and Systematic Rooms.

A good deal of time was spent last winter in reviewing the
alcoholic collections stored in the basement, which in some de-
partments, from lack of systematic arrangement and a plain
system of labelling, were in danger of becoming inaccessible.

The condition of the Conchological Collection has been a source
of anxiety to me ever since it was placed in my charge. This is
probably one of the largest collections of shells in the country,
and has acquired an especial value from the number of types it
contains, and from the fact that almost all of the specimens are
identified. The determination of such a large number of shells
represents a vast amount of labor bestowed upon the collection in
the past by Mr. J. G. Anthony and Professor C. E. Hamlin. But
the labors of both of these conchologists were closed by death be-
fore anything like a final systematic arrangement of the collection

Jb eo Ree eee

Sevedt sates peqpertebielieatn os —

ieee

49

was accomplished. Much of the original arrangement, moreover,
was lost when the collection was removed from the old part of the
building to the new. A large part of the collection consists of
shells which have been glued to glass and slate tablets. With
every movement of the drawers in which the tablets are placed the
shells are liable to become loose, and the whole contents of the
drawer to be thrown into confusion. A moiety of the collection
apparently formed a second series consisting of unmounted shells in
pasteboard trays, while scattered here and there are miscellaneous
lots which have never been distributed. When specialists have
come to consult this collection, the state of things described above
has brought dismay to the visitor and chagrin to the curator.
Miss Parker has now undertaken the arduous task of bringing this
collection to order. The whole is to be arranged systematically in
a single series, gaps being left for the insertion of future acquisi-
tions in their proper places. In order that specimens and labels
shall not part company, each tablet is placed in a paper tray.
Every drawer is marked on the outside by a printed Class label
and clearly written manuscript labels indicating the Family, Genus,
and Subgenus contained therein. In order to have a convenient
key to the collection, the arrangement is made to accord with the
Paetel Catalogue, a copy of which will be permanently deposited in
the Conchological Rooms. Miss Parker has already made good
progress in this work.

REPORT ON THE PALZONTOLOGICAL DEPARTMENT.

By Autpueus Hyatt.

CONSIDERABLE work has been accomplished in the investigation
of the life history of many species of Nautiloids, and a number of
preparations have been made of the early stages of important
forms. Several new genera and species have been incidentally
described in connection with this work, the types of which are
in the collections.

The fossils necessary to fill blanks in the Systematic Collection
of Cephalopods have been picked out and labelled, and are ready
to be mounted.

The department is indebted to Dr. R. T. Jackson for superin-
tending the work of mending the fossils of the Schary Collection,
and for considerable work in reviewing and arranging collections.

Three students in paleontology engaged in special research
under the direction of Dr. Jackson have had the privilege of
studying in this department.

A fine specimen of Triarthrus Becki has been received from
Dr. C. E. Beecher of Yale College which shows the antenne and
also a larval stage of the same species before the thoracic segments
have appeared. This last supplements the series of original
specimens in Walcott collection which begins with the stage
having two thoracic segments. The Museum is also indebted to
Dr. Beecher for a choice lot of silicified fossils from the Lower
Helderberg and Hamilton series, some Crinoids from Crawfords-
ville and a specimen of Enproops Danze from Mazon Creek. A
fine series of invertebrate fossils from the Tertiaries of the Atlantic
coast have been received from Prof. Wm. B. Clark of Johns
Hopkins University. :

The following papers have been published : —

Trias and Jura in the Western States. By Alpheus Hyatt, Bull.
Geol. Soc. America, Vol. V. pp. 395-434.

51

Carboniferous Cephalopods. Second Paper, by same. 4th Ann.
Rep. Geol. Surv. Texas, pp. 379-474 with 55 figures.

Phylogeny of an Acquired Characteristic. By same. Am. Nat.,
October, 1893, pp. 865-867, with one plate.

Phylogeny of an Acquired Characteristic. By same. Proc. Am.
Phil. Soc., Philadelphia, Vol. XXII, No. 143, pp. 349-647, with 14
Plates.

52

REPORT ON THE LIBRARY.

By Miss F. M. Siack.

Durine the year ending September 1, 1894, the Library has
received 578 volumes, 2,142 parts, and 84 pamphlets : —

VOLUMES. PARTS. PAMPHLETS.
ite eame eet (7) AMIN, ee hw 81 7
CHAD el Bis <span, (ae oy 6 1GE 792 56
PEC MARE ee? dc et oe Aan ee Ne Oe 357 0
FALCA CASS Ziceee | hoes gu pug ar oe AOS 900 21
Pamding bana hs ae a es a BL 0 0
Whitney Library. 2. 0. 0. 2 « 0 ies 0
578 2,142 84

The number of volumes now in the Library (exclusive of
pamphlets and the Whitney Library) is 21,602. There are
15,337 pamphlets bound in 2,597 volumes, making the total
number of volumes 24,199.

a. ae es oe,

ain

[A]
PUBLICATIONS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1893-94.

Of the Bulletin : —
Vol. XXV.

No.

No.

No.

[ Vol.

1. Reports on the DrepGine Operations off the West Coast of Central
America to the GaLApaGos, etc., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
“ Avpatross.” VII. The OrtuorTera of the Galapagos Islands. By S.
H. Scupper. pp. 25. 3 Plates. September, 1893.

2. Reports on the DrepGine OreraTions off the West Coast of Central
America to the GaLapagos, ete., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
“ Avpatross.” VIII. Compte-rendu sur les Panroropes. Par W. M.
ScHIMKEwITscH. pp.17. 2 Plates. December, 1898.

38. Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory. XXXVIII. A Method
of OxrentinG Smatt Oxgvsects for the Microtome. By W. McM. Woopn-
WORTH. pp. 38. December, 1895.

.4. Reports on the Drepaine Operations off the West Coast of Central

America to the GALaPacos, etc., by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer
.“ AvBaTross.” IX. Report on the TurBeLLARIA. By W. McM. Woop-
worTtH. pp.4. 1 Plate. January, 1894.

.5. Reports on the Drepcine Operations off the West Coast of Cen-

tral America, etc. X. Note préliminaire sur les Atcyonarres. Par Tu.
Sruper. pp.17. January, 1894.

. 6. Reports on the Drepernc Operations off the West Coast of Central

America, etc. XI. The Hyprorps. By S. F. Ctarkr. pp.7. 5 Plates.
February, 1894.

.7. Contributions from the Zodlogical Laboratory. XLI. The Origin of the

Enpocarpium in Bony Fisues. By A. T. Horsroox. pp. 19. 5 Plates.
August, 1894.
XXV. to be continued.|

o4

[B]

THE Faculty of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy will receive
applications from candidates desiring to occupy the table at the Naples
Zoological Station, which has been placed at its disposal from October
1, 1894.

The applicant must be (or have been recently) a student or instructor
at some American University, preferably a person who has taken the
degree of Ph. D. or S. D.; he must have published some creditable
original investigation, and should be recommended as an able investi-
gator by the Professor under whom he has studied.

Applicants will please forward to the undersigned their recommen-
dations, and a statement of their qualifications, and of the subject to
which they hope to devote themselves.

In order that the Faculty may make the most satisfactory disposi-
tion of the table during the whole year, the applicants are requested to
state the length of time they desire to remain at Naples, and also the
earliest and latest dates within which they can avail themselves of the
appointment.

The Faculty will, at suitable intervals, nominate to the Corporation
of Harvard College for approval the incumbent or incumbents for the
year 1894-96.

ALEXANDER AGASSIZ,

Director.

ee

50

[C]
INVESTED FUNDS OF THE MUSEUM.

In tHe Hanps or THE TREASURER OF Harvarp CoLieGe, Sept. 1, 1894.

PeMemis@operskund: . . 2 8. ke ee ek ce te wt nk ws, s SLOOONOIOD
MEIC Ry MEE Ma ccc a oC ae RG tel eh 5 i 50,000.00
POEM PPANTIAL HUNG: 2. hk ie kk i ee wn wes DOT GBSMO
eweversgudeupilsehund . 6. Blis, @ os oe wuts Bon ge 7,594.01
NEMMREMOEMEREIIAG ces se eve ka al ey ge eee ee, ed eet
Re PC MEMO Er bck caus is ke kw eta ae eee 7,740.66
WirsiniaeearretGibbsiHund 5 . . ... . sae . tb. ee 5,000.00

$585,737.11

The payments on account of the Museum are made by the Bursar of Harvard
College, on vouchers approved by the Curator. The accounts are annually exam-
ined by a committee of the Museum Faculty. The only funds the income of which
is restricted, the Gray and the Humboldt Funds, are annually charged in an analysis
of the accounts with vouchers to the payment of which the income is applicable.

The income of the Gray Fund can be applied to the purchase and maintenance of
collections, but not for salaries.

The income of the Virginia Barret Gibbs Scholarship Fund, of the value of $250,
is assigned annually, with the approval of the Faculty of the Museum, at the recom-
mendation of the Professors of Zodlogy and of Comparative Anatomy in Harvard
University, ‘‘in supporting or assisting to support one or more students who have
shown decided talents in Zoology, and preferably in the direction of Marine
Zoology.” 4

The income of the Humboldt Fund (about $400) can be applied for the benefit of
one or more students of Natural History, either at the Museum, the Newport
Marine Laboratory, the United States Fish Commission Station at Wood’s Holl,
or elsewhere.

Applications for the tables reserved for advanced Students at the Newport
Marine Laboratory, and for the tables at the Wood’s Holl Station, should be made
to the Director of the Museum before the 1st of May. Applicants should state their
qualifications, and indicate the course of study they intend to pursue.

See Appendix B of this Report for the conditions upon which the table at the
Naples Zoological Station is assigned.

QL . Harvard University. Museum
1 of Comparative Zoology

H37 Report

1886/87

1893/94

Biological
& M edical

Serials

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

STORAGE